NIS STANDARD INST

• Document Type: CREST
• Collection: General CIA Records
• Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
• Release Decision: RIPPUB
• Original Classification: C
• Document Page Count: 133
• Document Creation Date: November 11, 2016
• Document Release Date: September 16, 1998
• Sequence Number: 1
• Publication Date: March 1, 1967
• Content Type: FORM

RECORD
COPY 1
COPY NO.
----
PUB. DATE
Mar . 1 6
LOCATION
MASTER .
DATE RECEIVED
LOCATION
D P S TI S)
A E
Annr
STOCK
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
125
E
CUT TO
COPIES
D TE
CUT TO
COPIES
DATE
COPIES E TR YE
CUT TO
COPIES
DATE
CUT TO
COPIES
DATE
CUT TO
COPIES
DATE
MASTER
DATE
DATE
NUMBER OF COPIES
DATE
NUMBE?`OF COPIES
MO.
DAY
YR.
RECEIVED OR ISSUED
RECD
ISS 'D
BAL
MO.
DAY
YR.
RECEIVED OR ISSUED
RECD
I S S D
BAL
4
5
67
Dist. Unit
569
569
~,
0 5
0
4
6
Record Copy
1
568
s
S
G"
OCR F
i
(9
OR R
L;
(,'~
~I
a
e. 7
.7
Oki
-
s
t~
G7
/sG
~3
(o
ocA -0
s~ I
,A
lfa
G 71
n, t3
!
10
L-7
4-1
15
470
50 0
0
R
a o
19j
4
IS
'
I
'~R 9
zv
G7
1
(07
EYE- I
3
~
a
G7
r , s
/
t7'
0(J
It,
,
IS
a'i
E 0
[ t
a
to
l07
fS
~{
(1
k4proved For Release
199
/00
17 C
~P
8-
1 fl O aFi9001-
TITLE
WTc!nATT1nD TWQM Mo 1 Q6
SEC. CLASS.
 NUMBER OF COPIES
DATE
D
R
*T/I
C
'
7
DATE
7 AY
YR.
RECEIVED OR ISSUED
RECD
ISS'D
RAL
M0.
DAY
YR.
ISSUE
IVED O
RE
E
RECD
I S S ' D
BAL
p q~lrg~ For Relea
e 1
99/p
/ttl:
R
d34 i5A00030005
l 4
~7
~?
l45
/7
L
a
f
f~
::-
)? _
/
y
17
z5
7
t~
Lf
6
s a~ a
Deli - ?` _
C S
10113 "-
S
S"
_
S 1
/mss
O
A
i
~,2 fe,
m
2a
/n
6-0
FOIAb3b1
L
. J
~/
.Z !
fp~
Lrd
t
~j ~'S~Y
-
15
-
/ 33
-
9
W:~ / r
7 r~- 7
px
V
Q
!
OS
I
3y.
~~ -
` j
` ~,+e
/
/V
?
I
ere N -
130
-'
_
G
e
f
4
0
lr
I~
G4'
to _3Gr,~
L/
/?
For Releas
.p1.9
9/09
1211)
I
RO
NA --inn -
-6 X00
. __.. 3
q
77
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
W A R N I N G
This material contains information affecting the national defense of the United States within the meaning
of the espionage laws, Title 18, USC, Secs. 793 and 794, the transmission or revelation of which in any
manner to an unauthorized person is prohibited by law.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
March 1967
The NIS Standard Instructions are issued in implementation of NSCID No. 3
and contain a listing of NIS areas, outline guides reflecting basic intelligence re-
quirements, allocations of production responsibility, and instructions for the prep-
aration and processing of this intelligence,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
These Standard Instructions supersede all previous
editions, copies of which should be destroyed.
Concept, Direction, and Management of the National Intelligence Survey
Program
....................................................
Page
1
Allocations of Responsibility for Production and Maintenance .......... .
4
Contributor Statements .............................................
7
NIS Land Areas ................................................. ....
10
NIS Ocean Areas ....................................................
12
Editorial Instructions ..... .....................................
13
A. Transmittal of material ..........................................
13
B. Text specifications ..............................................
13
C. Tabular specifications ...........................................
15
D. Graphic specifications ............. ................. .........
17
E. General .......................................................
20
F. Sample pages ........................... 24 thru 36
Topical Coverage-Outline Guides
Basic Intelligence Factbook .................................. 37
General Survey ......................................... .... 39
Military Geography ................................................ 53
Transportation and Telecommunications ............................. 63
Sociological ................................................ ..... 75
Political .......................................................... 91
Economic ........................................................ 99
Armed Forces ................................................... 115
Marine Climate and Oceanography ............................. .... 131
NIS Land Areas Index Map ............................ . ... follows 138
NIS Ocean Areas Index Map ..... ......... .. .................. .. do
r` AL
1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Concept, Direction, and Management
of the National Intelligence Survey Program
Authority
The National Intelligence Survey (NIS) Program was
established pursuant to National Security Council In-
telligence Directive No. 3, which provides that basic in-
telligence shall be compiled and continuously maintained
in the NIS to cover foreign countries, areas, or broad
special subjects as required in the interest of national
security. USIB Memorandum USIB-D-51.1/8 of 28 Au-
gust 1963 reaffirmed the requirement for this program of
basic intelligence.
Concept
In general, the intelligence presented in the National
Intelligence Survey is concerned with the relatively un-
changing natural features, fundamental characteristics,
and basic resources of a foreign country or other area
and covers, to the extent pertinent, the geographic,
oceanographic,. transportation, sociological, political, eco-
nomic, scientific, and military aspects of such country
or area.
The NIS is a digest of basic intelligence, comprehen-
sive in scope but selective in detail, required as a founda-
tion for strategic planning, for high-level operational
planning, and for the development of foreign policy. It
is produced on a coordinated, interdepartmental basis
and is designed to present a balanced, well-rounded back-
ground in support of planning by high-level planners and
policy makers and their staffs in the Department of State,
the Department of Defense, the Joint Chiefs of Staff, the
military services and major military commands, and other
government agencies. Although it is not specifically
designed to meet their specialized needs, the NIS should
prove generally useful to the lower level planners and
operational elements.
Production for the NIS Program requires the con-
tinuation of an overall collection effort covering all for-
eign countries and areas. The intelligence data resulting
from this collection and subsequent processing necessarily
are more comprehensive and detailed than those appear-
ing in the printed NIS and constitute a reservoir of data
to serve as a basis for separate, supplemental, depart-
mental and interdepartmental basic intelligence pro-
duction.
The NIS outline guides contained in the NIS Standard
Instructions do not prescribe a requirement for uniformly
comprehensive NIS coverage on all countries or areas,
although they do provide a check list for any country,
including the unusual case where maximum coverage
would be required to support strategic and high-level
operational planning or development of foreign policy.
Accordingly, for each NIS area the extent of treatment
given to any topic covered in the outline guides over
and above that prescribed for the General Survey (for-
merly Chapter I-Brief) shall be based, for each pro-
duction or maintenance cycle, upon an explicit determina-
tion on an individual basis of the significance with which
that topic applies to the particular country or area.
Direction and Management
. The responsibility of the Director of Central Intel-
ligence (DCI) for coordination of the foreign intelligence
activities of the United States includes responsibility for
overall coordination of the NIS Program and of other
departmental and interdepartmental basic intelligence
programs. Under this general coordination of the DCI:
Heads of agencies have responsibility for depart-
mental basic intelligence programs in accordance with
applicable NSCIDs and DCIDs (including production
of the more detailed and transient basic intelligence
which may be required over and above the NIS) and
for ensuring coordination of their respective depart-
mental programs with the NIS Program.
Coordination of the NIS Program is accomplished
as indicated below:
1. The United States Intelligence Board (USIB) is
responsible for providing policy direction to the
NIS Program. For this purpose, USIB performs
the following functions:
a. Establishes overall policies for the Program.
b. Allocates responsibility for production and
maintenance of the NIS in accordance with the
mission, production capability, and primary in-
terest of the agencies concerned.
c. Establishes priorities for production of the
NIS,
d. Establishes policies for the dissemination of the
NIS.
2. The NIS Committee assists the USIB in carrying
out its responsibilities for the NIS Program and
is responsible to the USIB. The NIS Committee
consists of a designated representative from the
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Department of State, the Central Intelligence
Agency (CIA), the Defense Intelligence Agency
(DIA), and the Departments of Army, Navy, and
Air Force. The representative of the CIA is the
Chairman of the Committee. Other departments
and agencies may be invited to participate in the
work of the NIS Committee as agreed by the
Committee. CIA is responsible for general ad-
ministration of the NIS Program and shall provide
appropriate administrative and secretarial support
to the Committee and its Chairman as a service
of common concern. In carrying out its respon-
sibilities to the USIB, the NIS Committee shall:
a. Recommend to the USIB allocations of re-
sponsibility for the production and mainte-
nance of the NIS.
b. Recommend to the USIB priorities for NIS
production, based upon the anticipated needs
of high-level planners and policy makers.
c. Establish and monitor the NIS production and
maintenance (cyclical, updating revision of
published NIS) schedules based on USIB-
approved priorities and taking into account
agency capabilities and available resources.
d. Determine the scope and treatment to be given
to each NIS area.
e. Approve and promulgate NIS outline guides,
the NIS Standard Instructions in which they
are contained, and revisions thereto.
f. Approve for publication the NIS General
Surveys.
g. Report to USIB annually on the status, includ-
ing estimated costs, of the NIS Program as a
whole, and at such other times and on such
aspects of the Program as may be appropriate.
3. USIB agencies shall:
a. Produce and maintain, in accordance with NIS
outline guides and NIS Committee guidance,
the NIS units allocated to them by the USIB
as production and maintenance responsibilities
and as scheduled for production by the NIS
Committee. In meeting these responsibilities,
USIB agencies may arrange for appropriate
assistance from agencies of the government
not represented on USIB.
b. Implement as appropriate to their collection
responsibilities under NSCID No. 2 the collec-
tion efforts required for NIS production and
maintenance.
c. Advise the NIS Committee of departmental
basic intelligence produced, in progress, or
planned, which relates to an NIS area sched-
uled for production or maintenance, in order
that reference to such additional intelligence
may be incorporated, as appropriate, in such
NIS.
4. CIA performs the following services of common
concern with respect to the NIS Program:
a. Provides final editorial review of NIS contribu-
tions to ensure consistency and compliance
with procedures and guidance promulgated by
the NIS Committee.
b. Accomplishes final processing and reproduc-
tion of NIS units.
c. Disseminates the NIS in accordance with USIB
policy.
d. Issues NIS Committee approved guidance and
provides such administrative and other com-
mon services as the NIS Committee determines
can best be done centrally.
Content of the NIS
The General Survey is the basic unit of the NIS. It
provides comprehensive but concise coverage of the basic
characteristics of the area and includes the following
topics: Introduction, Geography, Transportation and
Telecommunications, Sociological, Political, Economic,
Scientific, and Armed Forces. The General Survey may
provide the entire NIS coverage on certain or most of the
basic topics for some countries. When appropriate, it is
supplemented by separate, detailed NIS units providing
more extensive coverage on important topics in the fields
of military geography, transportation, telecommunica-
tions,, sociology, politics, economics, and armed forces.
The production of these detailed units is necessarily
selective and in consonance with the availability of pro-
duction capability. The oceans of the world are covered
in a separate NIS series entitled Marine Climate and
Oceanography.
Detailed NIS units currently in production and their
identifying section numbers are:
Military Geography:
Sec. 22-Coasts and Landing Beaches
23-Weather and Climate
23S-Supplement on Meteorological Organization and
Facilities
24-Topography
25-Urban Areas
Transportation and Telecommunications:
Sec. 31-Railroads
32-Highways
33-Inland Waterways
35-Ports and Naval Facilities
36-Merchant Marine
37-Civil Air
38-Telecommunications
Sociological:
Sec. 41-Population
42-Characteristics of the People
43-Religion, Education, and Public Information
44-Manpower
45-Health and Sanitation
46-Welfare
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Political:
Sec. 54-Public Order and Safety
56-Intelligence and Security
57-Subversion and Insurgency (or Subversion)
Economic:
Sec. 61-Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
62F-Fuels
62P-Electric Power
63-Minerals and Metals
64-Manufacturing and Construction
65-Trade and Finance
Armed Forces:
Sec. 1-General
2-Ground Forces
3-Naval Forces
4-Air Forces
5-Air Defense Forces
6-Missile Forces
7-Military Space Systems
Marine Climate and Oceanography:
Sec. 1-Marine Climate
2-Oceanography
3-Effects of Marine Climate and Oceanography on
Military Operations
4-Climate and Oceanography of Selected Straits
Both the General Survey and the detailed units are
complemented by the NIS Basic Intelligence Factbook,
a general, ready reference publication that provides semi-
annual updating of the type of basic data appearing in
the Area Brief of the General Survey.
A complete inventory of available NIS units is pro-
vided in the NIS Production Status Report issued quar-
terly; this report is also bound into the concurrent Fact-
book. The Status Report lists all available NIS units
by area name and number; reference to the report facili-
tates requests for NIS as well as its filing, cataloging, and
substantive utilization. Gazetteers of geographic names
approved by the U.S. Board on Geographic Names are
issued for each area and are listed in the Status Report.
3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Allocations of Responsibility for Production
and Maintenance
Neither the following allocations nor any interpretation thereof
shall negate the basic principle that each department is re-
sponsible for the production of that intelligence which is
responsive to its departmental mission.
Chronology
Introduction
Geography
Transportation and Telecommunications
Sociological
Political
Economic
Scientific
Armed Forces
Area Brief
Summary Map
Section 22--Coasts and Landing Beaches
23.-Weather and Climate
23S-Supplement on Meteorological
Organization and Facilities
24-Topography
25-Urban Areas
TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
31-Railroads
32-Highways
33--Inland Waterways
35-Ports and Naval Facilities
36--Merchant Marine
37-Civil Air
38-Telecommunications
CIA--COORDINATOR
DIA-CIA jointly
CIA
CIA
DIA
DIA (with Navy and Air Force assistance)
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA (with joint assistance)
DIA
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
DIA (with Navy assistance)
DIA
DIA
DIA
DIA (with the assistance of the Bureau of the
Census, Department of Commerce, and for non-
Communist countries and Cuba and Yugoslavia,
the Air Force)
DIA
DIA
DIA
DIA
Navy
DIA (with Air Force assistance for non-Commu-
nist countries and Cuba and Yugoslavia)
DIA
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
SOCIOLOGICAL CIA-COORDINATOR
Section 41-Population CIA (with the assistance of the Bureau of the
Census, Department of Commerce)
42-Characteristics of the People CIA (with the assistance of the Bureau of the
Census, Department of Commerce)
43-Religion, Education, and Public Information CIA (with the assistance of the Bureau of the
Census, Department of Commerce)
44-Manpower CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Labor for non-Communist countries and Cuba
and Yugoslavia)
45-Health and Sanitation CIA (with DIA assistance for Communist coun-
tries, excluding Cuba and Yugoslavia)
DIA (for non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia)
46-Welfare CIA (with the assistance of the Bureau of the
Census, Department of Commerce, for non-
Communist countries and Cuba and Yugo-
slavia)
POLITICAL CIA-COORDINATOR
Section 54-Public Order and Safety CIA
56-Intelligence and Security CIA
57-Subversion and Insurgency CIA (with DIA assistance)
57-Subversion (alternative section) CIA
ECONOMIC CIA-COORDINATOR
Section 61-Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Agriculture and the Fish and Wildlife Service,
Department of the Interior, for non-Communist
countries and Cuba and Yugoslavia)
62F-Fuels CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
the Interior for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
62P-Electric Power DIA
63-Minerals and Metals CIA (with joint assistance)
A. General ' CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
the Interior for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
the Interior for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
the Interior for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
D. Nonmetallic and industrial minerals CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
the Interior for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
E. Construction materials
F. Comments on principal sources
DIA
CIA (with joint assistance)
5
MGMUNOWMhow
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
ECONOMIC (Continued)
Section 64-Manufacturing and Construction
A. General
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
C. Vehicles
D. Aircraft production
E. Shipbuilding
F. Explosives (industrial and military)
G. Arms and ammunition (including explosive
devices)
H. Missiles and space equipment
1. Other military equipment and supplies
J. Telecommunications and electronic equipment
K. Chemical industries
L. Agricultural processing industries
M. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
N. Construction industries
0. Comments on principal sources
65-Trade and Finance
CIA--COORDINATOR (Continued)
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Commerce for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Commerce for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
DIA
DIA
DIA (with Navy assistance)
DIA
DIA
DIA
DIA
DIA
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Commerce for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Commerce for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Commerce for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Commerce for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department of
Commerce for non-Communist countries and
Cuba and Yugoslavia)
Section 1.---General
2--Ground Forces
3---Naval Forces
4--Air Forces
5-Air Defense Forces
6---Missile Forces
7---Military Space Systems
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
Section 1--Marine Climate
2---Oceanography
3---Effects of Marine Climate and Oceanography on
Military Operations
4---Climate and Oceanography of Selected Straits
DIA-.COORDINATOR
DIA (with Army and Navy assistance)
DIA-COORDINATOR
DIA
Navy
Navy (with DIA assistance)
Navy (with DIA assistance)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Contributor Statements
Each published unit of the NIS contains a contributor state-
ment, approved by the NIS Committee, showing the principal
agency or agencies contributing to and responsible for the
preparation of that NIS unit. The approved contributor
statements are listed below.
This General Survey was prepared for the NIS
under the general direction of the NIS Committee.
Geography, Transportation and Telecommunica-
tions, and Armed Forces were prepared under the
general supervision of the Defense Intelligence
Agency; Chronology, Introduction, Sociological,
Political, Economic, and Scientific (with appro-
priate joint assistance and coordinated by the Sci-
entific Intelligence Committee) were prepared
under the general supervision of the Central In-
telligence Agency.
Section 22-Coasts and Landing Beaches
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency, with a contribution
on coastal oceanography from the U.S. Naval
Oceanographic Office.
Section 23-Weather and Climate
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 23S-Supplement on Meteorological Organiza-
tion and Facilities
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 24-Topography
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 25-Urban Areas
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Defense Intelligence Agency; popula-
tion data have been coordinated with the Bureau
of the Census, Department of Commerce.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Defense Intelligence Agency, with a
contribution on airfields from the Department of
the Air Force; population data have been coordi-
nated with the Bureau of the Census, Department
of Commerce.
Section 31-Railroads
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 32-Highways
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 33-Inland Waterways
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 35-Ports and Naval Facilities
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 36-Merchant Marine
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence.
7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
Section 37--Civil Air
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Defense Intelligence Agency.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Defense Intelligence Agency, with a
contribution on airfields from the Department of
the Air Force.
Section 38--Telecommunications
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 41--Population
This section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Central Intelligence
Agency by the Bureau of the Census, Department
of Commerce.
Section 42----Characteristics of the People
This section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Central Intelligence
Agency by the Bureau of the Census, Department
of Commerce.
Section 43---Religion, Education, and Public Information
This section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Central Intelligence
Agency by the Bureau of the Census, Department
of Commerce.
Section 44---Manpower
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Central Intelligence Agency.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency by the Department of Labor.
Section 45---Health and Sanitation
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Central Intelligence Agency with the
assistance of the Defense Intelligence Agency.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Defense Intelligence Agency.
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 46-Welfare
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Central Intelligence Agency.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency by the Bureau of the Census,
Department of Commerce.
Section 54-Public Order and Safety
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 56-Intelligence and Security
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency (coordinated with
the Defense Intelligence Agency and the military
services).
Section 57-Subversion and Insurgency
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency with the assistance of
the Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 57-Subversion (alternative section)
This section was prepared for the NIS by the Cen-
tral Intelligence Agency.
Section 61-Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Central Intelligence Agency.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency by the Department of Agri-
culture and the Fish and Wildlife Service, Depart-
ment of the Interior,
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia. This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Central Intelligence Agency.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia). This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency by the Department of the In-
terior. (When appropriate.) Information on nu-
clear fuels was coordinated by the Joint Atomic
Energy Intelligence Committee.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 62P-Electric Power
This section was prepared for the NIS by the De-
fense Intelligence Agency. (When appropriate.)
information on nuclear power was coordinated by
the Joint Atomic Energy Intelligence Committee.
Section 63-Minerals and Metals
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency. Contributors of subsections
were: 63A, 63B, 63C, 63D, Central Intelligence
Agency; 63E, Defense Intelligence Agency; 63F,
joint. (When appropriate.) Information on nu-
clear metals was coordinated by the Joint Atomic
Energy Intelligence Committee.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency. Contributors of subsections
were: 63A, 63B, 63C, 63D, Department of the In-
terior; 63E, Defense Intelligence Agency; 63F,
joint. (When appropriate.) Information on nu-
clear metals was coordinated by the Joint Atomic
Energy Intelligence Committee.
Section 64-Manufacturing and Construction
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency. Contributors of subsections
were: 64A, 64B, 64K, 64L, 64M, 64N, Central In-
telligence Agency; 64C, 64D, 64E (with Navy as-
sistance), 64F, 64G, 64H, 641, 64J, Defense In-
telligence Agency; 640, joint.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency. Contributors of subsections
were: 64A, 64B,
64K,
64L,
64M, 64N, Department
of Commerce;
64C,
64D,
64E (with Navy as-
sistance), 64F,
64G,
64H,
641, 64J, Defense In-
telligence Agency; 640, joint.
Section 65-Trade and Finance
(For Communist countries, excluding Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section was prepared for the
NIS by the Central Intelligence Agency.
(For non-Communist countries and Cuba and
Yugoslavia.) This section. was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Central
Intelligence Agency by the Department of Com-
merce.
Sections 1 through 7
These sections were prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency, with a contribution
on materiel from the Foreign Science and Tech-
ryology Center, Department of the Army, and with
contributions on merchant marine and materiel
from the Office of Naval Intelligence, Department
of the Navy.
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
Section 1-Marine Climate
This section was prepared for the NIS by the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 2-Oceanography
This section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Director of Naval Intel-
ligence by the U.S. Naval Oceanographic Office.
Section 3-Effects of Marine Climate and Oceanography
on Military Operations
This section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Director of Naval Intel-
ligence by the U.S. Naval Oceanographic Office,
with a contribution on air operations from the
Defense Intelligence Agency.
Section 4-Climate and Oceanography of Selected Straits
This section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Director of Naval Intel-
ligence by the U.S. Naval Oceanographic Office,
with a contribution on climate from the Defense
Intelligence Agency.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
NIS Land Areas
(For boundaries see NIS Land Areas Index Map at back. Offshore
island possessions are normally included in the related NIS Land Areas.)
Nip ::SCRIPTION OF NIS AREAS (TITLE IN CAPITAL LETTERS)
IRELAND
FRANCE, Monaco
NETHERLANDS
BELGIUM
LUXEMBOURG
DENMARK, Faeroe Islands
PORTUGAL, Azores, Cape Verde Islands, Madeira
Islands
32 ARABIAN PENINSULA, Bahrain, Iraq - Saudi Arabia
Neutral Zone, Kamaran, Kuria Muria Islands, Kuwait,
Kuwait - Saudi Arabia Neutral Zone, Muscat and
Oman, Perim Island, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, South Arabia
(including Socotra), Trucial States, Yemen
32A YEMEN
32B SOUTH ARABIA WITH MUSCAT AND OMAN
33 IRAN
34 AFGHANISTAN
35 INDIA, Andaman Islands, Bhutan, Jammu and Kashmir,
Laccadive Islands, Nepal, Nicobar Islands, Sikkim
35A NEPAL
36 PAKISTAN
37 CEYLON
38 BURMA
39A COMMUNIST CHINA
For geographic treatment, Communist China is divided
into five parts as follows:
9 SPAIN, Andorra, Balearic Islands, Canary Islands, Isla
de Albor'an
10 NORWAY, Svalbard, Jan Mayen
25X6A SWEDEN
12 FINLAND
13A EAST GERMANY, Soviet Zone in
14
15
16
17
1.8
19
20
2.1
22
23
24
25A
25B
25C
26
27
28A
28B
29
30
POLAND
SWITZERLAND, Liechtenstein
1. Sinkiang
II. Northeast China
III. North China
AUSTRIA
ITALY, San Marino, Vatican City
IV. South China
V. Tibetan Highlands
CZECHOSLOVAKIA
39B
NATIONALIST CHINA, all Nationalist-held islands
HUNGARY
39C
HONG KONG AND MACAO
ALBANIA
40
MONGOLIA
YUGOSLAVIA
41A
NORTH KOREA
RUMANIA
41B
SOUTH KOREA
BULGARIA
42
THAILAND
GREECE
43
INDOCHINA, Cambodia
Laos
North Vietnam
South
GIBRALTAR
MALTA, Maltese Islands
43A
,
,
,
Vietnam
CAMBODIA
CYPRUS
43B
LAOS
U.S.S.R.
43C
NORTH VIETNAM
For geographic treatment, the U.S.S.R. is divided into
43D
SOUTH VIETNAM, Paracel Islands
Spratl
Island
and
five parts as follows:
,
y
,
islands and reefs eastward to the Treaty Limits of the
.L European U.S.S.R. and the Caucasus
Philippines
IL Soviet Central Asia
44
Brunei
Sin
a
ore
III. Western Siberia
44C
,
g
p
Ad1FlRE
A=RE
IV. Central Siberia
V. Eastern Siberia, including Kuril Islands and
46
TUNISIA
Sakhalin
47
ALGERIA
For Ports and Naval Facilities, the U.S.S.R. is divided
48
MOROCCO, Ifni, Ceuta
Melilla
into four parts as follows:
49
,
LIBYA
1. Pacific Coast
50A
GHANA
II. Arctic Coast
50B
NIGERIA
III. Baltic Sea
50E
GUINEA
IV. Black and Caspian Seas
50F
MAURITANIA
TURKEY
50G
.
SENEGAL
SYRIA
50H
MALI
LEBANON
50J
UPPER VOLTA
JORDAN
50K
IVORY COAST
IRAO
50L
NIGER
50M
DAHOMEY
10
25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
NIS DESCRIPTION OF NIS AREAS (TITLE IN CAPITAL LETTERS)
NIS DESCRIPTION OF NIS AREAS (TITLE IN CAPITAL LETTERS)
50N
TOGO
81A
WEST INDIES, Anguilla, Antigua, Barbados, Barbuda,
50P
SPANISH SAHARA
Caicos Islands, Cayman Islands, Dominica, Grenada,
50Q
SIERRA LEONE
Grenadines, Montserrat, Nevis, St. Christopher [St.
50R
PORTUGUESE GUINEA
Kitts], St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Tobago, Trinidad, Turks
50S
GAMBIA
Islands
51
LIBERIA
81B
BERMUDA, BAHAMAS, AND BRITISH VIRGIN
52A
CHAD
ISLANDS
52B
CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC
81C
JAMAICA, Morant Cays, Pedro Cays
52C
CAMEROON
82
NETHERLAND ANTILLES, Aruba, Bonaire, Curacao,
52D
GABON
Saba, St. Martin (Dutch part), Sint Eustatius
52E
CONGO (BRAZZAVILLE)
83
FRENCH WEST INDIES, Desirade, Guadeloupe, Iles
52F
EQUATORIAL GUINEA, Rio Muni, Fernando Po and
Annob6n (Spanish), Sao Tome e Principe (Portuguese)
des Saintes, Marie-Galante, Martinique, St. Barthelemy,
St. Martin (French part)
53
UNITED ARAB REPUBLIC, Gaza Strip
84
U.S. ISLANDS IN THE CARIBBEAN, Corn Islands,
54
SUDAN
Navassa Island, Puerto Rico, Quita Sueno Bank,
55A
ETHIOPIA
Roncador Bank, Serrana Bank, Serranilla Bank, Swan
55B
SOMALIA, French Somaliland
Islands, Virgin Islands (U.S. part)
56B
UGANDA
85
COLOMBIA, Archipielago de San Andres y Providencia,
Isla de Malpelo
56D
KENYA
56E
TANZANIA
86
VENEZUELA
57A
ZAMBIA
87
ECUADOR, Galapagos Islands
57B
RHODESIA
88
PERU
57C
MALAWI
89
CHILE, Easter Island, Isla Lennox, Isla Nueva, Isla Sala
58
MOZAMBIQUE
y G6mez, Isla San Ambrosio, Isla San Felix, Isla
59
ANGOLA, Cabinda
Fernandez
60A
CONGO (KINSHASA)
90
ARGENTINA, Isla Martin Garcia
60B
BURUNDI
91
URUGUAY
60C
RWANDA
92
PARAGUAY
61
Botswana, Lesotho, South-West Africa,
SOUTH AFRICA
93
BOLIVIA
d
d
,
Swaziland
94
e,
a
BRAZIL, Fernando de Noronha, Ilha de Trin
82
MALAGASY REPUBLIC, Madagascar, Reunion, Comoro
Islands
Rochedos Sao Pedro e Sao Paulo
For geographic treatment, Brazil is divided into two
parts as follows:
63
INDIAN OCEAN ISLANDS, Aldabra Islands, Amster-
dam Island, Chagos Archipelago, Christmas Island,
Farquhar Atoll, Heard
Crozet Islands
os Islands
C
1. Southeast Brazil
H. Northwest Brazil
i
S
,
,
oc
Maldive Is-
uelen Islands
Ker
Desroches
Il
l
d
I
95
nam
ur
THE GUIANAS, French Guianas~tarlp,
LL 3It(CC77HH
,
g
,
e
an
,
s
McDonald Islands, Prince Edward
Mauritius
lands
95A
GUYANA
,
,
Islands, St. Paul Island, Seychelles
95B
95C
SURINAM
FRENCH GUIANA
64
SOUTH ATLANTIC ISLANDS, Ascension Island, Bouvet
Island, Falkland Islands, St. Helena, South Georgia,
25X6A South Sandwich Island, Tristan da Cunha Islands
67
GREENLAND
99
PHILIPPINES
68
ICELAND
100
INDONESIA, Borneo, Celebes, Java, Portuguese Timor,
d
h Sh
l
t New Guinea
W
Ti
an
et
ANTARCTICA, South Orkney Islands, Sout
es
mor,
Sumatra,
2 X6A Islands
101
WEST PACIFIC ISLANDS, Caroline Islands, Johnston
Marshall Islands, Midway Islands, Sand Island,
Island
,
Wake Island
71
GUATEMALA
I
102
s-
SOUTHWEST PACIFIC ISLANDS, British Solomon
72
BRITISH HONDURAS
lands Protectorate, Ellice Islands, Colony of Fiji, Gil-
73
HONDURAS
bert Islands, Nauru, New Caledonia and Dependencies,
74
EL SALVADOR
New Hebrides, New Guinea (territory), Ocean Islands,
75
NICARAGUA
Papua (territory), Solomon Islands, Tonga
76
COSTA RICA, Cocos Island
103
SOUTH PACIFIC ISLANDS, Clipperton Island, Cook
77
PANAMA, Canal Zone
Islands, Kingman Reef, Line Islands, Marquesas Is-
78
CUBA
lands, Palmyra Island, Phoenix Islands, Pitcairn Island,
79
HAITI
Samoa Islands, Society Islands, Tokelau Islands, Tua-
80
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
motu Archipelago, Tubuai Islands
11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
NIS Ocean Areas
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
(For boundaries see NIS Ocean Areas Index Map at back.)
Part III NORTHEASTERN SOUTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part IV SOUTH-CENTRAL SOUTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part V NORTH-CENTRAL SOUTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part VI SOUTH-CENTRAL NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part VII NORTH-CENTRAL NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part VIII BERING AND CHU.KCHI SEAS
Part IX WESTERN NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part X SOUTHWESTERN NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part XI SOUTH CHINA SEA AND SEAS OF THE
MALAY ARCHIPELAGO
Part XII WESTERN SOUTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part XIII NORTHWESTERN NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
106, Part I NORTHEASTERN INDIAN OCEAN
Part II SOUTHEASTERN INDIAN OCEAN
Part III SOUTHWESTERN INDIAN OCEAN
Part IV NORTHWESTERN INDIAN OCEAN
NIS TITLES OF AREAS
104, Part I WESTERN NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Part II NORTHERN NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Part III EAST-CENTRAL NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Part IV EQUATORIAL ATLANTIC OCEAN
Part V CENTRAL SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Part VI SOUTHWESTERN SOUTH ATLANTIC AND
SOUTHEASTERN SOUTH PACIFIC
OCEANS
Part VII SOUTHEASTERN SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Part VIII EASTERN SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN
Part IX MEDITERRANEAN AND BLACK SEAS
Part X NORTHEASTERN NORTH ATLANTIC AND
THE BALTIC SEA
Part XI NORWEGIAN, GREENLAND, AND BARENTS
SEAS
105, Part I NORTHEASTERN NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
Part II SOUTHEASTERN NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN
12
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Page
A. Transmittal of material .... 13
1. Letter of transmittal .... 13
2. Manuscript ...... 13
3. Graphic material ............... 13
B. Text specifications 13
1. Typing of text ..... ........................ .................. 13
2. Text headings ............................ . ................... 14
3. References to figures and text ........... .... 14
4. Quotations and extract matter .. ........ .... ............... 14
5. Footnotes ................... ........ ..... . ...... 14
........
6. Comments on principal sources .................... ........ ..... 15
C. Tabular specifications ....................... ...... ............... 15
1. Tabulations .... ........ .............. ....
... 15
2. Tables ........................ ........ .................... 16
3. Typing of tables ........................ ........................ 16
4. Table titles and figure numbers ........... ..... ............. 16
5. Table stubs and column headings ................ 16
6. Table footnotes and source references ............................. 16
7. Conventional entries 16
8. Statistical totals ..........................
9. Table construction ...................... 17
D. Graphic specifications ......................... . 17
1. General ... ................................ .................. 17
2. Maps ....................................... .......... 18
3. Photographs ......................... ....... .......... ....... 18
.4. Captions . ............. .................................... 19
E. General ................................. ........ ............... 20
1, General Survey specifications ........ 20
2. Supplement specifications .......... ......... .................. 20
3. Consolidated units ................ 20
4. Classification and control .......... 20
............
5. Treatment of names ........................ .................... 20
6. Technical terminology ....................... ................... 21
7. Statistical data 22
8. Editorial style ......................... ..... ................ 22
9. Special maintenance ............... 23
F. Sample pages .................................... 23
Table of Contents ................................................. 24
Figures list ............. ..... 25
Caption list ............. ................................... 26 and 27
Text .................................................. 28, 29, and 30
Tabulations .............................. ..................... 31
Tables for single-column reproduction ... ....... ........ ...... .... 32
Tables for two-column reproduction .................................. 33
Tables typed broadside ...................................... 34 and 35
Locator 36
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Editorial Instructions
A. Transmittal of material
1. Letter of transmittal
NIS material delivered to the Office of Basic Intelli-
gence (OBI/ CIA) requires a letter of transmittal (on
OBI standard form 1320, original and two copies). The
following are itemized in the letter: number of pages
of typed manuscript, including title page, Table of
Contents, Figures list, text, tables, and caption list, the
number of graphic items submitted, and apron material.
The letter contains specifications regarding the classifica-
tion and control of the material transmitted. It also
specifies security classification and control for photographs
and insert maps of which extra copies are printed without
NIS references. If the control applies only until publi-
cation, this must be clearly stated.
2. Manuscript
NIS manuscript is submitted to OBI in a minimum of
four complete, assembled copies for General Survey sec-
tions and a minimum of three copies for all other sec-
tions.* Each of the assembled sets of manuscript in-
cludes in sequence, 1) title page, 2) Table of Contents,
3) Figures list, 4) text, 5) tables, 6) caption list, and 7)
apron material.
Pagination begins with the first page of the text and
is consecutive throughout the manuscript (including each
page of the tables, which follow the text in sequence
of figure numbers). Pagination is centered at the bot-
tom of each page and should not be by numbering
machine, as this is reserved for a later stage in the
processing.
Manuscript with more than nominal alterations is not
acceptable. Any necessary corrections or additions
should be in black ink. Text or tabular matter me-
chanically reproduced from printed or other material is
submitted in legible positive print form, with type ap-
proximately typewriter elite size or larger.
The supporting items, typed double spaced, are as
follows:
Title page, containing section number and title, and
the statement: "This is a preliminary draft of Section
-, NIS -. It has not been finally edited or recon-
ciled with other NIS sections and should not be re-
produced. This section has been approved for use
in the NIS by (agency, month and year)."
Table of Contents for each section, including gen-
erally only the No. 1, 2, and 3 heads appearing in
the text (sample, page 24).
* Agency coordinators should be consulted for number of
copies to be prepared.
Figures list, which contains in sequence all figures with
the following details for each: figure number as deter-
mined by sequence in tentative placement, the figure
title, and the category identification in parentheses
(table, photo, map, chart, sketch, plan, or diagram).
Figure entries should be short enough to print on a
single line (characters and essential spaces limited
to approximately 70). Dates are omitted unless
needed to differentiate otherwise identical entries
(sample, page 25). The Figures list is immediately
followed by a Contributor Statement, as approved by
the NIS Committee, showing the principal agency or
agencies contributing to and responsible for prepara-
tion of the NIS unit (see Allocations, Contributor State-
ments,.and sample, page 25).
Caption list (used for typesetting the captions of all
graphic items). Figure numbers for all tables and
graphics are listed in sequence. The exact wording
of the captions for all graphics is included (see
D, 4, Captions, page 28). The titles of the tables need
not be included in the caption list since this informa-
tion is furnished separately with each table (samples,
pages 26, and 32-35).
3. Graphic material
Graphic material, including photographs, is assembled
separately from manuscript, in three complete sets with
each item in sequence according to figure number.*
The three sets consist of an original and two copies of
all black and white material, and three color proofs of
multicolor graphic material. * * The original and copies
of all graphic items are plainly marked with the NIS
Area number, section number, and figure number, and
the original classification of the individual graphic (not
necessarily as high as the classification of the NIS
section). The original plates of multicolor maps are
retained by the contributor until receipt of a memo-
randum from OBI.*** These originals are then for-
warded as directed by OBI for final reproduction. (See
D, Graphic specifications.)
B. Text specifications
1. Typing of text
The text is prepared using one side only of the paper.
For typed copies the original should be on substantial
8" x 121/2" paper. Copies produced by duplicating
* Only one set of maps is required for the Geography Section
of the General Survey.
By special arrangement for certain sections, this requirement
has been reduced to two or, in some cases, one color proof
if black and white proofs can be substituted satisfactorily.
Plates for the Transportation and Telecommunications and
the Armed Forces Sections of the General Survey accompany
the manuscript.
13
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
processes may be on 8" x 13" paper, but paper size
should be uniform in any one submission. To be ac-
ceptable, all copy must be clearly and easily legible
throughout. The text is typed triple spaced, normally
with 20 to 21 lines to the page. All paragraphs without
headings begin with a five-space indentation. Normal
capitalization is used throughout (including headings),
without use of continuous capitalization or of underlining
except for foreign or other terms to be italicized. The
last word on a typed line is always a complete word.
Hyphens are not used at the ends of lines even if this
leaves an unusually ragged right-hand margin. The
manuscript conforms to the samples (pages 28-30), with
margins as shown. Each manuscript page includes the
classification at top and bottom. The material up to and
including page 1 of the text also contains in the top
margin, at the left, the section release date. The top
margin, at the right, on these same pages contains the
NIS Area number and section number. It is desirable
but not mandatory that this identification be continued
on all pages of the section. A section subject in its en-
tirety to NO FOREIGN DISSEM carries this control
at top and bottom of the title page. Sections in which
the control applies only to the Comments on Principal
Sources should carry the statement on each of the con-
trolled pages. The first page of text includes the section
title centered above the text. Text pages are numbered
consecutively within each section at bottom center (not
using a numbering machine, which is reserved for a
later stage in processing).
2. Text headings
Headings used in NIS text material are as follows:
(Grade of head,
not typed in ins. )
Coasts and Landing Beaches (Section title)
A. General ................................. (No. 1)
1. Coasts .......................... ..... (No. 2)
a. Northern peninsula--text follows ......... (No. 3)
(1) Williams Bay area--text follows (No. 4)
(a) Vicinity of Port Smith--text . .... (No. 5)
t) Seaward Approaches--text ... (No. 6)
a) Anchorage areas--text .... (No. 7)
Section titles are centered. No. 1 heads are typed
flush with the left margin of the text; inferior heads are
successively indented five typewriter spaces. No. 1 and
No. 2 heads stand alone; text begins on the next line
with an indentation of five spaces and thereafter is flush
left. Remaining heads each end with two hyphens; text
follows immediately on the same line, with succeeding
lines beginning flush with the left text margin. Heads
lower than Nos. 3 or 4 are rarely needed.
Capitalization of section titles follows the NITS Out-
line Guide. In all other headings (except No. 6 heads)
only proper names and the initial letter of each title are
capitalized. In No. 6 heads the initial letter of each
major word is capitalized.
Headings may stand alone when immediately followed
by the next grade of head. For certain material (as in
Coasts and Landing Beaches), a heading may be fol-
lowed on the next line or lines by coordinates, hydro-
graphic chart references, etc., or underlined side heads
may be used without any key number or letter.
Numbers used to designate items of a series within the
text carry a. single parenthesis, e.g., 1), (sample, page 30).
3. References to figures and text
Figures, including both tables and graphic material,
are cited in the text by using figure numbers assigned
by the contributor. Reference may be integral in a
sentence, ". . . as shown in FIGURES 3 through 6 . . .,"
but the shorter, parenthetical form "( FIGURES 3 through
6)" is preferred. It is often desirable to use the refer-
ence flexibly to differentiate types of figures, e.g.,
. . . tabulated in FIGURE 7 ..." or "... shown on the
map, FIGURE 8."
Statements such as ". . . in the following table
or ". . . in the table above . . ." should be used only
for material close to the point of reference. When de-
tailed supporting tables will not appear adjacent to re-
lated text, the text may be appropriately amplified to
incorporate essential data.
Because figure numbering is subject to change in pub-
lication, reference to tables or graphic material in other
sections is by an abbreviated caption, the type of mate-
rial, and the number or title of the section in which it
appears, e.g., "(population density map, SECTION 41)."
Tentative placement of tables and appropriate graphic
items within the text is indicated by large carets with
figure numbers on the right margin of text pages (sam-
ples, pages 28-30). Only one caret is used for each
figure, but several figures may be inserted in a single
caret. Figures such as fold-in maps that are expected
to follow the printed text are itemized after the last
line of manuscript text.
Within sections, cross-references are made to the high-
est order of text topic that will adequately indicate where
the referenced material will be found. Another section
covering the same NIS Area is referred to by "(SECTION
36)" or "(SECTION 36, Merchant Marine)." Reference to
a subtopic in another section may be "(See Education,
in SECTION 43)" or "(Subsection 43, B, Education)."
4. Quotations and extract matter
Quotations not exceeding three typewritten lines are
included in running text within quotation marks. Longer
quotations, and other subordinate material to be printed
as "extract" in smaller type, are without quotation marks,
indented five spaces for all lines, and typed double spaced
(samples, page 30).
5. Footnotes
Footnotes are avoided insofar as possible but when
considered necessary are indicated by asterisks to a limit
of three per page. Footnote material of general sig-
nificance for a segment of text may be printed as a brief
"NOTE-." In manuscript the footnote is inserted on the
line :following the reference, separated from the text by
solid lines above and below; the footnote begins with an
indentation of one space from the left margin and is
typed double spaced (sample, page 28).
14
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
6. Comments on principal sources
References to sources are rarely included in running
text but are confined as much as possible to the topic,
Comments on Principal Sources. If present in a section,
this topic is at the end of the text and is controlled
NO FOREIGN DISSEM. The Comments on Principal
Sources provides an evaluation of the principal source
material actually used in preparing the section and
thereby informs the user of the general credibility to
be accorded the intelligence contained in the section.
By indicating those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable, it provides general
guidance for collection effort. No Comments on Princi-
pal Sources are included in the General Survey sections.
In most of the detailed sections, the Comments on
Principal Sources consists of several paragraphs of text.
Treatment can parallel the topical organization of the
section or can evaluate specific sources or groups of
sources used. Topics or areas for which there is a critical
lack of adequate or reliable information should be
pointed out. The topical evaluation may use a tabular
presentation. In general, reference is not made to spe-
cific United States sources except in broad terms such
as ". . . reports prepared by the U.S. Department of
Commerce, Department of Defense, Department of State,
and the Central Intelligence Agency ..." or it may be
noted that ". . . U.S. Foreign Service reports were in-
dispensable in the preparation of this section"; specific
attache and other reports may be identified if desired.
Source references in the evaluative statement should
be as brief as is feasible and would normally include
author or authority, title, and date, e.g., ". . . of special
interest on urban areas is L. Goure's Civil Defense in
the Soviet Union, 1962." The order of the bibliographic
items can be varied to fit the text. Titles should be in
the original language and need to be translated only
if not obvious. Articles in periodicals should give author,
title of article, periodical title, and either month and year,
or volume, number, and year, e.g., ". . . Tree crops are
discussed in P. Goujon, `Industrial Tree Planting in
Morocco,' Unasylva, vol. 17, no. 68, 1963." Footnotes
to the source of a table are rarely used, but if needed
should follow the same general format as that recom-
mended above for books and articles.
When there is need for more extensive consideration
of sources than can be included in text format, and it
is considered desirable to publish a list, the topic is
divided into, "1. Evaluation," and "2. List of sources."
The evaluation may be further broken down, as ap-
propriate. For example:
F. Comments on principal sources
1. Evaluation
a. Coastal oceanography
b. Coasts and landing beaches
(1) Photography
(2) Maps and charts
(3) Documents
2. List of sources
Sources are presented in an alphabetical listing in
which consecutive numbers are assigned. References to
1T /l _ iT-- l1-----
specific sources in the evaluation should refer to the
assigned number rather than to the entire bibliographic
citation, e.g., "Adequate data are available from Source
6." Items are typed double spaced, and the list is con-
tinuous in the following order and typewriter style:
Books and monographs: author (last name first), au-
thors (if more than three, give first author only, followed
by "and others"); government authorship (country name
or lesser administrative unit, comma, agency name,
translated only if not recognizable) ; corporate author-
ship (use official name of organization), period. Title
(capitals and lowercase, underlined, followed by transla-
tion in parentheses if not recognizable), period. Edi-
tion, volume; note series number if needed for specific
identification. Place of publication, colon, publishing
body if different from authority (capitals and lowercase),
period. Date, period ("n. d." if none given). Total
pages if desired.
Netherlands, Centraal Bureau voor de Statistiek. Jaarcifers
voor Nederland (Statistical Year Book of the Netherlands).
The Hague: Koninklijke Drukkerij on Uitgeverij. 1965.
256 p.
Articles: author (s) as for books, period. Title (in
quotes; translation, if needed, outside quotes), periodical
title (capitals and lowercase, underlined), comma, series,
part, volume, number, selected pages, year (all lower-
case and separated by commas, abbreviated as appro-
priate, e.g., ser., ed., vol.), period.
Jones, Arthur B., and Smith, Stefan. "The Argentine Cattle
Industry Under Peron," Agriculture in Perspective, vol. 2,
no. 6, p. 23-27, 1961.
Titles of unpublished works should be placed in quota-
tion marks rather than underlined. Works in Cyrillic
alphabet should be given in transliterated form and then
translated; works in other non-Roman alphabets should
be given in English only. Translated works should be
given in English first, and, when possible,' followed in
parentheses by the original title; name of translator and
other pertinent data relative to the translation should be
given in parentheses following the citation. Monographs
and articles with no identifiable author or authority
should be inserted in the list by title, using the first
important word of the title to determine alphabetical
position.
When several works by the same author or agency are
listed, the name is not repeated but is replaced by 10
long typewritten dashes in subsequent listings.
C. Tabular specifications
1. Tabulations
Relatively short, simple tabular presentations, generally
with no more than three vertical columns of data and
only a few entries, are treated as tabulations. Tabula-
tions are incorporated in text manuscript without figure
number or title (samples, pages 29-31). They carry
only a minimum of column heads and explanations. In-
stead, the last preceding sentence of text may indicate
the unit of measurement or other essential base data.
Tabulations are typed with an indentation of five spaces,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
double spaced, with no continuous capitalization or
underlining but with leaders to the first data column.
A tabulation should contain no more than 50 characters
and essential spaces per line in order to fit in a single
NIS column.
2. Tables
More complex tabular presentations, generally with at
least four stub entries and three or more vertical columns
of data, are treated as tables. Each table has a descrip-
tive title preceded by a figure number. Tables range
from brief, simple presentations that will occupy only
a small space in a single printed column of the NIS to
complex tables sometimes covering a double-page spread
and extending for many pages. Where there are many
long tables, primarily for reference use, these are gen-
erally grouped at the end of the text under a separate
heading to avoid undue fragmentation of the text.
3. Typing of tables
A copy of each table is provided for each copy of the
manuscript. Tables are prepared on one side of the
page only, with the original on substantial bond paper
unless all copies are made by a duplicating process.
Reproduced copies must be clearly and easily legible
throughout. Tables are typed double spaced, with no
continuous capitals or underlining in the title, stubs, or
column headings. They are typed on 8" x 12Y2" bond
paper whenever practicable, but 8" x 13" paper used in
duplicating processes is also satisfactory. For more ex-
tensive presentations, larger paper may be used, retain-
ing the 121/2" or 13" vertical dimension if possible. Sev-
eral separate pages of the same size may be used to
continue a table. When more than one page is used to
present a table or when there is significant relationship
between columns in separate tables, it is important to
maintain alinement and space relationship of columns on
all typed pages. Continued pages carry at the top the
figure number and a repetition of the essential wording
of the table title, followed by "Continued" in parentheses.
The classification is included on the top and bottom
margins of each page. It is desirable but not mandatory
that each page also carry the NIS number and section
number (samples, pages 32-36).
4. Table titles and figure numbers
Table titles are as brief as possible consistent with
adequate indication of the table content. A date or dates
are not included in the title unless the table content
itself does not provide adequate date information. An
area or political name is incorporated only if the data
presented relate to an area other than that covered by
the section.
5. Table stubs and column headings
Stubs (key or descriptive entries normally to the left of
vertical columns of data) and column headings are care-
fully worded and coordinated. Table entries are in
logical sequence, e.g., in alphabetical or numerical series,
or grouped in appropriate categories. Proper selection
and description of table entries minimizes footnotes and
exceptions which require explanation.
In general, the heading at the top of a column covers
all material presented in the column without insertion
of additional headings farther down the column. The
same applies to side heads and lines of data. Where
intermediate headings seem necessary, the material gen-
erally should be presented as separate tables. However,
related categories of items (such as apply to various
weapons) may be usefully combined in a single table
by making column headings more comprehensive and
using subheadings in columns or indicating a general
change in category. Preliminary consultation with Edi-
torial Division, OBI, on such matters is advisable.
6. Table footnotes and source references
Footnotes to tables are indicated by up to three
asterisks and thereafter by up to three daggers (the
typewriter symbol # is used for a dagger). These
symbols are placed at the left of numerical column data
and at the right of headings, stubs, and mixed or reading
column data. Footnotes are typed double spaced, be-
neath the table, beginning with an indentation of five
spaces from the left margin of the table. The number of
footnotes to tables is minimized by incorporation of the
material into related text when feasible, by careful phras-
ing of stubs and headings, by consolidation in a reduced
number of footnotes, or by consolidation in a single
"NOTE-" carried as a footnote without symbol (sample,
page 35). If a "NoTE-" item is used it precedes the
conventional abbreviation "na" and its explanation, if used
(see conventional entries below), which in turn pre-
cedes any symbol footnotes. An entire table taken ver-
batun from a source (sometimes as the only available
data, and not necessarily fully accepted by the contrib-
utor) is so indicated in related text or by explanation
within the table.
7. Conventional entries
The following conventional entries are used, as appro-
priate, in table columns to avoid blank spaces and un-
necessary repetition or to evaluate data presented.
MEANING
Not pertinent; explained where necessary as
"Not pertinent" in footnote.
na ......... Data not available or inadequate data; lower-
case; explained in footnote as "Data not
available" on at least the first use in any
section.
0 ......... Indicates a zero quantity or reading in columns
of uniform data such as weather statistics;
no footnote used.
none ....... Used instead of 0 when data are not uniform,
e.g., to indicate known lack of production
of a significant commodity; capped if stand-
ing alone in column; no period if in a figure
column; no footnote used.
insig ....... Quantity too insignificant to record; capped if
standing alone in column; no period if in a
figure column; no footnote used.
est ........ Used preceding an estimated item in a column;
lowercase; asterisk and footnote may be pre-
ferred in order to maintain an appreciably
narrower column or because estimated items
can feasibly be covered in other footnotes.
1.6
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
ENTRY MEANING
do. ........ Ditto marks are not used in tables; "do." is used
in both reading and date columns. It is
lowercase except in the first and last columns,
where it is capitalized. Identical entries in
figure columns are repeated. It is likewise
desirable to repeat items containing combina-
tions of letters and figures.
approx ..... Approximate; no period if in a figure column;
no footnote used.
These conventional entries are not uniformly printed
in italic type but follow the type style of the column
in which they appear.
8. Statistical totals
When "na" or "insig" is included with vertical or hori-
zontal data entries for which a total is given that only
moderately exceeds the sum of the specific entries, no
footnote explanation is required. However, when the
total is exactly the sum of the specific figures, it is gen-
erally advisable to precede the total with "approx" or to
indicate in a footnote that "na" or similar items are not
reflected in the total, for example, "Totals are of known
data." (Sample, page 33.) Totals which are not identi-
cal with the sum of specific entries, because of rounding
or differing sources, are indicated by note, e.g., "Figures
may not add to totals because of rounding."
9. Table construction
Optimum clarity and usefulness require the careful
construction of all tables in terms of the nature and
purpose of the material and the characteristics of the
NIS format.
Column headings normally are typed and printed
horizontally. They may be turned vertically when head-
ing narrow columns of data or to facilitate publishing
a table in minimum width. Superior or consolidating
headings are centered over the appropriate individual
column headings.
To avoid repetition of compass directions or units of
measurement after items of latitude, longitude, time, dis-
tance, weight, etc., these units, or abbreviations of them,
are put at the head of the column or centered over ap-
propriate columns. Units common to an entire table
(e.g., thousands of metric tons, or percentage of popu-
lation) are placed in parentheses beneath the table title,
initial cap, and underlined (samples, pages 32 and 35).
It is desirable, so far as practicable, for a series of
tables dealing with common or closely related topics to
be expressed in a uniform order of magnitude of units
of measurements, e.g., all in thousands of tons or hun-
dreds of tons.
Entries in all columns aline horizontally with the top
line of the corresponding stub.
Vertical columns of figures are alined on the decimal
point, and a zero precedes the decimal in numbers of
less than 1. Dissimilar data are centered in the column.
Examples of various figure items are:
1,500.0
4,200
0.15
120-130
24.4
insig
1.94
30 (daily)
16.09
na
Generally it is undesirable to carry a column in which
there are no entries. Use of a column for isolated en-
tries may be avoided by carrying the entries in a "Re-
marks" column or by consolidation in an explanatory
note to the table.
Tables generally are constructed to avoid use of full-
length lines or rules between horizontal entries. Lines
or boxes around column headings are omitted by con-
tributors unless their use follows a well-established
format.
General knowledge of space limitations for one-column
and wider tables is an aid in efficient planning of tabu-
lar presentation. A printed NIS column accommodates
approximately 50 characters and essential spaces. A
two-column page takes approximately 105 characters
and spaces. A two-page spread takes approximately 210
characters and spaces. Two-page spreads tend to pre-
sent page makeup problems in publication, sometimes
necessitating separation of tables from related text.
Tables that are viewed from the side of the page may
be preferable to extended tables on fold-in inserts.
In the construction of tables for normal column or
page-width publication, space must be allowed for the
stubs and for column headings that may be wider than
the figure entries in the columns. When it is apparent
that the overall horizontal width requirement (allowing
for column entries, column headings, stubs, footnote
symbols, and adequate space between columns) will ex-
ceed the approximate number of spaces available, re-
arrangement of the table .should be considered. When
the number of columns exceeds the number of stub
entries, the layout often may be reversed to make a
longer but narrower table. Special problems involving
space limitation in makeup of tables should be referred
to the Publication Division, OBI, before final typing,
D. Graphic specifications
1. General
All graphic materials, such as. photographs, maps,
charts, graphs, and sketches, regardless of size (and also
numbered tables), are designated as figures. Each
graphic item carries a figure number that is the serial
number of that figure in the sequence of all figures within
the section. The originals and copies of all graphic items
should be clearly marked with the NIS Area number,
section number, and figure number, and the original
classification of the individual graphic (which is not
necessarily as high as the classification of the NIS
section),
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
The image size of the NIS printed page is 10" verti-
cally by 7" horizontally. The material is printed in two
35/16" columns spaced 3/8" apart. Column width figures
are 35/16" wide and page width (two-column) figures are
7" wide. The maximum height of such figures, including
space for caption, is 10".
All graphic items larger than page size are treated as
fold-in or fold-down-fold-in inserts. The maximum paper
size for NIS fold-ins is 121/8"V. (vertically) by 393/4"H.
(horizontally). The maximum image size for a fold-in
is 111/8"V. by 371/4"H. which allows a 2" binding edge
on the left and a 1/2" margin on the right. Although
these are the maximum measurements, it is preferable
to allow a 91/4" apron on the left, thus limiting the hori-
zontal image size to 30". The maximum paper size used
for NIS fold-down-fold-in inserts is 231/4"V. x 393/4"H.
The image size for this size paper is 221/4"V. x 30"H.,
which allows a 91/4" apron on the left and a 1/2" margin
on the right:. The vertical paper size for a fold-down
should be no less than 16" to allow enough paper for
a neat fold.
Charts or graphs do not carry titles or caption mate-
rial (as distinct from explanatory legend material) within
the figure image. In a specially constructed chart or
graph, source and date information may be drafted
within the figure. All fold-in maps carry the title,
legend, classification, and other essential information ar-
ranged within the title box or neatline.
Maps and vertical photographs of terrain should prefer-
ably be oriented with north at the top, and north should
be clearly indicated by a north arrow or coordinates, or
by a legend or a caption. Names, symbols, and similar
details of maps are oriented for reading with the normal
north orientation. Annotations on photographs read from
the bottom of the page. In exceptions where figures must
be viewed from the side of the page, details of the figure
and the caption are oriented for reading from the right.
It is frequently desirable that graphic materials such
as maps showing part of a country, port plans, or large-
scale aerial photographs of airfields or industrial installa-
tions be accompanied by simple, small-scale orientation
or location maps.
2. Maps
All fold-in maps have, a neatline and border, a legend
centered under the map title, a scale bar, and the classi-
fication, if any, centered beneath the scale. Text maps
have a neatline and border, or only a neatline, with a
legend and scale bar when required. (Neatlines should
be slightly heavier when used alone.) Titles are not
usually used on text maps, as the caption appears very
close to the figure. Legends clearly define all symbols
not self-explanatory or generally understood from com-
mon usage. A direction indicator, either coordinates or
a north arrow, is included. Maps prepared as a series
(e.g., military geography maps, port plans, and town
plans) have consistent treatment throughout in type
style and size, tonal patterns, and title and legend layout.
Nonvarying (stable) plastic (e.g., dyrite or vinylite)
should be used for the construction of color originals to
facilitate accurate registry in printing.
A standard base map and a page size base map for each
NIS Area are prepared by the Cartography Division,
OBI. Paper copies in color are available from the CIA
Map Library; film positives of the separation plates are
available from the Assistant for Maps, Publication Divi-
sion, OBI.
Contributors are responsible for scribing or drafting
their own overlays, which are keyed to the base plates of
NIS base maps. Where maps do not utilize NIS base
plates, as in port plans and city plans, contributors are
responsible for compiling and constructing their own
maps. Contributors lacking necessary cartographic facil-
ities should consult the Assistant for Maps, Publication
Division, OBI,
Maps such as foreign roadmaps that are to be re-
produced as obtained carry a note specifying that they
are being so reproduced and that names have not been
edited for Board on Geographic Names conformity.
When possible, fold-in maps are printed with a page
size (91/4" horizontal) apron on the left, so that the
entire map can be in view as the text is read. This apron
can be used for printing information additional to that
contained in the legend, as, for example, lists of installa-
tions or regions. Information to be printed on aprons
is submitted on a separate typewritten sheet or sheets
for each map, one copy accompanying each set of maps.
Printed material is not carried on the back of a map.
3. Photographs
a. USE - The effective use of appropriate photo-
graphs enhances an NIS, but each picture should have
definite intelligence value. Text and illustrations should
be developed as an integrated whole, with each supple-
menting the other. Topics such as Coasts and Landing
Beaches may call for extensive use of large photographs,
whereas a topic such as Weather and Climate may benefit
little if any from photographic illustrations.
b. SELECTION - Photographs for use in the NIS
should be as recent as possible and should be capable
of high-quality reproduction. First-class illustrations
cannot be obtained from blurred, scratched, grainy, or
already screened (half-tone) prints. For best results,
photographs submitted should be clear, glossy prints at
least as large as the final reproduction size desired and
preferably from original rather than copy negatives.
While a dull, fuzzy, or poorly aimed photograph may
have research or intelligence value for the analyst, only
rarely can such a photograph qualify for publication.
Photographs considered unsuitable for use in the NIS
normally are deleted during the editorial and graphic
processing of the section.
Recency of dating is essential for photographs in topics
of high currency, and older illustrations should be used
only if the situation is known to be unchanged. For
large natural features, types of vegetation, and similar
topics little affected by cultural change, older illustrations
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
may serve as well as recent views, but each should be
evaluated on its merits.
c. PROCUREMENT - Successful procurement of suit-
able photographic illustrations requires extensive search
carefully directed toward finding coverage closely keyed
to the text of the section. Early attack on the problem
is vital in order to utilize the possibility of sending re-
quests to the field and because of the length of time
needed to obtain multiple prints of good quality even
after a selection has been made. Delaying the search for
photography sometimes forces an author into selection of
pictures on the basis of immediate availability of a suffi-
cient number of prints rather than on the suitability and
quality of the pictures. In no case should "looking for
some illustrations" be delayed until the completion of
the manuscript; pictures selected in this way are seldom
a worthwhile addition to a section.
Particularly in maintenance production, the author
should be able to determine early what is needed for a
given section and start procurement in time to obtain the
best selection from all available sources. Each succes-
sive maintenance offers an opportunity to improve on the
graphics in the section, and for many areas, field collec-
tion initiated well ahead of production deadlines can
provide much better and more recent photographic cov-
erage than can be obtained from local collections.
d. PREPARATION OF PHOTOGRAPHS - Photographs are
submitted to OBI in three complete sets, unless special
arrangements have been made. At least one set should
consist of originals (glossy prints from original negatives
or as near to this quality as possible); the two others can
be copies. Where prints from originals cannot be ob-
tained, three glossy prints from the best available copy
negatives are submitted. A source list is furnished
showing for each photograph the library or collection
from which it was acquired, the negative number, and
the original classification; for photographs reproduced
from publications, the reference is also listed for use if it
becomes necessary to return to the source for satisfactory
reproduction copy.
(1) Captions - All captions are attached so as
to be visible while examining the prints. However, they
are not attached to the faces of the prints, as this often
obscures important foreground detail, and the removal
of a caption so attached may mar the surface of the print.
If foreign annotations are retained on photographs, the
annotations should be translated or explained in the
caption.
(2) Defacement - Photoprints that have been de-
faced by ink smears, or in any other manner, may not
be usable. Notes made on the back of a print or on a
worksheet laid over a print result in ridges or impressions
on the face of the print which may show in the final
reproduction. Blemishes can usually be painted out in
mottled or irregularly patterned areas, but streaks and
spots in a clear sky or other area of even tone may be
almost impossible to eliminate.
(3) Annotations - Annotations made on a print
in either white ink or black ink, although sufficiently
legible on the original print, may prove extremely diffi-
cult to read on the finished product. To eliminate this
problem, annotations should be prepared on an overlay
which is keyed to the photograph, so that the shade of
lettering can be adjusted as necessary.
(4) Margins of prints - White margins approxi-
mately 1 inch wide are needed on all four sides of
photographs to provide space for reproduction specifica-
tions. When the deletion of marginal data permits the
processing of photographs at a lower classification, such
deletion should be accomplished by masking out the re-
strictive data on the negative when the photoprints are
being made (all other data should be retained). If
trimming of photoprints is employed in lieu of negative
masking, one complete set of the trimmed photos is to
be mounted on mounting board so as to restore the
needed margins on all four sides. In trimming, care
should be exercised to retain the marginal data.
(5) North arrow and bar scale - Vertical aerial
photographs carry both a north arrow and a bar scale.
4. Captions
All graphics of page size or smaller are accompanied by
captions (in lowercase and normal word capitalization)
which are carefully worded to be briefly but adequately
descriptive. The first line of the caption carries the
figure number followed by identification of the subject
or a brief descriptive phrase; succeeding lines add ap-
propriate amplification, including, for photographs, the
direction of view and the date, if meaningful (samples,
pages 26 and 27). Initial articles and such expressions as
"view of," "photograph showing," "direction of view un-
known," and "date unknown," should be avoided unless
necessitated by peculiar circumstances. Captions should
supplement, rather than repeat, statements in the text,
and long captions are worthwhile only if they make the il-
lustration more valuable by adding or pointing-up infor-
mation. If an illustration is not of as recent date as
would be desirable, the caption can sometimes be written
to update the information shown.
Illustrations are generally numbered and captioned in-
dividually. In the General Survey, figure numbers pro-
vided by the contributor consist of the section number, a
dash, and the illustration number in numerical series
(Figures 2-1, 2-2, etc.). In supporting sections figures
are numbered in simple numerical series without any
section number (Figures 1, 2, etc.). Appropriate place-
ment of illustrations is indicated by careting in the right-
hand margin immediately following the point of major
reference or, if paragraphs are short, at the paragraph
end (samples, pages 28-30). Layout will be developed
by OBI to place illustrations as close as is feasible to the
preferred positions. Insertion of several illustrations at
one spot is indicated by multiple figure numbers in the
caret. Illustrations to appear at the end of the text are
indicated in a final caret (sample, page 30).
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
If a number of closely related graphics are to be used
in a composite grouping or layout to illustrate a single
theme, they may be given a common number with a
letter designation added for each individual picture. The
section number is included for each figure in the General
Survey (Figures 4-7A, 4-7B, etc.) but not for figures in
supporting sections (Figures 7A, 7B, etc.). The caption
for the layout consists of one general title such as "Hous-
ing in Gujara City," with added subtitles or descriptions
for each individual picture (sample, page 27).
Photographs of special types, for example of key per-
sonnel, need no formal captions if they are to be indented
in blocks of textual description; they are not included in
the Figures list but are enumerated on the caption list.
E. General
1. General Survey specifications
Preparation of text and graphic materials for the
General Survey conforms in general to the procedures
used for other NIS material: The General Survey nor-
mally does not use the metric system for linear measure-
ments; some weapons are customarily described in metric
terms and economic data are expressed in metric units
for most countries.
2. Supplement specifications
Preparation of NIS Supplements (such as SEcrIoN
23S-Supplement on Meteorological Organization and
Facilities) follows the procedures used for other NIS
material. Supplements currently projected are keyed to
specific NIS sections and carry the section number and
the supplement title for identification. Supplements are
not necessarily produced concurrently with sections to
which they relate, but may be on an altogether different
production schedule if in this way. requirements can be
better satisfied.
3. Consolidated units
For some NIS Areas the nature of the topic may war-
rant preparation of consolidated units. In these instances
the basic outline guide is followed, but flexibility is
permitted in presenting topics as subsections or combin-
ing sections or subsections into new topics, as appropri-
ate. Unneeded subsection topics may be omitted. One
Table of Contents and one Comments on Principal
Sources may support the consolidated unit.
4. Classification and control
As submitted by the contributor, all NIS textual mate-
rial is classified independently by section. All pages of
each section uniformly carry the highest classification of
material in the section. NIS material carries at least
a CONFIDENTIAL classification unless otherwise au-
thorized by the NIS Committee. Tables of contents,
caption and other lists, all tables, and all graphics except
fold-in maps and photographs carry the uniform section
classification and are so stamped when submitted. Fold-
in maps and photographs may be of a, lower classification
than the N:IS section of which they are a part and may
he UNCLASSIFIED.
The agency of primary responsibility is required to
insure that classification and control aspects are properly
indicated on submitted material. Comments on Prin-
cipal Sources for all NIS are controlled NO FOREIGN
DISSEM and should be so marked.
For certain NIS Areas specified by the USIB, all NIS
units classified CONFIDENTIAL or higher are controlled
NO FOREIGN DISSEM, regardless of content. In con-
tributions pertaining to these areas the title page is
appropriately stamped, top and bottom. Control re-
quirements are also indicated in the letter of transmittal.
When any NIS section or portion of an NIS section
(other than Comments on Principal Sources) is con-
trolled for reasons other than the required control ap-
plicable to a specific area, the' entire section (but not
necessarily the insert maps and photographs) is con-
trolled, and the same regulations apply. The title page
is appropriately stamped NO FOREIGN DISSEM, at
top and bottom. The nature of and occasion for the
control requirements are indicated in the letter of
transmittal.
Variations of the NO FOREIGN DISSEM control
which may appear on submitted material to meet de-
partmental or other requirements are not used in the
printed NIS.
Classification of any individual NIS is governed by the
intelligence contained therein. General guidance as to
security classification to be accorded conversations, cor-
respondence, and production matters pertaining to as-
pects of the NIS program follows:
ASPECT CLASSIFICATION
a. The words "National Intelligence Survey UNCLASSIFIED
Program" or "NIS Program"
b. NIS Areas or titles of production units UNCLASSIFIED
(sections, subsections, etc.), by name
accompanied by numerical or numeri-
cal and letter designations
c. NIS allocations of responsibility for pro- CONFIDENTIAL
duction and maintenance
d. NIS production schedules ........... CONFIDENTIAL
All published classified NIS sections automatically
carry the Group I exclusion from automatic downgrading
and declassification.
5. Treatment of names
Geographic names used in the NIS are those approved
by the United States Board on Geographic Names
(BGN). Approved names have been compiled in NIS
Gazetteers, which are available for the use of contribu-
tors in the preparation of text and graphic materials.
However, names are constantly changing; new names are
being created and old ones modified, sometimes grad-
ually and sometimes suddenly. Selected new names or
modifications of names listed in a Gazetteer may be
found on the Summary Map and Locator of the most
recent revision of the NIS General Survey on the Area.
Information as to possible obsolescence of a Gazetteer
or availability of supplemental lists or correction sheets
may be obtained from the office of the Chief, Publica-
tion Division, OBI.
20
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
In both text and graphics, preference is given to the
use of conventional names insofar as they are approved
by BGN. In text the approved native name is added
in parentheses the first time the conventional name is
used, and thereafter as desirable for clarity. Whenever
practicable, the native name in parentheses is included
after the conventional name on maps.
BGN-approved native names are used in the absence
of approved conventional names. A translation of the
generic part of a native name (except when the mean-
ing is apparent) is given in parentheses the first time a
generic appears in any segment of the text. As a reader
aid, English generics may be interspersed in the text.
All terms referring to manmade features, such as Small
Boat Harbor, are in English. Military or other regions
arbitrarily designated for convenience in presentation
are in English and are not subject to BGN approval.
Similarly, names of airfields and weather stations which
are well established and appear in widely circulated pub-
lications are not subject to BGN approval.
If places or features having identical names are men-
tioned in an NIS contribution, coordinates for each are
given.
When contributing agencies wish to use geographic
names for which no recent BGN recommendations can
be found, telephone inquiry may be made direct to the
Board on Geographic Names if fewer than 10 names
are involved. Inquiries concerning 10 or more names
should be made in writing and submitted as soon as
a firm list can be prepared in order to allow reasonable
time for response. Separate requests are prepared for
each NIS Area, in the form of the accompanying sample
list, and are forwarded in triplicate to the Publication
Division, OBI, with the desired completion date. Entries
are double spaced with only one column of names per
page, alphabetically arranged; variant spellings and
designations may be indicated in the name column. If
a list includes names obtained from maps or other sources
not generally available, these sources are listed and keyed
to the names. Approximate coordinates are provided in
the second column. The third column is reserved for
BGN recommendations.
(Sample List)
Names in French West Indies
APPROXIMATE RESERVED FOR BGN
COORDINATES RECOMMENDATION
o
'N.
o
'W.
Baie Mahault*: bay .. .
16
17
61
36
Laugmont (Longmont):
town
1.6
01
61
36
Le Palun:. reservoir ...
14
32
60
58
Le Ravonot: stream ..
16
15
61
18
Little Bay: cove ......
15
52
61
35
* British Admiralty chart 885.
6. Technical terminology
When scientific names are appropriately used in the
interest of accuracy they are preceded, if possible, by
a common name or common name generic; e.g., the
colon bacillus (Escherichia coli), malaria mosquitoes
(Anopheles maculipennis, A. hyrcanus). The scientific
names are enclosed in parentheses and in every case
are marked for italics. In a paragraph discussing
malaria mosquitoes, however, italicized scientific names
may be used without a preceding common name or
generic. Scientific family names (names ending in -idae,
as Stomatidae) are capitalized but not italicized.
A foreign term not in common use in the United States
is underlined for italics and is defined or identified the
first time it appears in any section. It is used thereafter
in roman unless the term reappears in another subtopic
considerably separated from the first introduction, in
which case it may be underlined and defined or identi-
fied again.
Special-use terms, such as names of military regions,
are capitalized (e.g., the Kazakh Hill Country, North-
western Hills Region, Northern Deserts, Riyadh Strate-
gic Area) to clearly maintain identity.
Names of newspapers and periodicals used in text in
the NIS are underlined for italics; in tabulations and
tables, however, such names are not italicized.
Foreign organizational titles tend to become a prob-
lem in sections in which many such names are used. If
these names appear only once or are each confined to
a single paragraph or a short unit of the text, little
difficulty is encountered. The names can be given in
English translation, followed immediately in parentheses
by the foreign title italicized, a double dash, and also
within the parentheses the abbreviation by which the
organization is known. This sequence is particularly
helpful if the abbreviation is derived from the English
title, for.example:
Federal Executive Council (Savezno Izvrsno Vece-FEC)
If foreign organizational titles are repeated many
times, particularly if they recur in widely separated parts
of a text, the English translation and the abbreviated
form of the name may need to be repeated as a reader
aid. In NIS units containing a considerable number of
such foreign titles, with or without abbreviated designa-
tions, it may be helpful to compile a list in order to save
frequent repetition in the text. Such a list can appear
as a tabulation or table if it applies to one category of
name within a specific topic, for example a group of po-
litical or of business organizations. A further alterna-
tive is to list the names with their translations and
abbreviated forms in a glossary to be printed ahead of
the first page of text.
In the General Survey, foreign organizational titles
ordinarily are given in the text only in English, with the
appropriate abbreviation in parentheses after the first
appearance. Full titles and abbreviations of foreign or-
ganizational names appear in a glossary, when appropri-
ate. Where a foreign title is the only one that can be
used, as for some foreign airlines, police forces, etc., this
also appears in the text.
In detailed sections, both the foreign and English
forms of foreign organizational titles are normally in-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
eluded with the abbreviation on the first appearance in
the text, provided that in the author's judgment they are
sufficiently different to present a problem of identification.
If foreign names in the detailed sections appear only
once, or are repeated close together, there is no necessity
to repeat them in a glossary. If, however, 10 or 15 or
more foreign organizational titles recur many times at
intervals through the text, a glossary may be prepared.
A glossary usually presents the organizational abbrevia-
tion, foreign title, and English title, but the arrangement
of glossary items depends on the language of the country
and the relations of abbreviations to original or translated
names.
7. Statistical data
Choice of the English or the metric system for use
in the NIS depends in part on how data are stated in
the sources and on customs in the particular field of
knowledge. All contributions clearly indicate what sys-
tem is used, in tables as well as text. Effort should be
made to insure the use of a single system throughout
a section. When different measuring systems unavoid-
ably appear together in text (e.g., miles and kilometers
or statute and nautical miles) they are clearly differen-
tiated. In areas for which source maps or charts are
available in both English and metric measurement sys-
tems, the NIS text normally is expressed in English units
with metric conversion following in parentheses; accom-
panying maps to be reproduced using extensive metric
annotations in their original form carry a conversion
table, Two systems of measurement may be given in
a table or a graphic, if doing so makes the presentation
clearer.
English measurements are used in the General Survey
except for ranges and characteristics of some weapons
and for Economic sections, which customarily employ
the metric system. Unfamiliar terms, both English and
foreign (e.g., quintals and hectares), are defined.
.In the detailed sections, geographic topics are moving
toward greater use of the metric system, especially for
linear distances, elevations, and relative relief. Weather
and Climate, however, consistently adheres to English
measurements in order to maintain comparability in all
areas. Metric weather data are converted to appropriate
English equivalents on the basis of a standard scale.
Transportation topics customarily follow local usage,
using metric in countries on the metric standard and
English measurements for others. Problems of inter-
related measurements allowing small tolerances, as for
clearance of railroad rolling stock through tunnels and
canal boats through locks, make it desirable to adhere
to original measurements to avoid the loss of accuracy
that conversion may introduce.
In detailed economic sections, the metric system is
preferred. International transactions are expressed in
U.S. dollars, but the country's own currency may be used
for internal values. Dollar equivalents will be given,
with the necessary explanatory annotations, where ap-
propriate. In financial data, dated exchange rates are
included.
Dates are expressed in the military system, e.g., 1
January 1.967.
In oceanographic data, use is made of the metric sys-
tem for many topics such as electrical conductivity, water
transparency, depth to sound channels, and sediment
grain size. Equivalents in English units are given where
considered helpful. Custom and original calibration of
measuring equipment appear to be major factors behind
this partial use of the metric system and partial retention
of English measurement.
In any topic, certain long-established measurements
that have become essentially a part of the name of the
item or feature described should be kept in their original
form regardless of the usage in the remainder of the
section, although conversions can be provided in paren-
theses if desirable. A 75-mm gun, a 3" gun, a 4'81/z"
standard-gage railroad, a 24" narrow-gage railroad, a
meter-gage (3'3%") rail line, or a 5' broad-gage line
would be much more difficult to identify if converted out
of their usual form.
Measurements are expressed to a precision appropriate
to the topic. The length of coast of a country, difficult
to measure with any uniform degree of accuracy, may
properly be rounded to the nearest tens or possibly
hundreds of miles; bridge or tunnel clearance, however,
may be a precise measurement given to the nearest
quarter inch (16'61/4"). Populations and land areas that
are estimated or are based on admittedly poor surveys
should reflect their, lack of accuracy in the degree of
rounding. A statement that a population is 6 million or
that a country has an area of 225,000 square miles may
be fully as precise as the data warrant.
Conversions present a special problem, as precise con-
versions from rounded figures give a misleading impres-
sion of accuracy. Elevations of 328 feet, 656 feet, and
984 feet, for example, seem precise unless it is recognized
that they are conversions from 100, 200, and 300 meters,
which may have been rounded figures. Scales of equiva-
lents on map elevation tints or in other presentations of
observed data help the user to get the feel of the data
and to let him know whether the values shown are precise
or rounded. Rounded conversions such as 330, 660, or
990 feet may need to be identified as "about" or "approxi-
mately." Units of measurement are clearly indicated,
e.g., statute miles or nautical miles, short tons or long
tons.
8. Editorial style
Selected matters of style necessary to assure general
uniformity in contributions prepared for the NIS are
covered in these Editorial Instructions. More detailed
considerations of U.S. Government standards of capitali-
zation, spelling, compounding, punctuation, and use of
abbreviations, numerals, tabulations, signs and symbols,
and other specifics are set forth in the United States Gov-
ernment Printing Office Style Manual, the current edi-
tion of which governs. Spellings not listed in the GPO
Style Manual should follow the latest edition of Webster's
New International Dictionary, which is the accepted
authority for Government printing. In general, however,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Webster's New Collegiate Dictionary, which is based on
the New International, is taken as a standard of familiar-
ity of words suitable for use in the NIS. Words used
in the NIS but not included in the New Collegiate should
be explained or defined unless their meaning is clear
from the context.
Development of style for all forms of NIS content is
a continuing and coordinated result of contributor and
OBI processing of the various types of material.
9. Special maintenance
In the revision or updating of NIS units major parts
of which require little or no change, production and
processing time can be conserved by marking up a
printed copy as a basis for all or parts of the new sub-
mission. Retention of printed copy carrying more than a
few changes per paragraph, however, tends to obscure
the meaning and make it difficult for analysts and re-
viewers to verify the correctness and clarity of the
presentation. When changes are too extensive to be
accomplished by ordinary proof-marking technique, the
entire paragraph is retyped and pasted in to replace a
segment of the printed text, or successive paragraphs of
printed and typed material are mounted on a fresh sheet
of paper. The entire special maintenance copy should
read clearly and easily in proper sequence and should
be submitted with the requisite number of clear extra
copies made by a duplicating process.
F. Sample pages
The following pages show typed samples of the Table
of Contents, Figures list, caption list, three text pages,
tabulations, and a variety of tables. In typed copy, the
standard margins of 1Y4" at the top, left, and bottom,
and 1" at the right are maintained to allow sufficient
room for processing notations. Classification, page num-
ber, section release date, NIS number, section number,
and the control, if needed, are typed within the margin
area. This identifying material appears on all pages
up to and including page 1 of the text (samples, pages
24-28), and the classification and page numbers continue
throughout. Use of the section release date, NIS num-
ber, and section number on and after page 2 is desirable
but optional (samples, pages 29-36). Unless otherwise
shown or specified, all typing is in caps and lowercase
rather than in continuous caps. Guidance for individual
types of pages is given at the bottom of several of the
samples. The pertinent Contributor Statement (page
25) is always included with the Figures list and appears
below the last item of the list.
Tabulations are limited to one column width and
should have no more than 50 characters and essential
spaces on the longest line. Tables should be planned
for one-column, two-column, broadside (lengthwise of
the page), or double-page printing, and the limits for
the longest lines, including both characters and essential
spaces, are 50, 105, 150, and 210, respectively. Table
titles should not repeat the name of the NIS Area and
should not include a date unless essential to the use of
the table. Although samples of footnotes are shown be-
neath several of the tables, the use of footnotes should be
held to a minimum. Tables typed lengthwise of the page
need not necessarily be printed broadside but can be
accommodated within the two columns of a normal
printed page provided the total number of characters
and essential spaces of the longest line does not ex-
ceed 105.
Use of a "Remarks" column can sometimes avoid much
needless empty space in a table by consolidation of items
that otherwise would be scattered through several little-
needed columns. A "Remarks" column that contains
only a few items can often be dispensed with by use of
textual qualifications or a footnote to the table.
17-- 23
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE )
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
January 1967 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
Sec 28
Page
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
B. Climatic controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 1
1. General circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2. Air masses and zones of interaction. . . . . . . . . . . 1+
a. Air masses and marine and continental influences . . 5
b. Extratropical cyclones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
c. Tropical cyclones. . . . . . . . .
C. Climatic elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. Winds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
a. Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
b. Upper air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2. Air temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
a. Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
b. Upper air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3. Precipitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
D. Comments on principal sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1. Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2. List of sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Typing of "TABLE OF CONTENTS" heading (all caps)-is on 8th-line from
top of page, giving 14" top margin. Left and bottom margins are
1tright margin 1". Body of page is double spaced.
Runover lines should be avoided, if possible, but if needed are double
spaced and indented two spaces from first word of the heading.
Continuations on additional pages carry heading:
"TABLE OF CON'T'ENTS (Continued) rr
24 Approved For Release 1999fO9i22LumCAA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
OR Kj
 ( SAMPLE )
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
January 1967 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
Sec 39
Fig. 1 Principal waterways (map)
Fig. 2 City Quay, Yashen (photo)
Fig. 3 Growth of GNP (chart)
Fig. 4 Shifts in major import groups, selected years (chart)
Fig. 5 National labor organizations (table)
Fig. 6 Evergreen forest in eastern hills (photo)
Fig. 7 Northern Desert Region (photo)
Fig. 8 Bankton, industrial area, 1956 (photo)
Fig. 9 Bankton, industrial area, 1966 (photo)
Fig. 10 Environs of Bankton (map)
Fig. 11 Manganese ore imports (table)
Fig. 12 Guerrilla activity (map)
Fig. 13 Major language distribution (table)
Fig. 1 Mean sea-level pressure (charts)
Fig. 15 Hypsometry (map) follows
Fig. 16 Vegetation (map)
Fig. 17 Urban areas (map)
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the Central
Intelligence Agency.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Typing of "FIGURES" heading (all caps) is on 8th line from top of
page, giving 1k" top margin. Left and bottom margins are l,-~",
right margin 1". Body of page is double spaced.
Leave six letter spaces between first figure number and title.
Runover lines should be avoided, if possible, but if needed are double
spaced and indented two spaces from first word of figure title.
Continuations on additional pages carry heading:
"FICU1ES (Continued)"
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIAP79~M55A000300050001-2 25
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
January 1967 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
Sec 49
Figure 1. Military geographic regions and terrain
Figure 2. Table
Figure 3. Grazing areas, 1965
Figure 4. Valley of the Mazong, north of Bankton
Figure 5. Surface wind roses, March, April, and May
Figure 6. Projected increase in selected occupational
categories, 1960-75
Figure 7. Spraying of streams by mosquito-control team,
Bankton, August 1966
Figure 8. Local cable distribution cabinet. Cables from these
installations run underground to the subscribers'
premises.
Figure 9. Births, deaths, and marriages per 1,000 population,
Sylvanian Republic and United. States, 1946-65
Figure 10. Population distribution by province, 1 January 1967
Figure 11. Summary map
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Typing of "CAPTION LIST" heading (all caps) is on 8th lane from top of
page, giving 1F" top margin. Left and bottom margins are 14", right
:margin 1". Body of page is triple spaced. Second and succeeding
lines of caption are indented two spaces.
Leave six letter spaces between first figure number and caption.
"Table" and captions that are titles only do not carry periods.
CLASSIFICATION
26 Approved For Release 1999/
21LGLA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE )
Approve P yRF~~,~se 1999/09/21 : CJ - 9 955A000300050001-31IS 20E
Sec 49
CAPTION LIST (Continued)
Figure 12. Metallic mineral deposits, mines, and metallurgical
plants, 1965
Figure 13. Sector 1. Coast of George Bay. Major beach (20) and
minor beaches 9 and 10. Uncontrolled vertical
mosaic. Ricef ields in flat-floored valleys bordered
by steep-sided hills are typical of much of Sector
1. Approximate location 200 00'N., 110050'E.
January 1966.
Figure 14+. Mayfair, eastern section. Buildings in this section
are of more modern design and construction than the
structures within the wall. Street pattern is regular
and avenues radiate from the market square, center of
photograph. View southeast. 1964.
Figure 15. Seanco Dock, Harfort. Grain is being transshipped from
oceangoing vessels to inland waterway barges by
floating pneumatic grain unloaders.
Figure 16. Housing in Gujara City. A. Substandard adobe buildings
in old city. B. Slum area on northern outskirts.
C. Government redevelopment project started in 1966.
CLASSIFICATION
number 27
A,pproveo For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-R '79-01055A000300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE
APPJ-oYvg96~or Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
Sec 98
Inland Waterways
industrial equipment, chemicals, and textiles move over this route.
A. General
Inland water transport is an important factor in the economy of
Southland for both domestic and foreign trade. Inland waterways and
railroads are the long-haul movers, supplemented by highways as the
short-haul carriers. The waterways system is extensive and modern.
13. Principal waterways
1. Grand Canal
a. General--Almost 250 kilometers long, the Grand Canal
(Figure 10) crosses the country from west to east and serves four of
its largest cities. The banks are lined with industrial facilities
(Figure 1), and the bulk of the country's exports of iron and steel,
OceangoinZ vessels of 8,000 d.w.
b. Physical characteristics--Entrance locks eliminate tidal
influence. Current in the canal is negligible.- Controlling depths
During the summer of 1965, the heaviest rains ever experienced
in this area caused heavy flooding; resulting currents locally
stopped all traffic for the latter 2 weeks of August.
are 10 meters to Carva and 5 meters from there to Senko.
Approved For Release 1999M8f2tA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CJJA-"g~7A~R~.055A000300050001 S 20E
January 1967
(Optional) Sec 98
(Optional)
c. Structures--In addition to locks at Narfort, on the bay,
there are three other locking points. All structures are of masonry.
Dimensions (in meters) are as follows:
Lock
Length
Width
Depth
over sill
Narfort Basin . .
130
16
10.0
Narfort east . .
140
18
10.0
Carva west . . .
138
17
10.0
Carva east . . .
100
14
6.0
West Senko . . .
98
12
5.0
Gates are electrically operated. Swing bridges on the canal give
unlimited vertical clearance and horizontal clearance of 24 meters.
d. Ports--Senko, the easternmost port, is second only to
Carva in tonnage handled (Figure 2). Together, they account for 65%
of the export tonnage in iron and steel and other products of heavy
industry. A summary of Senko port facilities is tabulated in Figure 4.
For detailed breakdown see Section 35, Ports and Naval Facilities.
2. Mazong - Lempton Waterway
a. General--Extending southward from Senko on the Grand
Canal, this waterway serves as an important feeder. Its capacity will
be greatly increased when current widening and reconstruction work is
completed about 1968-69.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIARtYPbf055A000300050001-2 29
 ( SAMPLE )
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
January 1967 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
(Optional) Sec 98
(Optional)
b. Physical characteristics--This canal, 187 kilometers
long, consists of three main sections: 1) a 55-kilometer segment on
the Mazong, 2) the Mazong - Sillar land-cut canal 87 kilometers long,
and 3) a 15-kilometer segment on the Sillar (Figures 5 through 8).
There are four waterway junctions along the Mazong - Lempton Waterway:
Kilometer Waterway
point
0.0 . . . . . . . . Grand Canal (Senko)
41.3 ? ? ? ? ? . . . Mazong - Bankton. Canal
55.0 . . . . . . . . Upper Mazong Waterway
142.2 . . . . . . . . Sillar - Topaco Canal
c. Structures--Locks on this canal are of masonry and are
sturdily constructed of local red granite. They have long been known
as the "red gates of Sarboro." Lock clearances are listed in Figure 9.
d. Ports--Lempton, at the junction with the Topaco Canal,
is unique in its single-purpose port facilities (Figure 3). The
provincial report says:
No port in the entire system ships such a large volume of a single
product from such a restricted waterfront. Pneumatic chutes pour
portland cement into waiting barges day and night, 365 days a year,
and this flow has never been interrupted by even the heaviest
storms, snows, or freezes.
30 Approved For Release 1999/G21n DIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE )
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
January 1967 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
(Optional) Sec 29
(optional)
.in 1965 comprised 534,000 men, distributed as follows:
Army. . . . . . . . 330,000
Navy . . . . . . . . 66,000
Air force . . . . . 49,000
Police. . . . . . . 89,000
...Significant aspects of the key strategic urban areas are listed
in the following tabulation:
Name
Geographic coordinates
Population (1965 estimate)
Signif icance
Chephong . . . . . . . Capital and largest city of Nototo Province.
3?19'N., 19?24'E.
403,000
Major industrial, cultural, and commercial
center. Industries include plants producing
cotton fiber, industrial machinery, and
building materials. Hydroelectric plant.
National university and important scientific
institute. Headquarters of air defense of
three northern provinces. Four airfields.
Chuckoto . . . . . . . Capital of Kandalo Province. Developing
3?21'S., 26?O4'E. industrial center. Significant producer of
260,000 textiles, plastics, munitions, and chemicals.
Transportation center and port on Kepala River.
Lulanga. . . . . . . . Extensive bituminous coal mines. Major thermal
6?41'S., 21?16'E. powerplant. Most important industrial,
296,000 transportation, and commercial center south
of Kepala River. Military storage area.
CLASSIFICATION
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RE
P7 *055A000300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
January 1967 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
(optional) Sec 99
(Optional)
TABLES FOR SINGLE-COLUMN REPRODUCTION
Figure 1. Production of selected nonferrous metals
(Thousands of metric tons)
Metal
1961
1962
1963
1961+
1965
Zinc . . . . .
168.6
179
193.2
185.1+
190.6
Aluminum . .
28.7
34.8
35-4
347
37.8
Lead . . . . .
32.3
32.6
33.4
33.0
33.9
Copper . . . .
18.6
19.2
20.3
21.7
*24.6
Cadmium. . . .
None
Insig
E*0.2
0.3
na Data not available.
Estimate based on 11 months.
Estimated by industrial sources.
Figure 2. Indexes of cost of living, money wages and salaries, and
real wages and salaries, as of April 1960-66
Cost of living
Money wage and
salary
Real wage and
salary
1960 . . . . . . .
100.0
100.0
100.0
1961 . . . . . . .
115.2
115.1
99.9
1962 . . . . . . .
136.o
150.9
111.0
1.963.......
193.9
205.7
lo6.1
1961+ . . . . . . .
292.8
274.3
93.7
1.965 . . . . . . .
387.1
422.4
109.1
1.966 . . . . .
476.3
543.0
114.0
Approved For Release I 999/ ' tA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE )
Approved For Relle~7 se 1999/09/21 : c f t pfT9T901P55A000300050001-?CIS 20E
January (optional) Sec 59
(Optional)
Figure 3. Cargo tonnage and movement, 1965
Tonnages moved Ton-
Commodity kilometers
Exported Imported Total
- - - - - Metric tons - - - - -
Agricultural products . 855,437 986,035 1,841,472 97,489,608
Chemicals . . . . . . . 754,442 945,954 1,700,396 86,909,528
Ore . . . . . . . . . . 658,449 1,086,632 1,745,081 74,008,549
Steel products. . . . . 954,078 136,825 1,090,903 49,867,046
Construction material 106,945 68,797 175,742 3,043,767
Other . . . . . . . . . 945,625 160,129 1,105,754 65,653,688
Total. . . . . . . . 4,274,976 3,384,372 7,659,348 376,972,186
Figure 4. Age of inland waterway cargo-barge fleet
Dumb barges Self-propelled barges
Percent Percent
Number Tonnage total Number Tonnage total
tonnage tonnage
Before 1900 . . . . na na na 138 64,068 7
1900 to 1919. . . . 206 204,008 57 749 158,989 18
1920 to 1939. . . . 176 128,087 36 1,476 387,444 43
1940 to 1966. . . 35 24,538 7 934 .289,558 32
Unknown . . . . . . ... ... ... 4 468 Insig
Total* . . . 417 356,633 100 3,301 900,527 100
na Data not available.
Totals are of known data.
CLASSIFICATION
Approved Fir Release 1999/09/21 : CIAO'UP" -6i055A000300050001-2 33
 ( S A M P L E)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
January 1967 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
(Optional) Sec 99
(Optional)
N M
Lf~ cU 01\
N r~
r-1 N
U)
.s~
c)
1
H
M
H
\O
\O
L-
N
O\
\O
*
\O
co
c\j
H
O
-zt-
O\
O
j)
CU
?~I
U
M
L~
\o
L--
{
\D
O\
CV
M
M
r-I
O
-Zt-
M
M
-
O
M
O\
C\
-I
O
O
c0
a)
Lf\
\O
0
Ol
M
H
Ol
L-
H
co
co
O
0
O
O
Cv
L-
a)
O
o
H
H
N
H
H
r-I
t~D
M
O
.--
H
L-
M
CC)
0
\O
r~
Ln
N
M
N
H
o
O
Lf,
CO
M
co
r,
G\
O
O
u-\
N
Ln
cU
M
M
M
O
M
Lf\
O
O\
\o
H
L(1
CV
r4
M
H
CU
CU
O
N
H
cn
O
h.0 _O
r, 0 0 bD
tzp co c -P
co co (1) r-1
-p N - r 0
O Q z~ H
o o o
\O M ..z-
Ll~ L(~ U
Lf\ O u
CD CU
o Cr 0
7 CV \O
M rl M CU
O N 4
O\ Lf\
O O O
c
34 Approved For Release 1999109F14 OIA-RDP79-01055A0,Q0300050001-2
 ( SAMPLE )
Approveda For R-??use 1999/09/21 : C Zggf 77hW 5A000300050001- rIS 20E
(Optional) Sec yy
(Optional)
+)
?ri
Hi
- - - t
o
co
ON
r4
0
0
0
cn
o
C;
Id
C
co
ca
r-I
0
Co
N
0
L
co
O
0
01
O
0
m
a)
C
?rl
c.)
a)
Cl
O
N
\-O
M
C-
C-
H
.
H
0
00
O
01
r~
U\
H
Lf\
H
Lf\
4)
i
bO
C
c
U
0
H
\
N
N
\ID
0
co
1-4
co
L--
0
Lf\
c
N
0
H
.H
Ol
Ol
rl
c
O
H
C
O
O
O
rI
N
N
r-1
N
-ef}
Ca
U)
co o)
M
rl
N
-Zj-
-t
z1'
\O
'O
L-
--N
0
0
CO
rl
rl
N
C-
N \O N c O
O O O H
O1 O
A H
L1 CO CO CC) O OO\\ 0
rl
ao
c
by -N ri) C' -
a) c ~ 0 t~D co c o
~s PCI P-i' Iz 0 - P-1 c2
CLASSIFICATION
Approved Far release 1999/09/21 :CIA-1055A000300050001-2 35
 ( SAMPLE )
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Jana ry 19b7 CLASSIFICATION NIS 20E
(Optional) Sec 3
(Optional)
Banatska Palanka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 51 21 20
Bjelasnica Planina (mts) . . . . . . . . . . . 43 09 18 23
Brijunski Otoci (isis) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 55 13 46
Danube River (strm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 20 29 40
Iron Gate (gorge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 41. 22 31
Ljubljana. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 03 1._4 31
Mali Ba'ki Kanal (cnl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 42 19 19
Sarajevo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 50 18 25
Sava (strm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 50 20 28
Shkoder, Albania . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 05 19 30
Velika Greda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 15 21 02
Velika Morava (strm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 43 21 03
Zidani Most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 06 15 10
Belgrade International . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 49 20 22
Dubrovnik . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. . . . . . . 42 38 18 O9
Mortar Kosor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 19 17 50
Pula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 53 13 52
(The above is a sample only, and the information contained is not
necessarily correct. Any exceptions to the latitude or longitude
shown in the heading of such a list would be individually indicated
by S. or N., or W. or E., on the appropriate line.)
36 Approved For Release 19999O24zICFA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
OUTLINE GUIDES
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
BASIC INTELLIGENCE FACTBOOK
The Basic Intelligence Factbook is an integral part of the NIS Program.
It is a basic reference document which presents selected information for more
than 170 political entities. It is designed to supplement and selectively update
the NIS General Surveys, particularly the Area Brief.
The information appearing in the Basic Intelligence Factbook is organized
by country. Each country statement includes a small orientation map and
separate headings on land, people, government, economy, communications, and
defense forces (for format, see latest published edition of Factbook).
Facts (narrative or statistical) are offered in succinct, telegraphic style and
format. Data are the latest available (current, if possible), dated, and qualified
as to accuracy when appropriate. Quantitative estimates afe generally rounded,
particularly where such estimates are known to be only approximations.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
GENERAL SURVEY
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex and highly developed country or
NIS Area. For smaller or developing nations, however, certain
modifications in balance or coverage may be desirable. The Out-
line Guide should be used flexibly and adapted to assure adequate
treatment of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Area. In
preparation and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial Instructions
should be followed in detail.
Chronology
Section I - Introduction
Section 2 - Geography
Section 3 -Transportation and
Telecommunications
Section 4 - Sociological
Section 5 - Political
Section 6 - Economic
Section 7 - Scientific
Section 8 - Armed Forces
Area Brief
Summary Map
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Chronology
Consists of a list of dates (year and month, with day
given in text of item if particularly important) and events
of major significance in the modern history of the coun-
try; events are described in a minimum of detail, utiliz-
ing present tense. Enough events are included to pro-
vide a background of history against which current de-
velopments and situations can be weighed. Chronology
often includes incidents too recent to be analyzed in
text.
Section 1. Introduction
Briefly summarizes in an opening paragraph the sig-
nificant and relevant factors which establish the im-
portance, influence, and identity of the area. Varying
from area to area, these basic factors may include geo-
graphic location, political developments, economic situa-
tion (including human and natural resources), military
strength or weakness, and domestic and foreign policies
as well as membership in regional alliances and power
blocs.
Factors above are concisely supported in the body
of the section with generalized conclusions drawn from
SECTIONS 2 through 8 of the Survey. Emphasis is pri-
marily on political, economic, military, and cultural fac-
tors. Popular attitudes and relevant history are used to
present a composite picture of national character in its
historical perspective.
A final paragraph sums up the direction in which the
area appears to be headed, including major aims and
problems along with an indication of possible or poten-
tial solutions or outcomes. This paragraph avoids open
speculation but draws on recent National Intelligence
Estimates where they are pertinent.
Section 2. Geography
A. General
Presents the size and population of the NIS Area,
its position in the continent or ocean area in which it
is situated, the strategic importance of its location, and
its geographic relation to important areas or centers
outside the NIS Area. Shape and relation to the United
States are presented if significant.
Gives a well-rounded discussion of significant geo-
graphic characteristics, including physical assets and
shortcomings, as they have affected human use and de-
velopment of the Area. Describes the topography, in-
cluding such elements as surface configuration, drainage,
vegetation, and settlement, and the climate of the Area,
and, if appropriate, shows their relationships to broader
continental patterns. Covers contrasts and extreme con-
ditions as well as the most characteristic conditions in
the country. Provides a basic geographic picture of the
NIS Area that will aid in the understanding of its trans-
portation pattern, its sociological and economic develop-
ment and potential, and geographic aspects of military
strategy and logistics. Numbered side heads introduce
discussions of topography and climate. Textual presen-
tation is supplemented by tables, maps, graphs, and
photographs, as appropriate.
41
Mulftim Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
B. Military geographic regions
Discusses the NIS Area on the basis of military geo-
graphic regions. Briefly describes the physical environ-
ment and settlement pattern in each region. Discusses
for each region the prospects for ground, airborne and
airmobile, and amphibious operations. Also covers those
aspects influencing irregular force operations. The pres-
entation includes a map delimiting the military geo-
graphic regions, normally one or more profiles across
the grain of the terrain, and representative photographs
of terrain, vegetation types, and culture features.
C. Strategic areas
Discusses the strategic centers or areas in the country
in terms of their military, industrial, governmental, com-
mercial, communication, agricultural, or cultural im-
portance. Presents for each strategic area a map de-
limiting the strategic area and locating the important
elements within the area, and a textual statement of
the reasons for the area's importance. Textual discussion
may be supported by tabular presentation.
Presents, usually in tabular form, name, location, and
reasons for importance of other significant areas such as
key agricultural and processing centers, secondary in-
dustrial centers, oilfields, mines, and key transportation
bottlenecks such as mountain passes, junctions, and
water crossings.
D. Internal routes
Presents a brief textual characterization of the routes
that provide the easiest avenues of movement between
the best approaches to the NIS Area and the major
strategic areas within the NIS Area, and between and
within the major strategic areas. The text may be sup-
ported by a tabular presentation for each internal route,
showing specific data such as importance of route, types
of terrain and vegetation along the route, roadway sur-
face types, widths, and conditions, railroads, movement
interruption factors including bottlenecks, and off-road
dispersal and cross-country movement possibilities.
F. Approaches
Briefly describes the country's perimeter, giving break-
down between land boundaries and coast and describ-
ing length and status of each boundary-demarcated,
defined, undefined, in dispute, and whether or not forti-
fied. Gives offshore jurisdiction claimed by the country
or countries comprising the NIS Area. Tabular presenta-
tion may be used.
1. Land
Discusses the terrain and vegetation conditions along
the NIS Area boundary. Presents a brief characteriza-
tion of the routes that provide the best avenues of ap-
proach from adjacent countries to the internal routes or
to major strategic areas adjacent to the boundary of the
NIS Area. Consideration is given not only to transporta-
tion facilities but to conditions for off-road dispersal and
cross-country movement within each approach. The text
may be supported by a tabular presentation of approach
routes in the same general format and treatment as in
the Internal Routes Subsection.
2. Sea
Presents a brief description of the entire coast. Gives
special attention to stretches of coast best suited for
large-scale amphibious operations. Presents in text or
in tabular form the offshore and nearshore hydrographic
conditions, beach characteristics in the landing area, and
exit conditions to internal routes or directly to strategic
areas, for those stretches of coast that have been selected
as General Survey amphibious landing areas.
3. Air
Describes the terrain that would be traversed and the
flying conditions that would be encountered in approach-
ing the country by air. The discussion should be lim-
ited to terrain and flying conditions within 500 nautical
miles of the NIS Area boundaries and can be either as
a single unit or in directional segments. Tabular presen-
tation may be used.
Section 3. Transportation and Telecommunications
A. General
Furnishes an appraisal of the transportation and tele-
communication networks and their adequacy for needs
of the country, capability for military use, geographic
distribution and concentration, ownership and manage-
ment, comparison with those of adjoining countries, and
indication of trends. Compares various modes of trans-
port and evaluates importance of each. Assesses im-
portance of international transportation connections.
B. Railroads
Analyzes rail transport, its significance to the nation,
adequacy to meet normal requirements, and capability
for military use. Includes description of rail pattern,
geographic distribution, areas of concentration, inter-
national connections, and extent of system. Discusses
major carriers, administrative organization, and number
of employees-their level of competence and training,
both theoretical and on-the-job. Discusses in general
42 r.M
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
terms railroad characteristics (using table of selected
rail lines, if desired), facilities and rolling stock, develop-
ment and rehabilitation plans, and construction and
maintenance problems. Includes traffic volume and
principal types of commodities carried. Discusses sys-
tem limitations, traffic interruption factors, operating pro-
cedures, and major operating problems.
C. Highways
Analyzes highway transport, its significance to the
nation, adequacy to meet normal requirements, and
capability for military use. Includes description of high-
way pattern, geographic distribution, areas of concentra-
tion, international connections, and extent of system.
Discusses major commercial carriers, administrative or-
ganization, and number of employees-their level of
competence and training, both theoretical and on-the-
job. Discusses in general terms highway characteristics
(including, as an option, a table of major routes), de-
velopment and rehabilitation plans, and construction and
maintenance equipment problems. Includes traffic vol-
ume, principal types of commodities handled, and vehicle
registration. Discusses system limitation and traffic in-
terruption factors.
D. Inland waterways
Analyzes inland waterway transport, its significance to
the nation, adequacy to meet normal requirements, and
capability for military use. Includes description of in-
land waterway pattern, geographic distribution, areas of
concentration, international connections, and extent of
system. Discusses major carriers and administrative or-
ganization. Discusses (or presents in tabular form)
physical characteristics, facilities and equipment, nav-
igability limitations, availability of ports, maintenance
problems and rehabilitation plans, traffic volume and
principal types of commodities carried, and operating
problems.
E. Pipelines
If applicable, summarizes pipeline system, its signifi-
cance to the nation, and capability for military use.
Describes (or tabulates) location, size, types of products
transported, capacity of system, relationship to adjacent
countries.
F. Ports
Analyzes ports, their significance to the nation, ade-
quacy to meet normal requirements, and capability for
military use. Includes geographic distribution, cate-
gories (principal, secondary, and minor), and general
characteristics of port system. Provides a summary in
tabular form of selected data for each principal and
secondary port.
G. Merchant marine
Analyzes merchant marine and its importance to the
nation. Includes total number, gross and deadweight
tonnages of merchant ships, composition of the fleet by
types, characteristics, ownership, and sources of acquisi-
tion. Discusses percentage of seaborne trade handled by
fleet, type of trade by commodities, nature and scope
of operations including scheduled, tramp, international,
and coastal shipping routes. Evaluates trends in fleet
operations, composition, and potential for meeting spe-
cial needs of commerce, military support, fleet develop-
ment programs, government policies, personnel require-
ments, and training.
H. Civil air
Summarizes civil aviation activities and their signifi-
cance in the national transportation pattern, and pro-
vides statement on adequacy of service and equipment.
Includes brief assessment of major scheduled, non-
scheduled, and charter air carriers; administrative and
operational organization and control; civil aircraft and
personnel inventories; training activities; competence of
employees; maintenance; development programs; and
brief summary of civil aviation relations with foreign
countries.
1. Airfields
States total number of airfields and the number usable.
Of the usable airfields, indicates number of military,
joint military-civil, civil, and private. States total num-
ber of seaplane stations and the number usable. De-
scribes general pattern of distribution. Summarizes the
operational airfields as a system and gives an appraisal
of the system's capabilities and weaknesses. Discusses
generally airfield maintenance practices and the avail-
ability and adequacy of support and service (ancillary)
facilities, including navigation aids. Describes flight in-
formation regions and controlled airways, if pertinent.
Describes construction of new airfields and facilities and
modernization in progress or definitely planned and pro-
gramed. For military airfields, indicates potential for
physical expansion and for supporting sustained opera-
tions. Presents significant airfields in a detailed table.
Refers users to the appropriate volume of Airfields and
Seaplane Stations of the World.
J. Telecommunications
Analyzes the telecommunication system, its general
adequacy and value to the nation. Includes appraisal of
telecommunication patterns; relative importance of each
means of communication; and domestic, international,
and special purpose systems. Describes radio (including
AM, FM, and TV-broadcast), wire, and cable facilities.
Discusses administration and control; number of em-
ployees, their level of competence, and their training,
both theoretical and on-the-job. Describes development
as compared to that of adjoining countries, key centers
and routes, vulnerabilities, and alternative routings.
Discusses construction, maintenance, and operations
problems, including unusual problems due to climate,
terrain, or local conditions. Includes telecom manufac-
turing capability, sources of equipment, and plans for
development.
43
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 4. Sociological
A. General
Briefly characterizes the society, analyzing its distinc-
tive features and indicating major cohesive and divisive
social forces. Describes degree of racial and cultural
homogeneity and assesses resulting social stability or
instability. By way of general background, points out
political, economic, geographic, educational, historical,
and other factors having a direct impact on the char-
acteristics of the society. Identifies trends toward
change in the social structure, with reference to tradi-
tional values and group relationships, and notes factors
that contribute to popular discontent.
B. Population
Covers the size and density of the population, its
composition in terms of ethnic groups, age groups, and
sex, and its growth trends. Definite patterns of settle-
ment (e.g., the proportion of the population located in
the major cities) or migration are noted. Presents total
population (in thousands) classified by 5-year groups
(age 0 through age 80 and over) for males, females, and
total as of last census or official estimate compared with
that of the United States.
Tabulates, for preceding 10 years, births, deaths, and
excess of births over deaths, and provides infant mortality
rates (infant deaths in first year of life per 1,000 live
births) as well as marriage and divorce rates per 1,000
population. Comments on life expectancy and, if per-
tinent data are available, on prospective population
trends. Notes significant governmental policies affecting
population problems, such as promoting emigration or
immigration, offering family allowances, or encouraging
family limitation.
C. Structure and characteristics of the society
Describes social structure in terms of its class, ethnic,
religious, or other base. Discusses characteristics of the
people, covering such fields as general physical descrip-
tion, social groups and units (including the individual),
values, attitudes, customs, and distinctive culture pat-
terns, including national and local languages. (Indi-
cates also the degree to which there is a local knowledge
of English and other widely spoken European lan-
guages, giving approximate percent of population which
speaks English, if feasible.) Where there are clearly
defined social classes, discusses their basis, relative size,
importance, geographic distribution, and the degree of
social mobility. For underdeveloped or primitive areas,
emphasis may be upon tribal identifications, character-
istics, and relationships. In describing countries of lin-
guistic, ethnic, or religious complexity, maps may be used.
Discusses the elements of social status and the effects
of social divisions on national solidarity. Indicates popu-
lar attitudes toward government, political leaders, mi-
nority groups, foreigners, war, and military service.
Describes the outlets, whether peaceful or violent, for
social discontent, and assesses social stability.
D. Manpower and labor
Analyzes labor force (usually defined as those eco-
nomically active, that is, all persons earning wages and
salaries, employers, self-employed, those unemployed
but actively seeking employment, armed forces, and,
in some cases, unpaid family workers and retired-
precise definition will vary from country to, country) in
terms of size and adequacy, composition by age and
sex, role of minority groups, occupational distribution,
percentage of dependency, types and degrees of skills,
wage scales, fringe benefits, typical working conditions,
and extent of employment, unemployment, and under-
employment. Indicates size and source of the labor
reserve (employable, but not now in the labor force)
and proportion of manpower actually serving in the
armed forces. Identifies significant labor problems.
Discusses major labor legislation and extent to which
such legislation is followed or ignored. Describes
standards and practices of employment in terms of
utilization of capabilities, productivity, hiring practices,
and mobility of labor. Notes factors affecting produc-
tivity, such as absenteeism or strikes. Covers type and
nature of both labor and management organizations and
mentions significant organizations. Analyzes labor-man-
agement relations and the role of the government in this
field.
E. Health and sanitation
Briefly surveys health conditions in terms both of in-
habitants and of foreign personnel entering the area.
Where appropriate, summarizes in tabular form signifi-
cant factors adverse to health, such as harmful insects
or other types of animal life or toxic vegetation, with
enough discussion to show relative hazards and inci-
dence. Indicates the principal prevalent diseases as
well as recurrent severe epidemics; includes endemic
animal diseases. Discusses nutrition in terms of dietary
levels and habits, food storage, and inspection of food
and food markets; indicates adequacy and safety of
water supply in relation to health. Describes waste
disposal facilities and practices and resulting public
44
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
health problems. Quality and adequacy of medical
care are indicated along with some mention of pre-
ventive medicine programs, medical organization, ad-
ministration, personnel, and training; the numbers of
doctors and hospital beds per 10,000 population are
given. For certain underdeveloped areas, a table of
hospital and dispensary facilities may be advisable.
Discusses emergency medical services available for dis-
aster relief or civil defense.
F. Public welfare
Evaluates the material welfare of the population, re-
ferring in this context to public health, nutrition, real
wages (in contrast to simple currency conversion), hous-
ing, and clothing-topics which are treated in detail
elsewhere in the section-only very briefly as indicators
of level of living. Describes efforts to mitigate social
problems. Indicates the nature of public welfare pro-
grams (including social security and military civic action
programs, if any), describes their organization and par-
ticipating groups, evaluates their effectiveness, and in-
dicates popular attitudes toward them. Discusses im-
portant social problems, such as types and incidence of
crime, extent of slums, juvenile delinquency, alcoholism,
prostitution, and use of narcotics, indicating extent of
popular support for governmental attempts to deal with
these problems.
G. Religion
Indicates very briefly the role and relative importance
of religious institutions in shaping the life and outlook
of the people. Describes principal religions in terms
of their size, distribution, importance, organization,
activities, and relations with each other and the
government.
H. Education
Discusses the general character of education and its
relative importance in shaping the country's life and
outlook; discusses basic concepts and popular aspira-
tions. Indicates the educational level, literacy rate, and
governmental policies toward education, discusses the
educational system (giving numbers of schools, teachers,
and students), its organization and administration; notes
educational trends and the fields emphasized in second-
ary and advanced curriculums, and analyzes the princi-
pal educational problems. Comments on pertinent non-
curricular student activities, and notes the basic lan-
guages of instruction.
1. Public information
Describes principal media of mass communication of
ideas and information, indicating their general content
and characteristics, their popularity (including circula-
tion and audience size), degree of reliability, and de-
gree of political or governmental control; assesses their
relative influence in molding public opinion. Includes
the press, periodicals, books, libraries, the theater, mo-
tion pictures, radio and TV, and other means of com-
munication (e.g., word-of-mouth) and entertainment.
J. Artistic and cultural expression
Discusses the principal modes of artistic expression,
including popular appreciation and participation, and
their influence on popular attitudes. Identifies domi-
nant trends in artistic, dramatic, literary, philosophical,
or intellectual enterprise, noting "schools of thought."
Indicates prestige of artists and scholars and extent to
which they are subjected to government control. Iden-
tifies nationally and internationally known personalities
in above fields.
Section 5. Political
A. General
Characterizes the type of government and the under-
lying factors influencing the political evolution of the
nation. Summarizes significant factors that affect gov-
ernment strength and stability, indicating their histori-
cal, social, economic, or other origins. Very briefly
describes the administration or regime in power, includ-
ing an assessment of its popular acceptance.
B. Structure and functioning of the government
Describes the central, regional, and local governments
in terms of their functional branches-executive, legis-
lative, and judicial. Indicates the principal provisions
of the constitution and their relation to political prac-
tice, distinguishing between actual and theoretical rela-
tionships and describing the locus of power. When
such elements are particularly significant,, analyzes the
characteristics and performance of the bureaucracy, the
relationship between national and regional government,
the role of quasi-governmental organizations "(particu-
larly in regulating the economy), and special arrange-
ments for' the government of ethnic minorities within
the population or for governing dependent areas. In
relation to the judicial system, explains noteworthy
features of the penal code or judicial procedures.
45
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
C. Political dynamics
Succinctly characterizes the political forces of the
area and notes the significant influences that have shaped
them. Describes and compares the major political
groupings, their organization, leadership, membership,
financing, objectives, and methods. Also mentions their
importance in national life, legal status, major policies
and achievements, relations with party or coalition in
power, and significant historical background. For coun-
tries where national elections are politically significant,
compares party strengths in the last and several pre-
ceding elections in legislative seats won, number of
popular votes, and percentage of total vote, including
a standardized table and, as appropriate, additional
graphic presentations. Identifies major pressure groups
and their objectives, including the extent of their
influence. Summarizes electoral laws and actual elec-
toral practices, and with respect to suffrage, discusses
the groups excluded, percentage of population excluded,
and extent of actual participation. If the country is Com-
munist-controlled, this subsection is devoted to the na-
tional Communist Party (there will be justifiable overlap
with Subsections B and D, but duplication should be
avoided). If the Communist Party operates legally in
a non-Communist country, summarizes its overt electoral
and governmental influence (detailed treatment, how-
ever, is reserved for Subsection F, Subversion).
D. National policies
Summarizes key national policies in the domestic,
foreign, and defense fields and indicates their degree of
effectiveness and popular acceptance. As appropriate,
shows the extent to which domestic or foreign policies
are patterned after or integrated with those of another
government. Treats such factors as border disputes,
measures for exchange of population or expulsion of
ethnic groups, immigration quotas, and efforts to extend
control over foreign areas. Discusses major treaties
and agreements of a strategic nature, and evaluates the
governmental attitude toward foreign investments and
foreign aid. In the treatment of defense policies, ex-
plains the government's position toward disarmament,
civil defense, and civic action (e.g., to combat insur-
gency, to solve community problems, and to develop the
economy), points out differences of view between military
and civilian officials, and gives in general terms the share
of the national budget and proportion of the national
product devoted to defense for current year and as a
trend. Where meaningful, includes a discussion of
domestic or foreign policy on the use or control of 04.
nuclear power.
E. Police and intelligence services
Discusses the police, security, and intelligence serv-
ices, evaluating their effectiveness, security practices,
and relations with other services. Discussion of the
police services includes definition of function, summary
of organization, assessment of public image, and esti-
mate of efficiency and reliability (paramilitary aspects
are left to SECTION 8, Armed Forces). Describes methods,
criminological facilities (such as fingerprinting and finger-
print files ), techniques of riot control, and the use of such
devices as police identity cards, checkpoints, and regis-
tration systems, as appropriate. If the workings of the
penal system have noteworthy features such as use of
forced labor or concentration camps for political prison-
ers, discusses these features. Identifies security censor-
ship agencies.
Discusses intelligence forces, with the aid of charts
as appropriate, including both military and civilian or-
ganizations, explaining their demarcations of responsi-
bility, organization, size, effectiveness, security, and
general areas and types of operation.
F. Subversion
Discusses the country's vulnerability to subversion
and insurgency, listing the social, economic, and political
features which generate popular discontents, identifying
principal subversive organizations, and assessing their
capabilities for action. Where appropriate, examines
the various categories of the population, such as armed
forces, students, ethnic and religious groups, intellec-
tuals, peasants, and industrial workers and evaluates for
each the degree of dissidence or subversive threat.
Lists stabilizing factors and government countersub-
versive programs and activities, such as civic action
programs.
In a non-Communist country, considers the local Com-
munist Party in some detail, providing information as
to name, size and character of membership, techniques
of recruitment, fronts and affiliated organizations, lead-
ership, funds, methods of operation, propaganda, para-
military activities, factionalism, and security practices.
Indicates significant non-Communist subversive or dissi-
dent groups in similar fashion. In Communist coun-
tries, such discussion might be limited to potential for
subversion and description of conditions under which
it would become important.
G. Propaganda
Outlines government propaganda and information
programs in support of foreign and domestic policies,
emphasizing longstanding trends and predominant
themes as well as methods. Identifies specific target
groups of propaganda at home as well as abroad and
analyzes effectiveness. Surveys the principal foreign
propaganda (U.S., Communist, and other) addressed to
the local populace, in terms of media, receptivity, and
effectiveness.
46 ~-.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 6. Economic
A. General
Characterizes the economy, not only in terms of GNP
or GDP, but by an explicit description of how the coun-
try makes its living. Resources as well as key strengths
and deficiencies are pointed up, backed by a strategic
supply table, and their domestic and international sig-
nificance are assessed. The nature of foreign trade is
briefly described. Such aspects as government control,
plans, foreign aid, balance of payments, technology,
skilled manpower, the service industries, and trends are
included only to the extent to which they contribute to
a concise overall analysis of the economy.
B. Sectors of the economy
1. Agriculture, fisheries, and forestry
Appraises the agricultural sector. Includes the gen-
eral effects of climate, terrain, and quality and distribu-
tion of arable land on agriculture, and provides a land
use table. Covers production and yields of principal
food, feed, and industrial crops, livestock numbers and
products, catch and utilization of fish, and forestry re-
sources and production. Commercial processing is dis-
cussed under Subsection B, 4, to which a cross-reference
may be made. Adequacy of diet and self-sufficiency are
indicated. Problems of collectivization, land reform,
size of holdings and tenure, investment, irrigation, pro-
ductivity, and other influencing factors are considered,
as appropriate.
2. Fuels and power
Analyzes the potential and degree of development of
all principal energy sources, including tables on produc-
tion by primary source and consumption by type of
consumer. Petroleum and solid fuels are discussed:
reserves, quality, exploitation, refining and processing,
output (including products), dependence on imports.
Includes electric power production and installed capac-
ity, by type, and a description of the power grid.
Indicates hydropower resources and nature of generat-
ing plant.
3. Metals and minerals
Covers the metals and minerals industries from ores
and concentrates through processing, including nature
and extent of reserves, production, factors affecting ex-
ploitation, world position, evaluation of processing facili-
ties, and international agreements. Use of foreign capi-
tal and government participation in the industries are
discussed, if applicable.
4. Manufacturing and construction
Examines the country's manufacturing: structure, or-
ganization, and growth. Quality of product, depend-
ence on external supply for raw materials, degree of
self-sufficiency, and technology are considered. Process-
ing capabilities are assessed to include capabilities to
meet normal civilian and military requirements and po-
tential increased demand. Generally describes the con-
struction industries from the viewpoint of capabilities.
C. Government finance and economic policy
Briefly describes government economic policy, and
furnishes an appraisal of future growth programs (cover-
ing adequacy and likelihood of finding requisite re-
sources) and government and private investment. The
budget-receipts and expenditures-is broken down by
categories, and the development end of the budget leads
into investment, such tax concessions as have been
granted to further investment, and governmental atti-
tudes toward foreign participation. The tax system is
analyzed generally. Other aspects of government finan-
cial policy and the currency and banking system follow.
Economic institutions, whether government organs or
corporations, and other aspects of the politicolegal sys-
tem as it affects business are included finally.
D. Trade
1. Domestic trade
Briefly describes the structure, channels, and practices
of domestic trade.
2. International economic relations
Covers foreign trade, including international trading
partners and types of goods traded, membership in
international trade organizations, and tariff systems.
Includes details on balance of trade and on foreign aid,
if significant.
47
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 7. Scientific
A. General
Sets forth the salient historical facts (e.g., political,
economic, cultural) that have significantly favored or
hindered scientific advancement. Evaluates the current
scientific capabilities of the country; compares its level
of advancement with the levels attained by similar or
neighboring countries; shows the influence of the gov-
ernment, industry, and educational system on scientific
progress; and indicates significant trends in research.
Discusses generally the international aspects of scien-
tific and technical research including membership in
international organizations, financial support, and co-
operative agreements.
B. Organization, planning, and financing of re-
search
Briefly describes the overall organization, planning,
and financing of research and indicates the level of
control by government, industry, and private organiza-
tions; indicates any trends toward centralized or de-
centralized control by government and states any perti-
nent reasons therefor; and succinctly appraises the
sources and adequacy of financial support to research.
If possible, provides a chart showing the organization
for scientific research.
C. Scientific education, manpower, and facil-
ities
Discusses, in terms of quantity and quality, scientific
manpower and training and briefly appraises major re-
search facilities. Briefly describes any significant meas-
ures being taken to improve and increase the number
of personnel and facilities on major research programs.
Appraises the attitude of the public toward scientific
learning and the status of scientists in the community.
D. Major research fields
Covers the following fields: air, ground, and naval
weapons; biological, chemical, and radiological warfare;
atomic energy; electronics; medical science, including
veterinary medicine; and other sciences (chemistry and
metallurgy; physics and mathematics; computers and
automation; the astrogeophysical sciences, including
astronomy and space sciences, geodesy, geology, hy-
draulic engineering, hydrology, meteorology, oceanogra-
phy, and terrestrial geophysics). For each significant
field in the country being surveyed, evaluates recent
achievements and briefly describes current research
projects.
8. Armed Forces
A. General
Provides a general appraisal of the armed forces,
briefly defining their missions, capabilities, and inherent
strengths and weaknesses. Where appropriate for clarity
or emphasis, compares the armed forces with those of
other countries. Concisely indicates the composition of
the armed forces, including approximate personnel
strength and the number of major ships and aircraft;
mentions significant paramilitary forces. Discusses the
importance of the country and armed forces in inter-
national security organizations (e.g., NATO, CENTO,
Warsaw Pact), their orientation toward the West or the
Communist world, and/or foreign influences that may
be prevalent from historical association or from recent
or current foreign assistance. Briefly assesses strategic
military problems of the nation and the manner in which
they are reflected in defense policy, the organization
and disposition of forces, and military alliances.
Provides, as appropriate, a brief history of the armed
forces with emphasis on the recent past, including such
factors as tradition, foreign control and influence, and
field experience and performance of such recency as to
affect personnel of the present military establishment.
2. Defense organization
Describes the organization of the military establish-
ment above the individual services, including the defense-
related governmental agencies and top policymaking
48
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
elements, in conjunction with an organization chart
showing command, staff, and advisory relationships.
3. Military manpower
Discusses manpower available for service (including
women, when appropriate), and includes a tabulation
showing the total number of males and those physically
fit for military service by 5-year age groups from 15
to 49. Indicates military age, the number reaching
military age annually, and the number inducted or other-
wise entering the service annually.
Appraises the quality of manpower from a military
standpoint, including such factors as physical condition,
education, attitude toward military service, vulnerability
to subversion, discipline, factionalism, general morale,
and loyalty.
Briefly describes the personnel procurement system;
indicates the major source of personnel (conscription or
voluntary enlistment), the proportion of personnel ob-
tained by voluntary enlistment, and terms of service.
Discusses fitness standards and indicates bases for de-
ferment. Briefly evaluates the reserve system as a source
of additional manpower, indicating reserve strength,
effectiveness, and method of recall upon mobilization.
4. Strength trends
Discusses personnel strength trends of the armed
forces and individual services in recent years and pro-
vides a personnel strength table for selected years.
5. Training
Discusses the joint aspects of military training, in-
cluding the functions of high command agencies con-
cerned with direction of training, military schooling
provided for personnel of all services, in-country train-
ing by foreign training missions or attendance at service
schools abroad, and joint exercises involving two or more
services. Training of the individual services is discussed
in the appropriate service subsections.
6. Economic support and military budget
Discusses the ability of the nation's economy to sup-
port the armed forces, the potential for industrial mobili-
zation in time of war, and the extent of dependence
upon foreign countries. Describes the procedure for
preparation and presentation of the military budget and
how funds are allocated to the various services; includes
a table or tabulation showing the total military budget
and individual service budgets for selected years to
indicate trends. The military budget is analyzed in
relation to the national budget in broad, general terms.
Describes nature and extent of military items "hidden"
in other parts of the national budget.
7. Logistics
Discusses the joint aspects of logistics, including the
functions of high command agencies concerned with
direction of logistics or the procurement, storage, alloca-
tion, movement, or issue of common-use or other sup-
plies. The logistics of the individual services are dis-
cussed in the appropriate service subsections.
B. Ground forces (or Army)
Provides a brief appraisal of the army. Indicates the
missions of the army and appraises its capability to
carry them out, citing salient points of strength or weak-
ness in such matters as personnel, organization, training,
and materiel. Discusses service topics not provided for
elsewhere.
1. Organization
Describes the administrative and tactical organization
of the army, including the headquarters staff, major
tactical elements or operational commands, and terri-
torial organization.
2. Strength, composition, and disposition
Discusses the army in terms of personnel strength;
indicates the number and types of combat units, their
equipment, and their general disposition by major areas,
indicating significant concentrations. Refers users to
appropriate Defense Intelligence Agency publications for
current detailed information.
3. Training
Describes and assesses individual, unit, combined,
technical, officer, and reserve training, listing major
schools and training installations with location and type
or level of training provided. Discusses foreign train-
ing assistance, both in-country and in foreign countries,
and participation in training exercises with foreign coun-
terparts. Indicates types of operations receiving em-
phasis in training programs.
4. Logistics
Describes the organization of the army logistic system,
including the locations and functions of the principal
agencies and installations concerned with procurement,
storage, allocation, movement, and issue of materiel, and
the types of maintenance performed at various organi-
zational levels. Includes an appraisal of the logistic
system.
5. Army aviation (if appropriate)
Describes and assesses army aviation from the stand-
point of mission, organization, personnel, and aircraft.
Factors concerning training and logistics particularly
pertinent to army aviation are included in 3 and 4, above.
C. Naval forces (or Navy)
Provides a brief appraisal of the navy. Indicates the
missions of the navy and appraises its capability to carry
them out, citing salient points of strength or weakness
in such matters as personnel, organization, training, ships,
and materiel. May discuss service topics not provided
for elsewhere.
49
min
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
1. Organization
Describes the administrative and tactical organization
of the navy, including the headquarters staff, major
operational commands, naval districts, and the commu-
nications system.
2. Strength, composition, and disposition
Discusses the navy in terms of ship and personnel
strengths, indicating the number of ships by type and
command assignment and the distribution of personnel
afloat and ashore. Indicates general disposition by major
areas and significant concentrations. Refers users to
appropriate Defense Intelligence Agency publications
for current detailed information.
3. Training
Describes and assesses enlisted, officer, technical, ship-
board, fleet and force, and reserve training, listing major
schools and training installations with location and type
or level of training provided. Discusses foreign train-
ing assistance, both in-country and in foreign countries,
and participation in training exercises with foreign coun-
terparts. Indicates types of operations receiving em-
phasis in training programs.
4. Logistics
Describes the organization of the navy logistic system,
including the locations and functions of the principal
agencies and installations concerned with procurement,
storage, allocation, and issue of materiel. Briefly dis-
cusses the policies in effect for the construction of naval
vessels and for their repair and maintenance.
5. Marine corps (if appropriate)
Describes the mission of the marine corps (or naval
infantry) and appraises its capabilities. Describes the
organization of the corps headquarters and staff, includ-
ing the administrative and command relationships to the
navy high command. Indicates personnel strength, num-
ber and type of combat units, and disposition. Train-
ing and logistic matters particularly pertinent to the
marine corps are included in the discussion of these
subjects under 3 and 4, above.
6. Naval air arm (if appropriate)
Describes and assesses naval aviation from the stand-
point of mission, organization, personnel, ships, and air-
craft. Training and logistic matters particularly perti-
nent to naval aviation are included in the discussion of
these subjects under 3 and 4, above.
people, government,
defense forces.
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
D. Air force(s) or, if appropriate, air and air
defense forces
Provides a brief overall appraisal of the air (and air
defense) force(s). Indicates the missions of the air force
and appraises its capability to perform them, citing
salient points of strength or weakness in such matters as
personnel, organization, training, and materiel. Dis-
cusses service topics not provided for elsewhere.
1. Organization
Describes the administrative and tactical organization
of the air force, including the headquarters staff and
major tactical elements or operational commands.
2. Strength, composition, and disposition
Discusses the air force in terms of personnel and air-
craft strength, reflecting aircrew and ground personnel
totals and number and types of aircraft. Indicates the
number and types of combat units and their general
disposition by major areas, including assigned antiaircraft
artillery and surface-to-air missile units, as appropriate.
Refers users to appropriate Defense Intelligence Agency
publications for current detailed information. Refers
users to SECTION 3 for information on airfields.
3. Training
Describes and assesses individual, preflight, flight,
technical, officer, combined, and reserve training, listing
major schools and training installations with location and
type or level of training provided. Indicates types of
operations receiving emphasis in training programs.
4. Logistics
Describes the organization of the air force logistic
system, including the locations and functions of the
principal agencies and installations concerned with the
procurement of aircraft and the procurement, storage,
allocation, movement, and issue of materiel. Discusses
the maintenance system and types of maintenance per-
formed at various organizational levels. Includes an
appraisal of the effectiveness of the logistic system.
E. Paramilitary forces
Identifies the paramilitary forces and indicates their
character and relationship to the regular defense forces.
Briefly discusses the missions and capabilities of the
forces, their command and staff organization, sources and
number of personnel, number and type of operational or
combat units, mobility, training, armament, and logistics.
Area Brief
Presents in tabular form key data concerning the land,
economy, communications, and
50
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Summary Map
The General Survey Summary Map presents a con-
densation of selected intelligence on the NIS Area. It
consists of a fold-in sheet (or sheets) comprising the
following elements:
1. An NIS standard base map carrying a shaded relief
rendition of terrain; important transportation facilities,
including railroads, roads, inland waterways, airfields,
ports, and pipelines; and amphibious landing areas and
populated places.
2. As appropriate, insets showing the following:
a. Population density and major administrative di-
visions.
b. Economic activity.
c. Land utilization or vegetation.
d. Strategic areas, internal routes, and approaches.
e. Location and comparative areas.
3. Apron material which includes a locator that lists
with coordinates all place names used in the text (and
which normally appear on the map) and a listing of se-
lected airfields, with coordinates.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex and highly developed country or
NIS Area. For smaller or developing nations, however, certain
modifications in balance or coverage may be desirable. The Out-
line Guide should be used flexibly and adapted to assure adequate
treatment of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Area. In
preparation and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial Instructions
should be followed in detail.
Section 22 - Coasts and Landing Beaches
Section 23 - Weather and Climate
Section 23S - Supplement on Meteorological
Organization and Facilities
Section 24 - Topography
Section 25 - Urban Areas
53
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 22. Coasts and Landing Beaches
A. General
1. Summary
Describes in general terms the entire coastal area of
study, including relations to major geographic regions
and to adjacent NIS Areas. States length of coast in
statute miles and refers by footnote to use of nautical
and statute miles.* Stresses best stretches of coast from
point of view of amphibious operations; mentions specific
beaches or coastal stretches that offer access to important
routes inland.
Presents generalized statements of sea approaches and
hydrography. Defines anchorage and port categories
pertinent to Area and includes general statement on
occurrence of each category. Gives brief shore and
coastal terrain description including mention of beaches,
also types of shore and terrain that extend into adjoining
NIS Areas. Gives general discussion of transportation
(land, water, and air), stressing principal means of
transportation and definition of categories, e.g., classes of
roads, etc., pertinent to NIS Area, and including poten-
tial helicopter landing areas; also, climatic discussion for
Area, including items pertinent to amphibious operations.
Follows with tabular description of major coastal divi-
sions, as in example below.
2. Maps and charts
Refers to maps, charts, and Sailing Directions used
and discusses any discrepancies involving coastal con-
figuration, coordinates, or distances.
3. Criteria for beach selection
Discusses methods used for selecting beaches and
sources from which selections were made. Defines cate-
gories-major beach, minor beach, landing place.
4. Major beaches
Discusses headings and terms used in tables, and
types of information included therein. Refers to the
beach profile diagram.
a. BEACH NUMBER AND LOCATION - Describes how
numbered in text, on location maps, on photos; how
located; reference to photos; reliability rating.
b. LENGTH AND USABLE LENGTH - Defines usable
and unusable stretches.
c. WIDTHS - Describes low water and high water
beach widths; how measured. Includes reference to the
beach profile diagram.
d. BEACH GRADIENTS - Describes how gradients be-
tween low water and high water lines and in high water
zone are determined; defines gradient terms to supple-
ment the beach profile diagram.
e. APPROACHES - Discusses limits and bottom slopes;
includes reference to the beach profile diagram and
gradient scale.
f. SURF AND TIDAL RANGE - Describes bow surf is
computed; critical heights; sources of surf and tidal data.
g. MATERIAL AND FIRMNESS - Discusses beach traf-
ficability criteria; gives definitions of firm, soft, loose.
h. TERRAIN IMMEDIATELY BEHIND BEACH - Explains
limits (15 to 20 miles inland, or to first major barrier
or significant change in terrain).
Distances are in statute miles unless nautical miles are
specified.
(Example)
FR.URE I. SUMMARY OF COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
(Reference to beach distribution map)
(Geographic title of sector or (Characteristics and dangers
subsector, followed by lun- in offshore and nearshore
iting coordinates in paren- approaches in coastal zone.
theses.) Characteristics and dangers
in offshore and nearshore
approaches to major
beaches; bottom slopes; bot-
tom materials; surf; tides;
anchorages.)
(Number and general dimensions (Characteristics of shore and
of major beaches; gradients; of terrain inland 15-20 miles
material and firmness; general or to first major barrier;
statement for minor beaches and exits and communications
landing places; summary of inland.)
most suitable landing areas.)
(Footnote as follows--)
NODE-Italicized words refer to terms defined in Subsection A, 4.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
i, EXITS AND COMMUNICATIONS INLAND - Indicates
that in addition to routes inland, those parallel to shore
and cross-country movement conditions are described in
the tables.
5. Minor beaches and landing places
Discusses how described in tables and located on maps
and photos.
6. Reliability index for beaches
7. Glossary
Lists common terms relating to terrain features and
hydrography.
B. Coastal oceanography
1. Introduction
Presents summary discussion of bathymetry and bot-
tom sediments, tides and currents, sea and swell, surf,
and marine biology; sea ice where present.
Includes note: Coastal oceanography covers the ma-
rine environment affecting nearshore operations. Broadly
speaking, this is the environment in which oceanographic
conditions are modified by bottom and land configuration
or surface runoff. The oceanography and marine cli-
matology for the open ocean adjacent to this Area are
contained in NIS .
Includes charts of cotidal lines, types of tide, tidal
ranges (including station values), typical tidal curves,
and general surface and subsurface currents.
* From this heading on, outline of SECTION 22 may vary, de-
pending upon whether or not it is necessary to divide the
Area into sectors, subsectors, and/or coastal segments. For
example, if sector breakdown of the Area is unwarranted, it
follows that subsector breakdown would not be used. Con-
sequently, Subsection C would read "Coast," followed by
coastal segment breakdown, if used, "D. Landing beaches,"
and "E. Comments on principal sources."
FIGURE 2. MAJOR BEACHES
(Reference to
BEACH NUMBER AND
LOCATION
(Number, geographic loca-
tion, coordinates, reference
to photos, reliability.)
LENGTH AND USABLE
LENGTH
(Length in statute miles or
yards; shape; termina-
tions; separations; inter-
ruptions; usable length.)
(Widths at L.W. (L. W. to H.W. and (Nearshore bottom slopes in
and H.W. in H.W. zone gradi. terms of steep, mild, etc.;
yards.) ents in terms of offshore and nearshore
steep, mild, etc.) depths and dangers; bot-
tom materials; anchor-
ages; currents.)
(Footnote as follows-)
NOTE-In tables, distances are in statute miles unless nautical miles are specifically indicated by as "14 n. mi." Italicized
words refer to terms defined in Subsection A, 4.
3. Sea and swell, breakers and surf
Includes histograms and/or roses for sea and swell
and table for surf. Includes textual discussion of method
and criteria used in computing surf.
4. Bottom sediments
Includes chart.
5. Marine biology
Descriptions and illustrations of dangerous marine
life such as crocodiles, venomous snakes, and poisonous,
wound-inflicting, or venomous fish; presence or absence
of bioluminescence; presence of algae that can conceal
water hazards or foul screws and rudders of landing
craft. Includes other entanglement hazards such as fish
nets.
C. Sector 1: Point A to Point J*
Coordinates of sector limits
(Reference to beach distribution map and general
small-scale HO charts)
Sectors, not exceeding nine in number and preferably
many fewer, are based on clear geographic divisions or
on major differences in coastal terrain.
56
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Sector description begins without heading and covers
features common to whole sector in brief generalized.
statements. Includes overall description giving location,
coastline length, suitability for amphibious operations,
and reference to best beaches. Succeeding paragraphs
give brief resumes on following topics: shore and coastal
terrain; approaches, offshore and nearshore; anchorages;
number and types of beaches; ports and urban areas;
roads, railroads, inland waterways, and air facilities;
cross-country movement; helicopter landing areas;
weather and climate; subsector breakdown, if used.
1. Subsector 1-A: Point A to Point E
Coordinates of subsector limits
(Reference to location maps and general medium-
scale HO charts)
Subsectors are selected as logical coastal units in
which hydrographic or terrain conditions or both are
sufficiently uniform to permit generalization. Subsector
may consist of a stretch of coast, an island, or a group of
islands.
Subsector general description begins without heading
and includes features common to whole subsector. Gives
location, length, suitability for amphibious operations,
and reference to best beaches. Summarizes approaches,
major anchorages and ports, shore and coastal terrain
(including number and type of beaches), cross-country
movement, urban areas, roads and railroads, inland
waterways, and air facilities,
a. COAST - If warranted, coast is divided into seg-
ments based on terrain or hydrographic differences.
Segments are described in accordance with following
sample headings:
OF COASTAL SUBSECTOR 1-A
location map(s))
SURF AND TIDAL RANGE
Coastal Segment [1], Point A to Point B (140 coastline
miles; Figure number (s) of appropriate location map (s) ;
HO large-scale charts)
General- Ports and urban areas-
Shore and coastal terrain- Routes of communication -
Approaches-( includes sig- Helicopter landing areas-
nificant currents)
Coastal Segment [2], etc.
If subsector is not divided into coastal segments, sub-
sector is described under a. COAST in accordance with
italicized sample headings listed above.
b. LANDING BEACHES - Opening paragraph gives
general overall statement evaluating landing possibilities,
including number and location of beach areas and sig-
nificance of stretch of coast.
Succeeding paragraphs cover in very general terms
topics treated in detail in beach tables, including sum-
mary of significant beaches.
Final paragraphs give generalized summary of minor
beaches and landing places. Tabular descriptions for
major and minor beaches follow at this point, using the
tabular formats set forth in examples (Figures 2 and 3).
If no beaches are identified for the sector or subsector
under discussion, following heading and statement are
included:
"b. LANDING BEACHES - None described."
2. Subsector 1-B, etc.
D. Sector 2
E. Sector 3, etc.
X. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
MATERIAL AND FIRMNESS
BEHIND BEACH
(Seasonal frequencies of surf; av- (Kind of material; firm, soft, (Characteristics to 15 to 20 (Exits cross-country and by
erage maximum tidal ranges.) etc.; significant beach fea- miles inland or to first major prepared coastal routes and
tures; beach use.) barrier; identify cultural fea- routes leading inland; air-
tures immediately behind fields; ports.)
beach.)
(Example)
FIGURE 3. MINOR BEACHES OF COASTAL SUBSECTOR 1-A
(Reference to location map(s))
I
(Number, geographic location, coordinates, (Length; shape and material; width; offshore and nearshore approaches; terrain
reference to photos, reliability.) backing beach; exits.)
(Footnote as follows-)
NOTE-In tables, distances are in statute miles unless nautical miles are specifically indicated by "n.", as "14 n. mi." Italicized
words refer to terms defined in Subsection A, 4.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 2 3. Weather and Climate
Provides a detailed description of the weather and
climate of the NIS Area (or combination of Areas) as
well as an overall explanation of the critical effects of
weather elements on military operations and civilian ac-
tivities. Maps, photos, and other graphic materials, such
as isoline charts, wind roses, and line and bar graphs, are
used for illustration. Subsections A through D may in-
clude brief tabulations, but all climatic data tables are
presented in Subsection E.
SECTION 23, Weather and Climate, is an unclassified
document carrying the restriction FOR OFFICIAL USE
ONLY. For each country or NIS Area there is a SECTION
23S-Supplement on Meteorological Organization and
Facilities, published as a separate self-covered unit carry-
ing the appropriate classification and control.
A. General weather and climate
. Contains a brief discussion of the weather and climate
in their broad aspects, a synopsis of location and to-
pography, and definitions of the seasons to be used in
the section. Subdivision of the NIS Area into suitable
climatic discussion regions is desirable, depending upon
the weather and climate in the particular Area.
B. Climatic controls
Presents the processes and phenomena that control
climatic regimes affecting the NIS Area. Contains illus-
trations of the major semipermanent pressure systems and
general circulation and the principal and secondary tracks
of storms.
1. General circulation and air masses
Discusses the major semipermanent pressure systems
and the resultant mean airflow, including their broad-
scale effect on the climate. Describes briefly the most
important air masses of each season.
2. Migratory pressure systems and fronts
Discusses the seasonal distribution, frequency, inten-
sity, and tracks of migratory pressure systems and the
related fronts. Points out in general terms the effects
on military operations and civilian activities.
3. Other controls
Considers continental, oceanic, latitudinal, and to-
pographic influences, as appropriate.
C. Special phenomena
Discusses the frequency, duration, and severity of spe-
cial phenomena that significantly affect military opera-
tions and civilian activities, particularly those phenomena
considered hazardous. Describes and/or illustrates
graphically such phenomena as hurricanes, typhoons,
tornadoes, floods, duststorms, droughts, thunderstorms,
turbulence, and aircraft icing. Does not include de-
tailed descriptions of associated weather elements such
as rain, clouds, and visibility; these elements are discussed
in Subsection D.
D. Weather elements and climatic conditions
Provides detailed areal, seasonal, and diurnal analyses
of the distribution and variation of weather elements and
climatic conditions (other than those discussed in Sub-
sections B and C). Includes, if appropriate, discussions
of surface and upper-air temperatures, first and last days
of frost, icing conditions, precipitation of all types, snow
cover and snow depth, relative humidity, surface and
upper-air winds, wind chill and comfort index factors,
clouds and ceilings, visibility and obstructions to vision,
stability, thunderstorms, and turbulence. Gives special
attention to elements and conditions of particular sig-
nificance in the NIS Area.
Points out the critical effects of specific weather ele-
ments and combinations of elements on military opera-
tions and civilian activities. Considers military and
civilian factors such as parachute, aircraft, and coastal
marine operations; radiological, chemical, and biological
warfare; and mobility, clothing, construction, storage, and
broad-scale effects on agriculture.
E. Climatic data tables
Contains selected tables of average and extreme cli-
matic data significant to various types of military opera-
tions and civilian activities in the NIS Area. Wherever
possible, tables are comprehensive enough to allow de-
tailed examination of the climate of specific locations
within the Area.
F. Bibliography
Provides a list and general description of the principal
unclassified source material.
58
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 25. Urban Areas
This section provides a digest of information on the
physical aspects of the urban areas in the NIS Area
supplemented by a generalized statement of their geo-
graphic, political, economic, and military importance.
Makes comparison with the cities and towns in a geo-
graphic area of the United States or with those of coun-
tries in the same geographic, political, or economic group,
if appropriate. Presents data for the NIS Area as a
whole, except when such treatment might be misleading
for an included subarea. When the area under con-
sideration comprises two or more countries or is divided
into distinctive geographic, political, or economic sub-
areas, the data may be presented by appropriate subarea.
Tables, maps, and photographs are used to support and
supplement descriptive text. Each key strategic urban
area is illustrated by a town plan emphasizing those
natural and manmade features of the urban area and its
environs that are of primary military significance.
A. General
Summarizes the significant features affecting urban
areas collectively, including a brief generalized treatment
of the major functions (industrial, agricultural, mining,
etc.).
1. Urbanization
a. PATTERN - Gives ratio of urban population to
total population; distribution of urban areas; effects of
ethnic and religious groupings, where pertinent.
b. FACTORS AFFECTING URBANIZATION, AND TRENDS -
Considers these factors with respect to economic develop-
ment (agricultural, industrial, exploitation of natural
resources). Generalized statements with regard to
population trends are coordinated with the contributor
for SECTION 41, Population.
2. Main characteristics of urban areas
Discusses typical militarily significant characteristics
of cities and towns by area or subareas, covering:
a. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS - Gives significant
characteristics of town construction as influenced by
tradition, terrain, climate, etc.; of materials used and their
availability; of capacity to resist shock, inundation, con-
flagration, etc.
b. EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS - Presents gener-
alized statements on principal types of intertown com-
munications (rail, road, waterway, and air); their ade-
quacy and effect on the cities and towns of an area.
C. UTILITIES, SERVICES, AND FACILITIES - Evaluates
the cities and towns of an area collectively with respect
to the extent of development generally (including lack,
prevalence, and adequacy) of those elements of urban
economy commonly classified as utilities, services, or
facilities-water supply, sewerage, sanitation (including
public health conditions), hospitals, electric power, gas,
transit, telecommunications, storage, etc.
d. PLANNING Considers programs for reconstruc-
tion in devastated or blighted areas; future planning and
expansion programs.
B. Principal urban areas
Principal urban areas include key strategic urban areas
and other selected urban areas (never more than 100)
chosen for consideration because of their size and their
military, political, and economic importance. These two
categories of urban areas are discussed in separate sub-
sections as indicated below. (DIA submits lists of key
strategic urban areas and other selected urban areas
through the Military Geography Coordinator to the NIS
Committee for transmission to USIB agencies for con-
currence and/or comment. In the event of nonconcur-
rence (s) or comment, Military Geography Coordinator
arranges a conference of USIB agencies concerned to re-
solve differences and to obtain a generally acceptable
selection.)
1. Key strategic urban areas
Key strategic urban areas are those considered to
be of primary military, political, or economic significance.
The subsection begins with an introductory statement
giving the number of key strategic urban areas and an
indication of their significance generally-the reasons
for their selection. Each, town is then treated in a
separate subtopic, the subtopics being in alphabetical
order by town name. The following indicates the topical
scope and preferred order of discussion. The presenta-
tion may be telegraphic in style, and the degree of detail
is kept consistent with the overall purpose of the NIS.
Urban area A
Name (BGN-approved conventional, or native form if
no conventional), alternate (native or variant form if
conventional is used above), country (if more than one
country is covered in the section), geographic coordi-
nates, population followed by date in parentheses, and
figure number (s) of town plan (s) in parentheses.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
(1) Significance - Gives brief statements out-
lining significance, taking into account such aspects as
location, growth trends, and political, military, economic,
and cultural functions.
(2) Physical characteristics - Presents general-
ized statements on topography of site and environs, cli--
mate, size and shape of built-up area, extent and nature
of functional areas (commercial, residential, govern-
mental, industrial, etc.), building density and structural
type, street pattern and widths, through routes, and by-
passes.
(3) External communications - Considers ade-
quacy (with respect to needs of the town), and general
character of rail, road, water, and air connections with
domestic and foreign points.
(4) Utilities, services, and facilities - Considers
adequacy, in terms of quality and quantity, of water
supply, sewerage, health and sanitation facilities (includ-
ing hospitals), electric power, gas supply, transit service,
telecommunications, storage, and protective services.
Expands briefly on any exceptionally good or poor aspect.
(5) Industry - Gives brief description of each
industry (as opposed to industrial installation) having
considerable national or international significance.
(6) Military installations - Gives identity and
nature of military installations in and near the town, with
special note of military hospitals. Total military billets.
(7) Other significant installations - Presents
identity and nature of nonmilitary installations having
national, international, or considerable local or regional
importance, including individual industrial plants, sci-
entific, cultural, religious, and academic institutions, and
the like.
Urban area B
Urban area C, etc.
2. Other selected urban areas
Presents information on other selected urban areas in
tabular form. The text provides an introduction giving
the number and general importance of these areas. In
the tabular presentation, towns are grouped by sub-
areas, if this is desirable. Appropriate column headings
are used for the following information:
Name-conventional and alternate, as in Subsection B, I.
Geographic coordinates.
Population.
Importance--dominant functions or characteristics on which
selection is based.
Remarks-brief statement amplifying or explaining specific
entry in Importance column.
C. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex and highly developed country or
NIS Area. For smaller or developing nations, however, certain
modifications in balance or coverage may be desirable. The Out-
line Guide should be used flexibly and adapted to assure adequate
treatment of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Area. In
preparation and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial Instructions
should be followed in detail.
Section 31 - Railroads
Section 32 - Highways
Section 33 - Inland Waterways
Section 35 - Ports and Naval Facilities
Section 36 - Merchant Marine
Section 37 -Civil Air
Section 38 - Telecommunications
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 31. Railroads
A. General
Summarizes rail transportation in the country, includ-
ing relationship to other transportation, salient char-
acteristics, physical environmental factors, significant his-
torial developments, economic and logistic significance,
projected development plans, and control, ownership,
and personnel.
B. Characteristics of the network
1. General
Discusses such basic factors as total route mileage by
trackage, gage, and electrification; pattern and geographi-
cal distribution of the rail lines; connections and inter-
change with adjacent countries, including any special re-
quirements for interchange of equipment; and general
status and condition of the railroad.
2. Way and structures .
Discusses fixed facilities and structures, including gen-
eral conditions affecting the right of way as reflected in
grades and curves; and general standards for rail, ties,
and ballast, and resultant axleload limitations. Gives
characteristics and statistics on ferries, bridges, tunnels,
and similar structures; structural clearance, loading, and
equipment diagrams with supporting discussion of stand-
ards and practices; characteristics of signal and communi-
cation equipment; and general features of yards, with
detailed data (including diagrams) on the major yards.
3. Fuel, electric power, and water
Provides a general survey of fuel and electric power,
including characteristics and availability; and water
supply, including treatment required.
4. Construction and maintenance
Discusses construction and maintenance policy, prob-
lems, and procedures, including standards, and avail-
ability and quality of materials, equipment, and labor.
C. Operations
1. Operating factors
Discusses routine operating regulations and practices,
including train control; gives significant operating sta-
tistics, with evaluative comment; and describes significant
or unusual operating problems and practices, particularly
those representing traffic interruption factors.
2. Traffic
Discusses traffic and its trends, including relative im-
portance of freight and passenger traffic; principal com-
modities carried; and significant regional characteristics.
Gives traffic statistics for representative years on such
factors as tons, ton-miles, passengers carried, passenger-
miles, and other applicable indicators of traffic volume.
3. Financial data
Discusses the financial position of the railroad, and
gives significant statistics on income, expense, operating
ratio, etc.
D. Equipment
1. General
Discusses quantitatively and qualitatively the adequacy
of existing equipment, domestic and foreign sources of
equipment, and shops and repair facilities.
2. Motive power
Describes predominant types (including characteristics
and inventory of selected locomotives), general condi-
tion, and source of supply.
3. Rolling stock
a. FREIGHT EQUIPMENT - Describes predominant
types (with characteristics and an inventory of selected
types), general condition, and source of supply.
b. PASSENGER EQUIPMENT - Discusses inventory,
general condition, and source of supply.
C. WORK EQUIPMENT - Provides a tabulation show-
ing total number by type.
E. Selected rail lines
Analyses the selected lines of major importance for
both economic and logistics purposes and summarizes (in
tabular form) the characteristics of each selected line in
terms of the following: terminals, mileage, gage, axle-
load limits, maximum grades, minimum radii of curves,
maximum distances between passing sidings, and mini-
mum length of passing sidings.
F. Tabular and graphic data
This subsection provides information in tabular and
graphic form in the general order of reference in the text.
G. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
65
mwwww~ Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 32. Highways
A. General
Analyses the highway system and highway transport,
and discusses total highway mileage, importance and
position in the national economy, adequacy to meet
normal economic requirements, and ability of the net-
work to support military operations. Compares high-
way transport with other modes of transportation. De-
scribes distribution and pattern of the network, inter-
national highway connections, general condition of the
highways including percent unsurfaced, and roadway and
bridge conditions. Makes general statement on efforts
being made to improve and develop roads. Compares
highway density and vehicle ratio with that of neighbor-
ing countries.
B. Highway network
1. Roadway, structures, ferries, and fords
Discusses total highway mileage by surface type and
road classification; general roadway characteristics as to
surface widths, shoulder types and widths, base types
and thicknesses; alinement data; and local route num-
bering and marking system, including sign standards.
Describes bridges, indicating prevalent types, lengths,
clearances, and capacities. Gives types and capacities
of ferries and lengths of crossings, and ford characteris-
tics. Describes tunnels, giving data on construction
types, lengths, and clearances.
2. Construction and maintenance
Discusses construction and maintenance policy and
the agency responsible for upkeep of the highways; the
organization, procedures, and performance of work
crews; roadway and bridge design and specification
standards; special problems arising from character of
terrain, and weather and climate; and availability of
materials, equipment, and labor.
3. Development program
Discusses new construction and improvement under-
way or planned, and gives financial aspects including
local and foreign sources of funds.
C. Highway transport operations
1. Highway authorities and government regulations
Names the government agencies that control and direct
highway transport companies and activities and discusses
prevailing regulations.
2. Common carriers
Gives data on bus and truck firms including total num-
ber of firms, routes covered, total tonnage and number
of passengers carried annually, and total ton-miles and
passenger-miles accomplished annually.
3. Traffic flow
Discusses the volume of motor vehicle traffic including
a description of traffic patterns; if appropriate, includes a
traffic flow chart. Discusses principal commodities
hauled by truck.
4. Traffic interruption factors
Describes the critical points or features of the highway
system, with emphasis on existing or potential factors
which might adversely affect traffic. Indicates physical
bottlenecks-natural and man-made factors that affect
traffic flow, both permanent and seasonal. Discusses
weather and climate factors deterring traffic.
5. Repair and fueling facilities
Discusses adequacy and type of repair shops and fuel-
ing stations, competence of mechanics, types and sources
of fuel.
D. Vehicles and equipment
1. General
Makes an overall quantitative and qualitative survey
of vehicles and equipment including sources (domestic,
foreign), amount of imports, main types, kinds of motive
power, capacities, and the general condition and age of
vehicles.
2. Motor vehicles
Gives the total number of registrations including a
breakdown by vehicle types.
3. Construction and maintenance equipment
Gives an inventory of available construction and main-
tenance equipment including that owned by government
agencies and that of the private construction companies.
Discusses general condition and age of equipment, and
domestic availability or dependence on imports as a
source of supply.
4. Other
Describes and tabulates total number of animal-drawn
carts and any unique or special conveyances (pedicabs,
rickshaws, etc.) used in transport. Discusses number
and use of draft animals.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
E. Selected highways and principal routes
Introduces the Selected Highway system, explains the
basis for selection, and gives reference to the Selected
Highway map. Describes the principal highway routes
as to total number, total mileage, importance, and sig-
nificance and character of areas served. Indicates in
tabular form the Selected Highways comprising each
Principal Route. For each route gives the following:
origin and destination points, length, significant environ-
mental features-including terrain and climatic con-
siderations, general description of surface type, total
number of Selected Bridges with range in length, and
bottlenecks.
F. Highway technical data
Explains the special highway numbering system used
in SECTION 32, and the tabular and other presentations
of detailed highway data; includes a reference to the
indigenous map used in the section.
G. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 33. Inland Waterways
A. General
Discusses the inland waterway transportation in the
country, including relationship to other transportation,
salient characteristics, environmental and economic fac-
tors, and logistic significance.
B. Waterway network
1. General
Discusses such basic system-wide features as areal
distribution and extent of navigability, international con-
nections, topographical and climatic factors that in-
fluence waterway development and use, and general
status and condition of the system, including projected
development policies.
2. Waterway facilities
Gives characteristics of fixed facilities (locks, dams,
overpasses, navigational aids) with summarizing statistics
and standards, inland waterway port facilities with sum-
marizing statistics on cargo and craft handled by type
(with appropriate reference to SECTION 35), and fa-
cilities for building and repairing inland waterway craft,
with summarizing statistics on types and sizes of craft
handled.
3. Traffic interruption factors
Discusses existing or potential critical points or features
of the waterway system which might adversely affect
navigation.
4. Construction and maintenance
Discusses construction and maintenance policies, prob-
lems, and procedures, including standards, trends, or-
ganization, and official attitudes.
C. Control and organization
Gives policies, responsibilities, and procedures for con-
trol and operation of the waterway system, including
government and private organizations and regulations.
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
Describes significant or unusual operating problems
and practices, including methods of towing, day or night
use, and other operational factors.
2. Traffic
Summarizes traffic patterns and trends and includes
statistics on passengers carried and cargoes transported,
by commodities.
E. Equipment
1. Craft
Presents a general survey of characteristics, condition,
and adequacy of the inland waterway fleet including
summarizing statistics on number and aggregate tonnages
by types, sizes, capacities, methods of propulsion, and
fuel used.
2. Special equipment
Presents a general survey of characteristics of spe-
cialized floating equipment (such as dredges, derrick
boats, icebreakers) used for construction and mainte-
nance of the inland waterways.
F. Principal waterways
Appraises each selected principal route in terms of:
significance; navigable lengths; navigability by size and
type of craft; physical characteristics affecting navigabil-
ity (controlling channel widths, safe drafts, currents) ;
clearances at restricting sections or structures; seasonal
factors (floods, droughts, freezing, etc.) ; structures
(locks, dams, safety gates, aqueducts, overpasses) ; ferry
crossings; and ports and landings.
G. Tabular data
This subsection provides information in tabular form
in the general order of reference in the text.
H. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
67
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 35. Ports and Naval Facilities
A. Ports
Gives a comprehensive evaluative discussion of the
port system covering: geography of area as it relates to
the establishment of ports; brief history of growth and
development of port system; areal distribution and
grouping of ports as determined by geographic, historic,
economic, and strategic factors; governmental control and
administration, where applicable; and categories of ports
and brief summary of criteria used in classifying. Also,
gives a brief description of each principal and secondary
port, including relative location, importance, principal
characteristics (in cargo ports gives more important com-
modities handled and total amount of cargo handled in
recent representative year), and any other significant
feature of the port not part of the table of principal and
secondary ports. Provides a brief summary statement
regarding capability to repair ships. Lists ports (with
coordinates) by principal, secondary, and minor cate-
gories, arranged alphabetically within each category.
B. Naval, facilities
Gives a summary evaluation of naval activities in mari-
time ports covering: number and distribution of ac-
tivities, adequacy to support fleet units, and categories of
activities and basis for classifying. Lists naval activities
(with coordinates) by categories, arranged alphabetically
within each category.
C. Tabular data
Provides table of principal and secondary ports with
data on:
Harbor--Type; fairway limitations in terms of controlling
(or critical) dimensions; largest vessel that can be accom-
modated in port (both general and tanker); type of tide,
list of tidal rises, and any other changes in water level;
planes of reference for depths and reliability of depth data;
any condition, such as ice, weather, sea and swell, that ad-
versely affects operation of the port.
Berths-List of all standard berths provided by port,
grouped by the categories anchorage, fixed mooring, free-
swinging mooring, and alongside (includes parenthetical
statement giving total linear feet of principal wharfage).
Mechanical handling facilities and harbor craft-Number
of shore cranes, broken down into wharf and miscellaneous
categories and with range of capacities; number of floating
cranes with range of capacities; list of all special handling
equipment and mechanized stevedore gear with handling
rates and capabilities as appropriate; list of all harbor craft
such as tugs, lighters, watering boats, bunkering barges,
dredges, ferries, and icebreakers, indicating capabilities and
capacities as appropriate.
Storage and supplies-Total general cargo storage capability
stated in terms of transit shed, warehouse, and refrigerated
storage and open stacking space; storage capacity for bulk
commodities in units of capacity appropriate to the com-
modity, POL being broken down by product. Statement on
availability of POL bunkers including types of fuel, methods
of supply, range of rates, and stocks maintained; statement
on availability of fresh water, indicating methods of supply,
range of rates, and suitability for drinking and boiler feed.
Clearance-Rail, road, inland waterway, and pipeline.
Number and gage of rail lines; number, surfaces, and widths
of main highways; controlling dimensions and distance to
terminus or connecting point of inland waterways; and size,
product, rate, and terminus of clearing pipelines.
Estimated military port capacity-Capacity in long tons
of general cargo unloaded per day and brief explanation of
how determined.
Shipyards-Number of yards in each category and names
of more important; principal activities, any significant spe-
cialty, and general repair capability of port; numbers of
various types of drydocking facilities and capacities of the
more important.
Naval activity-Type of naval activity, if any.
Footnotes-Explanation of all tabular entries that are not
self-explanatory.
Provides tabular data for minor ports similar in char-
acter but less extensive in scope and detail than table of
principal and secondary ports and covers such topics as
harbor, anchorage, wharves, mechanical handling fa-
cilities, harbor craft, storage facilities, supplies available
to ships, clearance, ship-repair capability, and principal
activities of port.
Provides table of naval facilities, if applicable, with
data on:
Type of activity-Naval base, naval ammunition depot,
naval shipyard, naval gun factory, naval torpedo station, naval
mine depot, naval fuel annex, naval training center.
Function-Primary and any secondary function of activity.
Facilities-Facilities comprising activity such as berthing,
shipyard, ordnance, storage, communications, training, medi-
cal, etc.
Footnotes-Explanation of all tabular entries that are not
self-explanatory.
D. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
r
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 36. Merchant Marine
A. General
Summarizes significant merchant marine elements, in-
cluding typically: size and general composition of the
fleet, nature of ownership, general government policy and
administration, place in nation's economy, nature and
scope of operations, and military support capability.
B. Organization
1. Ownership
States whether government or private; if private, in-
cludes character and extent of beneficial ownership.
Discusses foreign interests. Includes list of beneficial
owners; agents or managers; and ships owned, by type,
g.r.t., d.w.t.
2. National policy
Briefly discusses basic maritime laws, regulations, de-
crees; nature of any subsidies; measures of discrimina-
tion or preferential treatment; and international conven-
tions, trade, and maritime agreements affecting the
breakers, etc.). Provides graphic presentation (bar
graph) if practicable. Gives textual analysis when fur-
ther clarification may be needed.
2. Military support capability
3. Secondary fleets
Discusses merchant vessels under 1,000 g.r.t. and size
and nature of fishing fleet.
D. Merchant fleet development
1. Domestic construction and repair capability
Discusses overall capability and degree exploited for
domestic fleet, past and present.
2. Acquisitions and disposals
Discusses patterns.
3. Subsidies
Indicates extent and kind of construction subsidies and
other government aid affecting fleet development.
merchant marine.
E.
Shipping routes
3. Administration
Indicates structure and functions.
F.
Operations and traffic
1. Nature, scope, and trends
4. Personnel and training
Discusses composition of personnel, availability, and
connection with naval force; unions and other organiza-
tions; and wages, other benefits, and working conditions.
Discusses and evaluates effectiveness of training, recruit-
ment, schools, and courses.
C. Composition
1. General
Discusses size and world rank (by number of ships,
by d.w.t.) of fleet. Provides a summary of ship charac-
teristics by types, by age, and by tonnage. Discusses
speed by ship types, general characteristics of fuel and
propulsion, and special equipment (heavy lift, long
hatch, degaussing or other defensive or potentially
offensive equipment, containerized, gas carriers, ice-
2. Commodity trade and passenger traffic
3. Efficiency of operations
Discusses performance, including extent and kind of
operational subsidies and their effect on operations.
4. Chartering
Describes nature, scope, and trends of chartering for-
eign flag vessels and chartering nation's own vessels to
foreign shippers.
G. Tabular data
This subsection provides information in tabular form
in the general order of reference in the text.
H. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
69
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 37. Civil Air
A. General
Summarizes salient characteristics of civil aviation and
includes an assessment of the scope and adequacy of the
air transportation system, names of principal air carriers,
and factors affecting the development and growth of the
system, such as geography and adequacy of other trans-
portation media. Gives the total number of civil air-
craft and the number of major transport aircraft; the
total number of skilled aviation personnel other than
pilots and the number of civil pilots; the scope of other
civil flying activities (nonscheduled transport, airwork,
sports and private flying, and training) ; and the total
number of airfields available for civil aviation. Com-
ments on the existence of formal mobilization plans and
the ready availability of civil aviation organizations, air-
craft, personnel, and facilities for support or augmenta-
tion of the military forces. Names the governmental
agency controlling and administering civil aviation and
discusses the broad, general national aviation policies.
Comments on current trends such as expansion programs,
reequipment and development programs, and proposed
changes in subsidy and organization. Summarizes gov-
ernmental conduct of international civil aviation, the
extent to which foreign air carriers serve the country,
and the degree of any significant foreign influence upon
the development or conduct of civil aviation.
B. Governmental administration and policy
1. Controlling agency
Describes the agency responsible for civil aviation,
including the composition and functions, and relationship
to other government agencies, particularly the military.
Includes organization charts showing channels of au-
thority, administration, operations, and coordination.
Evaluates the organization, citing strengths and weak-
nesses, noting dissident or other elements exerting in-
fluence or control. Evaluates government policies affect-
ing the operational capabilities and effectiveness of civil
aviation.
2. Laws and regulations
Summarizes the basic laws governing civil aviation,
including laws providing for governmental control, those
establishing controlling agencies, and the regulations per-
taining to :registry of aircraft, airworthiness certificates,
licensing, certification, and other general subjects, in-
cluding any unusual restrictions applicable to foreign or
other aircraft operating within the nation.
3. National policy
a. GOVERNMENT ATTITUDES - Gives the pattern of
ownership favored by the government for civil air enter-
prises. Discusses government policies concerning pri-
vate and public ownership, control and operation of
domestic scheduled air carriers, nonscheduled carriers
and charter operators, aeroclubs and schools, and private
flying; and the attitude of the government toward finan-
cial participation in or support of civil aviation enter-
prise by foreign governments or individuals.
b. GOVERNMENT SUPPORT- Discusses extent of finan-
cial support provided by the government to aviation
enterprises, aeroclubs, and aviation schools in the form
of direct subsidies, loans, and guarantees of loans; in-
direct support such as provision of air facilities, naviga-
tional aids, and meteorological services; and average
national budgets and appropriations in support of civil
aviation.
C. International relations
1. Affiliations
Lists the multilateral international civil aviation con-
ventions and agreements to which the nation is signa-
tory, and the international civil aviation organizations
of which the nation is a member. Where appropriate,
gives a brief description of the position taken by the
government in regard to civil air policies of other nations.
2. Air agreements
Describes international air transport agreements and
arrangements that sanction the exchange of scheduled
air services between the nations, including formal, in-
formal, provisional, or other arrangements, dates of signa-
ture and/or effective dates, duration, and major air
route provisions of each. Mentions any special over-
flight rights granted.
3. Foreign air carrier operations
Lists foreign air carriers conducting scheduled services
into or through the nation, including company names and
nationalities. Tabulates such services showing terminal
points and points served in the country. Maps included
if appropriate.
4. Foreign aid and influence
Describes any significant aid furnished to the nation's
civil aviation by foreign states, organizations, or indi-
viduals, including an assessment of the scope, value, and
effectiveness of any foreign aid program.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
D. Civil air activities
1. Scheduled air carriers
Discusses each carrier offering scheduled air services,
the full corporate name and the short or popular name
by which the carrier is known, and its main bases of
operation.
a. OWNERSHIP AND ORGANIZATION - Lists persons or
organizations participating in ownership, and the total
capitalization and the percentage held by each partici-
pant, with comments on any political or economic sig-
nificance attached to this participation. Presents tables
of organization. Discusses participation by the carrier
in other enterprises or activities, financial or otherwise,
foreign or domestic. Evaluates any contractual arrange-
ments for financial, managerial, operational, or other as-
sistance from other enterprises or governments, foreign
or domestic. Gives brief history of the development of
the air carrier, if significant.
b. OPERATIONS
(1) Air services - Describes scheduled services.
Tabulates terminals and intermediate points served, and
frequencies of each service. Illustrates the domestic and
international air route networks on a map. States num-
ber of unduplicated air route miles in the route system.
Comments on the carrier's adherence to published sched-
ules and effectiveness of scheduled operations. Com-
ments on any nonscheduled operations or other flight
activities.
(2) Aircraft - Lists numbers and types of air-
craft owned by each air carrier; numbers and types. of
aircraft on order and estimated dates of delivery; leased
or borrowed aircraft with numbers, types, and ownership;
and leasing or lending of the carrier's aircraft. Dis-
cusses adequacy of the aircraft fleet.
(3) Maintenance - Describes the carrier's main-
tenance and overhaul facilities and capabilities, with
comment on availability of its maintenance facilities to
others. If the carrier does not perform its own main-
tenance, includes a statement of where and by whom
the work is done.
(4) Personnel - Tabulates number of skilled
aviation employees in each major category of employ-
ment, and states total number of employees. Gives
number or percentage of foreign nationals among the
employees. Discusses the efficiency of personnel in the
d
various categories, training of employees an
employees, pensions, pay, and flight hours.
(5) Operational statistics, scheduled air carriers-
Lists the most recently published annual statistics to
indicate the scope of operations, utilization rates of
selected aircraft, accident rates, passengers carried,
route-miles flown, ton-miles of cargo and mail, and other
pertinent data.
2. Miscellaneous air services
Discusses each air service operator engaged in irregu-
lar or nonscheduled operations and services they per-
form, such as passenger or cargo charter, aerial spraying,
aerial advertising, ambulance services, and aerial photo-
graphic surveys. Includes the following tabular de-
scription:
Legal name. Short or popular name.
Headquarters.
Type (s) of service.
Numbers and types of aircraft owned.
Numbers and types of employees; percentage or number of
foreign nationals.
3. Government and private operators
Lists government agencies and other enterprises own-
ing civil aircraft; type of agency, business, or organiza-
tion; numbers and types of aircraft used; purpose of use;
number and types of air and ground crewmen employed;
numbers and types of aircraft owned by individuals and
used for noncommercial purposes; and names of in-
dividuals owning significant numbers of private aircraft
or major transport types.
E. Civil aviation training
Gives a general statement of types and purposes of
governmental or private training available in support of
civil aviation, and indicates any dual purposes such as
premilitary training conducted in civil institutions.
1. Aviation schools
Gives a tabulation or textual description of civil avia-
tion schools by name and location, and states whether
owned or sponsored by the government or by other or-
ganizations. Includes curriculum, aircraft owned or
operated by each school and related school facilities,
size and competence of instructional staff, size of stu-
dent body, annual training totals, general effectiveness
of the school, and types of aviation licenses awarded
to graduates.
2. Aeroclubs
States the number of aeroclubs, naming and locating
the significant ones. Describes membership, club activi-
ties, numbers and types of aircraft owned or used by
the clubs and related equipment and facilities, and the
annual training totals by category of skill. Evaluates
the effectiveness of the clubs as a group. Describes
support of clubs by significant individuals, organizations,
or groups; and discusses typical courses, student sub-
sidization, and types of licenses awarded members.
3. Other
Describes other civil air training provided to nationals,
including foreign aid programs providing ground, tech-
nical, or flying training in the country or abroad, and
numbers and categories of persons trained.
F. Services and supplies
1. Aircraft maintenance enterprises
Discusses enterprises (other than air carriers) pro-
viding aircraft maintenance and overhaul, including:
71
now
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
names of enterprises; their location and ownership; ca-
pabilities, i.e., type and quality of maintenance, repair,
and Overhaul performed; numbers and types of em-
ployees; and any significant number of foreign nationals
employed. Refers to maintenance described in Sub-
section D, 1, b, (3).
2. Sources of supply
a. AIRCRAFT AND SPARE PARTS - Lists the main
sources from which aircraft and spare parts are pro-
cured and mentions any shortages that may affect main-
tenance capabilities.
b. AVIATION PETROLEUM PRODUCTS - States sources
of supply for aviation fuels and lubricants and indicates
any special procurement problems.
G. Civil air facilities
Briefly assesses the adequacy of the airfield system, the
navigational aids system, and air weather service to
support the air transportation system. Includes a state-
ment of the total number of airfields open to civil avia-
tion, naming operating agencies (private, governmental,
civil, or military). Gives names and locations of the
principal international airports of entry and airfields at
major air transportation centers for domestic operations;
scope of meteorological facilities, naming the respon-
sible agency; and refers to appropriate official U.S. pub-
lications for more detailed information.
H. Military potential
1. Mobilization plans
Summarizes national plans for the mobilization of civil
aircraft, personnel, and facilities, for military or other
national emergency purposes. States factors affecting
the ready availability of civil aviation elements for those
purposes.
2. Aircraft availability
Assesses the numbers and types of civil aircraft which
could most significantly augment the military aviation
capability. Gives tabulation (by recapitulation from
other subsections) of the total numbers of each civil
transport aircraft type, indicating the number and kind
of. engines (piston, turboprop, jet), and actual or esti-
mated normal capacity; and for selected transports, gives
a tabulation of additional characteristics. States the
aggregate number of smaller aircraft (by type, if sig-
nificant).
3. Personnel readiness
Assesses the numbers and types of skilled civil aviation
personnel (recapitulated from other subsections), in-
cluding pilots and other aircrew members, aircraft main-
tenance personnel, air traffic controllers, and others, that
could be mobilized in the event of a national emer-
gency. Gives an estimate of the percentage of personnel
that are foreign nationals and not subject to national
jurisdiction.
I. Personalities
Lists persons in key civil aviation positions, including
officials of the government, air carriers, and other civil
aviation activities. Gives brief biographical sketches
with specific reference to aviation career experience.
J. Means of identification
Briefly describes (and illustrates by sketches) mark-
ings, emblems, and insignia used to identify national
civil aircraft and government systems for marking com-
mercial, private, and experimental aircraft.
K. Tabular data
This subsection provides information in tabular form
in the general order of reference in the text.
L. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 38. Telecommunications
A. General
Summarizes domestic, international, and special sys-
tems and evaluates the extent of coverage and quality of
service provided for the major classes of users; gives a
brief history of telecommunications, including basic
reasons (political, economic, military, etc.) for develop-
ment of telecommunication facilities; summarizes devel-
opment plans, sources of equipment and material, and
supporting research and development; discusses unusual
meteorological, geographical, or other factors having a
significant effect on telecommunications installation and
operation; and summarizes technical education facilities
and availability of engineers and skilled technicians.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
B. Administration and control
1. Government organizations
Describes (with organization chart) government or-
ganization (s) administering and/or operating principal
telecommunication systems, their position in the govern-
ment structure, location of major offices, and names of
key personnel; discusses membership and participation
in international telecommunications organizations; sum-
marizes regulations for special telecommunication sys-
tems and describes any unusual policies or procedures
regarding technical operations of censorship.
CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
2. Commercial organizations
Briefly discusses any nongovernment or foreign organi-
zations that own and/or operate telecommunication ter-
minals or systems within the country.
C. Domestic systems
1. General
Describes domestic telecommunication facilities, in-
cluding means of transmission, types of service (tele-
phone; regular telegraph; teleprinter; facsimile; radio
and television netting, including tables to show station
location, name, frequency range, power and modulation,
etc.); special networks, degree of integration between
facilities or systems, and amount of traffic handled
(graphs or tables). Gives location and capacity of
depots and warehouses. Summarizes factors contribut-
ing to vulnerability and susceptibility to sabotage, with
particular attention to military considerations.
2. Public intercity network
a. TRANSMISSION FACILITIES - Provides a descrip-
tion, supported by maps, charts, tables and photos, of the
facilities and installations (wire lines, cables, radio, re-
peaters, carrier, or other) that constitute the means of
moving telecommunication traffic between cities within
the country. Gives technical features of radio terminals
and relays, carrier facilities, and repeaters in this sub-
section, even though they may be collocated with switch-
ing facilities described in the next subsection.
b. SWITCHING SYSTEMS AND FACILITIES - Provides a
description of the system for routing and handling inter-
city telecommunication traffic and the major technical
characteristics of the equipment used, supported by ap-
propriate tabular and graphic material.
3. Local facilities
Gives a general description of the subscribers' equip-
ment and distribution and switching facilities that con-
stitute the local telecommunication systems of cities,
towns, and urban areas of the country. Includes major
technical features of equipment and photos of equipment
and typical installations.
4. Special systems
Describes in general the coverage and function of
any special purpose telecommunication facilities or net-
works in the country and their degree of dependence on
or integration with the public system.
D. International facilities
1. General
Summarizes the pattern, purpose, and relative im-
portance of the landline, submarine cable, telex, and
radio facilities that provide telecommunications with
other countries. Mentions any unusual factors con-
tributing to vulnerability, with particular attention to
military considerations.
2. Landlines
Gives the characteristics and traffic handling capability
of landlines to adjacent countries. Locations normally
are shown on the maps associated with Subsection C, 2.
3. Radio
Describes the location, uses, and capabilities of the
radio transmitting, receiving, and control installations for
public correspondence with foreign countries. Covers
special purpose and private use facilities only if they
constitute a very significant part of the total international
telecommunication capability.
4. Submarine cables
Describes the location, use, and capabilities of sub-
marine cables connecting with other countries. Loca-
tions normally are shown on the maps associated with
Subsection C, 2.
5. Communications satellite ground stations
Describes, when pertinent, the locations, use, and
capabilities of ground stations used for connecting into
communications satellite systems, including plans for
expansion.
E. Broadcast and television
1. General
Provides a summary description (with map) of the
pattern, quality, and effectiveness of the radio and tele-
vision transmitting and receiving facilities used to en-
tertain, educate, or propagandize the general public of
the country. Discusses wired-broadcast facilities, if in
use.
2. AM and FM broadcast
Gives a qualitative and general technical description
of the AM and FM transmitter and studio installations
in the country. Includes photos when available. De-
scribes netting arrangements and facilities, if separate
from the public intercity system. Discusses types and
distribution of receivers.
3. Television
Same as for AM and FM broadcast, plus a brief of
standards.
4. Wired broadcast (when pertinent)
Gives a general description of the extent and character-
istics of any systems using wire lines to interconnect the
program sources and remote multiple listeners, as for
example in entertainment, education, or propaganda.
F. Tabular data
This subsection provides information in tabular form
in the general order of reference in the text.
G. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
SOCIOLOGICAL
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex and highly developed country or
NIS Area. For smaller or developing nations, however, certain
modifications in balance or coverage may be desirable. The Out-
line Guide should be used flexibly and adapted to assure adequate
treatment of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Area. In
preparation and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial Instructions
should be followed in detail.
Section 41 - Population
Section 42 - Characteristics of the People
Section 43 - Religion, Education, and Public Information
Section 44 - Manpower
Section 45 - Health and Sanitation
Section 46 - Welfare
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 41. Population
A. General
This subsection provides an appropriate approach to
the material in the remainder of the section; it is not
merely a digest of what follows. It includes a brief state-
ment of the significant aspects of population as a whole
and its major segments, noting the most important and
distinctive demographic facts as they relate to economic,
political, and other major problems of the country.
B. Size, composition, and geographic distribu-
tion
1. Size and composition
Gives the total size of the population by the most
recent census or estimate and compares it with neighbor-
ing, rival, or other countries as appropriate. Identifies
the major segments, racial and/or ethnic, giving numbers
and regional distribution (with map if possible). As
appropriate, the subsection examines the effect of re-
alinements of boundaries or migrations due to war or
economic or other disaster upon the composition of the
population. If the population is mixed, it states the defi-
nitions used by the national census for identifying indi-
viduals with these segments (race, language, religion).
2. Distribution and density
Gives data on the density of the total population of
the area as a whole and presents a table of area and
population in the chief administrative subdivisions
(states, provinces, departments, etc.) with number of
persons per square mile, preferably accompanied by a
map of population density.
3. Pattern of settlement and urban areas
Discusses the general pattern of settlement-orienta-
tion toward the sea, natural resources, river commerce,
and industrial activities. Notes characteristics of major
ethnic or other segments of the population in the patterns
of settlement. Gives percentage of population which is
rural and urban as defined by the census of the country
under discussion and notes whether this population is
concentrated in major agglomerations or dispersed, with
reasons why. Notes the extent to which the rural popu-
lation is collected in villages and hamlets or is in isolated
households.
Tabulates the population of major cities and the chief
metropolitan areas, including the total population of
each with the percentages of the significant ethnic or
other segments of the population. Comments on the
patterns of settlement of these segments in metropolitan
centers. Notes whether population groups tend to be
segregated, living and working apart from other seg-
ments, or are interspersed in the community pattern.
4. Internal migration
Discusses the role of internal migration in the distribu-
tion of the population and indicates the chief origins,
destinations, and causes of internal migratory move-
ments, particularly rural-urban migration. Comments
on seasonal migrations. Notes any marked differences
identified with the major segments of the population.
C. Population structure
Tabulates the total population (in thousands) classified
by five-year groups (0-4, 5-9, 10-14 ... 65 and over) for
males, females, and totals as of current census or estimate.
For illustration, it provides a population pyramid. It
points out whether the population is predominantly young
or old, and any significant excess or deficit of either sex,
in relation to age groups. Discusses age at first marriage
and the proportion of unmarried males and females. As
appropriate, notes the presence of a large unmarried or
widowed population arising from late marriage, war cas-
ualties, or other factors such as polygamy. Gives data
on number of families or households by size. Gives
similar data for significant segments of the population,
geographical, racial, or ethnic, and shows their relation-
ship to the statistics for the nation as a whole.
Indicates the percentages of the total population in
working ages (e.g., 15-64) and in dependent ages (e.g.,
0-14 and 65 and over), noting any marked regional,
urban-rural, or ethnic variations from the national pattern.
Analyzes the extent to which the statistics reflect the
actual degree of dependency on the population of work-
ing age, due to such factors as years required for educa-
tion, compulsory retirement, etc. Points out any sig-
nificant variations for major segments of the population.
Comments also on the manpower available to the
armed forces.
D. Population change
1. Vital statistics
Tabulates births, deaths, and excess of births over
deaths since about 1950. Shows vital rates per 1,000
of the population for the same period and such earlier
periods (e.g., averages for 1921-25, 1926-30, ... 1941-45,
and 1946-50) as are necessary to give proper perspec-
tive, preferably illustrated by a graphic. If possible,
gives infant mortality rates (infant deaths in first year
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
of life per .1,000 births) and comments on life expectancy.
Notes any significant variations for major geographic or
ethnic segments of the population. Comments on the
major social, political, economic, environmental, and
mental and physical health characteristics affecting the
vital statistics.
2. Immigration and emigration
If data are available, shows in tabular form immi-
grants by country of origin and birth and emigrants
by chief country of destination in the past 20 years or so
with summary data for prior periods. Indicates the resi-
due of migration as measured by the number of foreign-
born and the number of aliens and naturalized citizens.
Discusses war-induced migrations across national borders
and other population dislocations if any.
3. Trends and projections
Cites the dates and figures for national census-taking
in the area. Compares the rate of growth with those of
neighboring or rival countries, noting whether the coun-
try has been a population vacuum or a source of out-
ward population pressure. Gives best available estimates
for casualties, military and civilian, in recent wars.
Points out the factors affecting growth and the present
trends.
Indicates prospective future population trends, during
the next 15 to 25 years, in size and structure of the
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
population, based on natality, mortality, and migration.
Comments on prospective changes in regional, urban-
rural, and ethnic composition.
E. Population problems and policies
This subsection examines the problems presented by
growth, decline, or distribution of the population and
any special significance of such problems to major seg-
ments of the population. Notes the attitudes of different
groups of people toward these problems if they are
significant to national stability. Relates the policies
proposed or adopted by the government that affect the
size, distribution, or rate of growth of the population.
Indicates migration policies and discusses the present and
prospective role of migration and settlement in relieving
population pressure or in developing thinly populated
areas. Notes whether the government has adopted pol-
icies to increase the numbers of marriages and births,
such as family allowance, or encourages practices of
family limitation.
F. Reference data
This subsection accommodates lengthy statistical ma-
terial which provides data in addition to short tables
interspersed in the text.
G. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 42. Characteristics of the People
A. General
This subsection provides an appropriate approach to
the material in the remainder of the section. It de-
scribes the crucial historical developments conditioning
the society. Notes those factors in the physical environ-
ment which have contributed to the society's distinctive
cultural development, pointing out, for example, ac-
cessibility to hostile neighbors, or natural features and
resources such as mountain ranges and oil deposits, as
in the case of Iran. Outlines the degree of racial and
cultural homogeneity and complexity of the society.
Indicates briefly the factors in the society that have led
to national strength or weakness and national solidarity or
disunity, as well as susceptibility to foreign psychological
influences and/or desire for expansion of influence over
other areas.
B. Ethnic groups
Identifies the significant ethnic groups within the coun-
try, noting their origins, their size and distribution, any
distinctive features other than physical characteristics
or language, the degree of integration, any special legal
provisions made for them, and their significance with
respect to national strength and weakness.
1. Physical characteristics
Describes briefly and generally the physical charac-
teristics common to each group. Where pertinent,
stresses physical differences which enable a foreigner
to distinguish one group from another. Discusses, where
significant, other aspects of appearance-e.g., clothing,
physical markings, ornamentation-which are useful in
differentiating groups.
2. Languages
Indicates the major languages and dialects commonly
spoken in the country and, if pertinent, relates them to
ethnic groups. Shows for each language the number
of speakers, the percentage of the total population rep-
resented, and the geographic distribution. For each
major language or dialect, notes the language family
to which it belongs (giving alternate views when spe-
cialists disagree), significant sources of outside influence,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
mutual intelligibility with other languages in the coun-
try, and adequacy for special fields of knowledge, es-
pecially as compared with English. If the major lan-
guages are used by significant groups in other countries,
this is noted. Discusses to what extent languages, dia-
lects, or distinctive pronunciations are identified with
social classes or groups, and what their prestige values
are (e.g., cockney vs. Oxford English). Discusses of-
ficial policy in regard to languages (e.g., for use in the
schools, in the courts, on the radio, and in the armed
services). Indicates the degree to which foreign tongues
are spoken, especially English, and notes the extent of
bilingualism.
C. Structure of society
1. Social classes
This subsection examines the basis upon which im-
portant social status distinctions are made (e.g., family,
wealth, education, occupation, etc.). Discusses the rela-
tive size and distribution of social classes or status groups,
noting, if pertinent, any relationship between classes and
ethnic groups. The subsection takes up such questions
as the extent to which the various classes exercise leader-
ship or control over national life, and in what way;
whether the society is relatively dynamic or static; and
what changes are taking place in the size and composi-
tion of social classes or status groups. Notes the sig-
nificance of changes in social stratification as they affect
and are affected by political and economic development.
Discusses the means whereby individuals or groups
can gain or lose social status and the extent to which
individuals may and do move from one class to another.
Notes changes taking place in the social structure which
tend to alter or reorient individual attitudes or behavior,
such as a new stress on competition, new desires created
by education which society does not satisfy, strains of
increased mobility on family ties, etc.
2. Social groups
a. FAMILY AND KINSHIP GROUPINGS - Explains the
characteristic forms of family and kinship groupings,
where pertinent, for each ethnic group. Analyzes the
role of the family as a basic unit of society. Notes the
domicile pattern and important intrafamily relationships
(including the status of the father and mother, the rela-
tionship of children with their parents, etc.). Notes dis-
tinctive rights and responsibilities in such matters as
family support and inheritance. Notes the major life-
cycle processes-e.g., birth, childrearing, marriage,
death-as they form or affect basic social attitudes.
Discusses significant practices and customs associated
with each process. Points out the practices and customs
that are changing and explains in what direction and
why. In discussing the roles of husband and wife, com-
pares also the roles of men and women in society as a
whole, noting distinctive behavior patterns of each sex
toward the other.
b. COMMUNITY - Notes patterns of settlement, both
rural and urban, as, for example, whether rural settle-
ments consist of isolated farmsteads or cluster-type farm
villages. In relation to the cities, comments on the
tendency of ethnic or class groups to settle in enclaves
or ghettos. If relevant, notes the existence and nature
of neighborhood, ward, and community special interest
groups and organizations. Discusses examples of co-
operation within neighborhoods or among community
organizations. Where pertinent, discusses interpersonal
relationships within the community and notes avenues
of advancement to community leadership positions.
Notes briefly the level of public service facilities, in-
cluding those for leisure-time activity.
C. OTHER DISTINCTIVE GROUPINGS - Discusses the ex-
tent to which people join various types of organizations
and whether they are traditional joiners, noting differing
tendencies among ethnic groups and social classes. Notes
the relative importance of major types of groups in the
functioning of society, either as involuntary groups or as
such normally voluntary groupings as economic, political,
religious, civic, and recreational organizations. As a rule
discusses types of organizations rather than specific
groupings. Notes the role each type plays in society.
Examines the factors determining status, prestige, and
leadership within each of the important categories. If
distinctive patterns exist for different ethnic groups, the
subsection discusses these patterns.
D. Social values, attitudes, and customs
1. Basic value system
Describes briefly the central values of the society,
especially those derived from religious and educational
systems, which provide the basis for understanding be-
havior in all areas of social life. Notes the presence of
any competing values which are in conflict. Points out,
within the framework of the central value system, what
the goals of the society as a whole are-material prop-
erty, peace, conquest, preservation of the culture, racial
superiority, propagation of a religion or ideology, etc.
Notes whether the means of achieving these accepted
individual and collective goals accord generally with
democratic or authoritarian standards. Indicates briefly
any significant similarities and contrasts in basic values
existing between the society and the United States or
other countries with which it is intimately concerned.
Points out' change taking place in the basic value
system, the direction of this change, the chief factors
causing it, and its speed. Takes up the questions: Is
man's role conceived to be that of opposing, accepting,
or provoking social change; or of accepting his physical
environment or changing it, for example, through adop-
tion of improved methods of production or new modes of
life such as urbanization?
Points out the most effective sanctions motivating or
inhibiting behavior, such as prestige, material rewards,
ostracism, or legal punishment, noting to what extent
deviant behavior from group norms is tolerated.
79
bwm~
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
Describes any significant rural-urban, ethnic, sex, or
class differences in basic social values and motivations
and indicates the extent to which these differences
threaten national solidarity.
2. Basic attitudes
This subsection discusses the more lasting attitudes of
the people, rather than current public opinion. Iden-
tifies the specific groups whose attitudes are presented.
Where possible, indicates major group differences from
national norms. In general, the subsection avoids any
detailed description of the historical or other factors
responsible for the attitudes discussed.
a. TOWARD OWN SOCIETY - Where specific data are
available, presents information on such questions as the
following: What group attitudes toward their own society
and toward various classes and/or groups in the society
tend to divide the people into antagonistic groups; are
the unifying attitudes basically strong enough to prevent
divisive attitudes from being a threat to national
solidarity?
The subsection attempts to distinguish any clear and
widely held concept of patriotism and the national
achievements in which the people take special pride.
Identifies the established national symbols (e.g., slogans,
national anthem, flag), and evaluates their present ef-
fectiveness as they operate on individuals or groups.
Comments briefly on the major social rituals, such as
national holiday celebrations, and on the texts of national
songs or historical monuments and documents reflecting
important symbols of the nation. Notes their effective-
ness in crystallizing thought and attitudes, and identifies
the symbols appealing most to each important social
group, such as intellectuals or labor. Reviews histori-
cally the national heroes, and the extent to which they
have become popular symbols of ideal leadership. Con-
siders the popular attitude toward structured positions
such as the crown, president, prime minister, etc., noting
if the traditional attitude toward persons holding politi-
cal office is characterized by a widespread feeling of
cynicism, unquestioning worship, confidence, or some-
thing else.
b. TOWARD OTHER SOCIETIES -- Identifies the basic
popular attitudes toward peoples of other cultures-
curiosity, fear, friendliness, respect, resentment, indiffer-
ence, hostility, etc., defining specific attitudes, such as
those of the elite or the bureaucracy. Takes up the
questions: Do the people consider their way of life
superior to others, and if so, why; and do any classes or
segments of the society identify themselves with foreign
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
groups? Discusses popular attitudes toward Soviet citi-
zens and culture or toward those of other Communist
societies.
Attempts to determine any prevailing attitude in favor
of cooperation with other nations in the achieving of
common goals and to identify the segments of society
in which this attitude is most marked.
c. TOWARD INTERNATIONAL CONFLICT - Identifies the
more definite attitudes toward war as an instrument of
foreign policy, toward military activities and traditions,
and toward national defense (including civil defense),
with some consideration of the status of veterans in the
society.
3. Significant customs
Describes (for each ethnic group where appropriate)
any nationally significant customs or facets of daily life
differing from prevailing patterns in the United States
which might affect U.S. operations abroad, or of which
a U.S. representative working in the country mightneed
to know. In this context, notes significant dietary and
eating habits and comments on social taboos. Notes
the most popular sports and games, indicating where
feasible those aspects of particular sports which reflect
national attitudes.
E. Artistic and intellectual expression
Notes the cultural heritage of the country as reflected
in artistic and intellectual expression. Where possible,
relates these forms of expression to the society as a
whole, noting how social structure, values, and atti-
tudes have shaped them. Comments on significant con-
temporary forms of expression. Points out whether such
forms of expression are founded on well-developed native
traditions or are borrowed and notes any conflict between
traditional and borrowed forms.
Indicates the degree of popular appreciation of or
participation in the various types of artistic expression,
including a brief discussion of popular or folk music,
folk art, and folk theater (e.g., traditional pageants,
pantomimes). Explores such topics as common attitudes
toward cultural achievements, the effect of these achieve-
ments on national traditions, and the status of artists and
intellectuals in the society. Discusses distinctive pat-
terns of artistic and intellectual expression for minority
ethnic groups, where appropriate.
F. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
80
MMMM
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 43. Religion, Education, and Public Information
A. Religion
1. Significance of religion in the country
a. RELIGION AND NATIONAL CULTURE - Notes the
most important religious faiths and their relative sig-
nificance. Describes the part religion plays in the na-
tion's culture and its effect on the value system. Dis-
cusses the influence of religion on the social institutions
of the country and estimates the importance of religion
to the people as a whole and to various socioeconomic
groups. Indicates the features of religion which are
important in the daily life of the people and in their
relations with other people.
Estimates the influence of religious affinities and differ-
ences on national unity and stability, including such
historical background data as are necessary to understand
the present situation. Explains sympathies or antipathies
toward those of other sects or faiths or toward those
of no faith and notes any ties with those of similar
faith in other countries. Discusses the relation of or-
ganized religion to the cultural objectives and activities
of the established regime. Notes whether prevailing
beliefs are compatible with or influenced by either com-
munism or Western democracy, and if pertinent, dis-
cusses the activities and influence of foreign missionary
work (Christian and other) in the society, noting the
attitudes of the government leaders and the people
toward these activities. Discusses any major antireli-
gious movements or organized persecution of particular
religious groups and notes the nature of the leadership
in these activities, with comment on any significant
foreign ties of the leaders.
b. GOVERNMENT AND RELIGION - Indicates the rela-
tionship between the government and organized religion,
including laws that pertain to the status and activities
of religious organizations. Comments on the presence
or absence of guarantees of religious liberty, noting the
nature of such guarantees (by constitution, law, inter-
national treaty, etc.). Notes any divisions of the gov-
ernment which have administrative or other responsibili-
ties for the activities of religious organizations and
foreign religious groups. Examines the relationship of
organized religion to political objectives of the regime.
C. SIZE AND DISTRIBUTION OF RELIGIOUS MEMBER-
SHIP - Gives the number, percentage, and distribution
of inhabitants adhering to the principal faiths, and if
possible, illustrates these data with a map. Indicates
whether specific religious faiths are linked with specific
ethnic, linguistic, or racial groups.
2. Principal faiths
a. DESIGNATION - For each of the principal faiths:
(1) Organization- Gives a brief account of the
organizational structure, including the relationship of all
its recognized religious and lay organizations, and the
degree of responsibility assumed by the parent body over
their activities. Describes any organizational ties with
groups outside of the country, e.g., with the Vatican or
the World Council of Churches.
(2) Attitudes and activities - Presents the nature
and extent of activities carried on by each religious
group and, if possible, states the objectives of these
activities. Comments on the places of worship; schools
and other plants and their equipment; real estate and
other material interests; and the finances of each reli-
gious group. Notes whether these activities and facili-
ties are tax-supported or are tax free. Discusses sig-
nificant official positions taken by the various religious
organizations on secular matters in general and toward
specific national and international political, social, and
economic problems.
(3) Leadership - Discusses the spiritual and lay
leadership, including educational qualifications and role
in the religious life of the community, position of reli-
gious leadership in the society, and relationship with
leaders of other religious groups. Discusses also the
extent of control exerted by the church organization over
its leaders and their nationally significant attitudes or
opinions on secular affairs.
(4) Tenets and practices - For each of the prin-
cipal non-Christian religious groups, describes the tradi-
tional tenets and practices which have special importance
for the society. Indicates the extent of controversy over
religious doctrines. Indicates the extent to which formal
church adherence and participation in religious activities
reflect religious faith.
B. Education
1. Education in the national life
a. EDUCATION AND NATIONAL CULTURE - Discusses
the educational concepts of the people. Notes the gen-
eral character of available education, its thoroughness
and effectiveness. Provides a concise introduction to
this subsection by describing those forces that have left
a lasting impression on the educational system, such as
government policy, religious interests, or foreign influ-
ences. Indicates the relative strength and the distinctive
purpose and characteristics of public and private educa-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
tion. Discusses the extent to which the various segments
of the society, such as industry, philanthropic founda-
tions, wealthy individuals, etc., support education, not-
ing the trends and objectives of this support. Points
up the role of the educational system in social, political,
and economic life. Discusses such problems as its ade-
quacy in meeting the demands of national life, its impact
on social mobility, and its effectiveness in molding atti-
tudes of influential groups. Estimates, if pertinent, the
relative extent and effectiveness of ideological indoctrina-
tion by the educational system.
b. LEVEL OF LITERACY AND EDUCATIONAL ACHIEVE-
MENT - Discusses the level of literacy and educational
achievement in the society as a whole, and with refer-
ence to socioeconomic classes and to women. Discusses
the size of enrollment at each educational level and notes
the extent of educational opportunities in relation to the
extent of the school age population. Notes trends of
educational development, including a projection of the
school population.
2. Government and education
Discusses the extent to which education is the respon-
sibility of central, provincial, and/or local government.
Comments on the nature, extent, and purpose of govern-
ment control over and aid to public and private educa-
tion, including such devices as educational requirements
for employment, provision of educational grants, exami-
nations for government certification, etc. If any devices
for controlling the political loyalty of faculty and stu-
dents are judged by the regime to be necessary, these
are noted. The relation of laws and administrative
action in. control of education is also noted. Discusses
the extent and nature of public influence over educational
policy at all levels.
a. LEGAL FRAMEWORK - Notes the constitutional and
legal provisions affecting education and the effectiveness
of their enforcement, including such factors as guarantees
of academic freedom; free and compulsory education;
language of instruction; control over textbooks and con-
tent of teaching; and provisions concerning religious
education.
b. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION OF EDUCATION - De-
scribes the position of public education in the govern-
mental structure, illustrating where practical with an
organizational chart. Notes the relation of the central
government's division of education with other levels of
governmental responsibility for education.
C. FINANCIAL SUPPORT AND FACILITIES - Notes the
nature, source, and extent of financial support and ex-
penditure and the adequacy of educational facilities and
equipment in relation to the size and distribution of
enrollment at each educational level.
d. FOREIGN EDUCATIONAL PROGRAMS - Describes the
government's policy concerning participation in the ex-
change of students, professors, and other educational per-
sonnel with foreign countries. If the government is a
recipient of foreign aid or contributes to foreign educa-
tional programs the subsection describes the nature of
this educational activity, noting the other countries par-
ticipating, with the extent of exchange with each.
3. Educational system and content
Describes the general organization of education, both
public and private, from elementary schools through
universities, including provisions for adult education,
vocational and industrial training, and graduate educa-
tion. Discusses the role of research institutions. Points
out any notable inadequacies of the educational system,
such as an abnormally high ratio of students to teachers.
Shows graphically the types of education provided at
various age levels and the number of students and
teachers for each grade.
Discusses in brief, general terms the content of formal
education at various levels, its major emphases with past
and present trends (e.g., acquisition of formal knowledge
or technical and practical knowledge), and its effect.
a. GENERAL EDUCATION - Describes the significant
content of general education in the schools at primary
and secondary levels, including the nature and extent of
preprimary training where pertinent. Discusses the gen-
eral methods and objectives of instruction and its effec-
tiveness. If possible, notes the percentage of entrants
who complete the course and the percentage of graduates
advancing to higher levels.
b. VOCATIONAL AND TECHNICAL TRAINING-Describes
vocational schooling to the extent that it is within the
framework of the educational system and, in particular,
the methods and conditions of instruction. Supplies
pertinent statistics, and evaluates technical and general
effectiveness of the system.
C. HIGHER EDUCATION - Discusses the content of
higher learning, noting the methods and intellectual
level, orientation and degree of isolation from or ac-
cessibility to world developments in scholarship, degree
of general training, role of faculties and students in
national life, and role of research in the educational
process. Discusses the nature of professional training
available and the quality of its discipline, noting the re-
quirements for legal recognition and practice in a pro-
fession, if any, and the types of internship or apprentice-
ship involved. Notes the relation between the pro-
fessions and this training. Notes the relative prestige
of various types of careers as factors in shaping the de-
velopment of education.
d. ADULT EDUCATION - Discusses adult education in
the fields of both specific training and general education,
whether conducted within the educational system or by
private organizations, such as churches and labor unions.
In particular, describes participation, level of instruc-
tion, credits, etc. Evaluates adult education in relation
to the regular educational system and the general edu-
cation level.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
4. Noncurricular student activities
Discusses the extent to which school authorities at the
several levels encourage noncurricular and extracurricular
activities by providing facilities, professional guidance,
and controls. Notes the extent to which student activities
have social and political significance beyond the school.
Considers the extent to which student activities have
been influenced by governmental or antigovernmental
elements and the degree to which student activities are
linked with special interest groups.
5. Educators
Discusses the customary level of competence,of those
responsible for the administration and teaching at the
various levels of education, in both public and private
schools. Includes not only the school administrators and
teachers but also national, provincial, and local officials
charged with the administration of education and the
members of boards of education or other policy groups.
Gives the general socioeconomic level of teachers,
their educational level, how they are selected, and other
background factors. Compares their rates of pay with
those of other professional groups. Discusses their
prestige in the community; the degree to which they
support the regime in power; the habitual means for
acquiring information; awareness, interest, and level of
understanding of national and international problems;
and prevailing attitudes toward the United States and
the U.S.S.R. Notes any marked predispositions and at-
titudes as a group. Estimates to what extent teaching
appointments are politically determined. Notes the
presence or absence of permanent job tenure and pen-
sion provisions for teachers. Assesses their role as
molders of opinion within and without the schools.
Notes the number of women teachers at each level and
any special limitations in their appointment, training,
advancement, or pay.
Identifies important teachers' associations or organized
groups, with a description of each major organization.
Notes the group's international ties, if any.
C. Public information
Describes the level of development of mass commu-
nication of ideas and information. Notes the principal
and most popular media of communication used and
the extent and characteristics of their use. Notes also
the relative 'importance of other media and the chief
purposes for which they are characteristically used.
Identifies the main media used for dissemination of news
and information and transmission of messages, noting the
medium in which people tend to place the most trust and
why. Explains the extent to which government uses
the various media of communication and its way of do-
ing so.
Notes the extent to which freedom of speech and of
the press are guaranteed. Discusses the degree of re-
sponsibility assumed by the government in this field,
noting specific laws and/or administrative machinery
designed to control communication and all types of pub-
lie information and to protect guarantees of freedom.
Notes the extent of government financial support of the
various media. Notes the overall extent of government
or other forms of censorship, control, or influence over
media. Discusses significant subversive or foreign in-
fluences.
Notes the nature and scope of important professional
groups in the communications field, such as editors, pub-
lishers, writers, and producers.
1. Press and periodicals
Discusses the level of development of the industry
as a whole; the nature and extent of the audiences
reached; languages used; the nature and source of con-
tent; the nature and influence of ownership and control
in the industry, including interlocking interests; sources
of news; relative influence on public opinion; and the
general characteristics of the system of distribution.
Notes the extent of use of foreign publications and agen-
cies of distribution.
a. IMPORTANT NEWSPAPERS - Tabulates important
newspapers, covering the following points: name, loca-
tion, language, frequency of publication, circulation, and
political leanings.
b. PRESS SERVICES - Describes the more important
domestic and foreign press services available, including
U.S. agencies.
c. PERIODICALS - Tabulates along the same lines as
noted for newspapers above.
2. Books and libraries
Describes the book publishing industry in terms of
total size, quality and type of output, and languages
used. Comments on the extent of importation of foreign
books, the type most widely circulated, and special gov-
ernment regulations concerning their importation and
distribution.
Describes the system and general types of libraries,
covering size and popularity, location, and groups
reached.
3. Motion pictures
Describes the industry and medium as a whole, cover-
ing such points as: size and type of audience reached;
number and location of theaters; languages used; popu-
larity of various types of films, both domestic and for-
eign; imports as compared with domestic production;
sources of foreign films; extent of government censorship
and control; and general effectiveness as a medium.
a. DOMESTIC PRODUCTION - Describes domestic pro-
duction facilities, covering: number of companies and lo-
cation; volume and type of films produced; ownership
and control. Notes foreign investment, foreign technical
assistance, and foreign talent used in domestic production.
b. FOREIGN FILMS - Discusses the distribution of
foreign films, including the volume used (analyzed by
country of source). Notes the relative screen time af-
forded U.S. and non-U.S. films and estimates the long-
83
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
term effect of U.S. pictures on public attitudes and
opinions.
4. Radio and television
Describes each overall medium, giving the number of
broadcasting networks and stations and their location
with relation to the potential audience, and covering the
following: languages used, general characteristics of
ownership and control, source of financing, source of
news, general characteristics and economic status of
listeners, estimated total size of audiences, type of pro-
grams most popular, most favored listening hours, and
relative influence and effectiveness of medium.
CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Describes individual networks and stations, with cov-
erage of the following: name and location, ownership
and control, types of programs, languages used, political
leanings, and relative popularity and influence. Notes
which networks and stations are foreign-sponsored and
lists the foreign elements involved.
The physical plants, equipment, and technical quality
of radio and television stations are discussed in some
detail in SEGnON 38, Telecommunications.
D. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 44. Manpower
A. General
This subsection presents the necessary minimum of
social, political, and economic background for the sub-
sequent more specialized discussion. Reviews the basic
characteristics of the society that affect manpower utiliza-
tion or the welfare of the workers, such as form of gov-
ernment, social mobility, attitudes toward work and to-
ward the cooperative work effort, the role of labor
organizations in political parties, and the degree and
types of industrial development. Gives some indication
of the principal manpower and labor problems of the
country, including the presence of slavery or forced
labor if it exists.
B. Manpower and employment
1. Labor force and labor reserve
Gives the size of the total labor force and its composi-
tion by age and sex, as compared with the total popula-
tion and the population of working age (15-64 years
unless the country uses a different definition), presenting
when possible a labor-force pyramid superimposed on a
population pyramid. Lists important minority groups
which show significant deviations from the overall pat-
tern of participation in the labor force. As appropriate,
the subsection presents estimates of the proportion of
the labor force employed in the modern economy, the
proportion which is literate and otherwise capable of
transfer to that economy, and the proportion which could
not readily be transferred. Estimates the annual rate
of increase in the labor force, together with a projection
of change to be expected. In relation to potential con-
ditions of national emergency, presents an estimate of
the number, types, and skills of people who could be
brought into the labor force and the population groups
from which they would come.
2. Employment patterns
Discusses the labor force (economically active) by
branch of economic activity, class of worker, and geo-
graphic distribution (illustrated if possible by a map
showing the location of employment in major industries),
with analyses in each case, where important, as to sex,
age, and seasonality. Where an important branch of
economic activity is carried on under conditions (e.g.,
primitive agriculture, household industry) very differ-
ent from those usual in the United States, the subsection
presents a brief description of the use of worktime of
men, women, and children at each season of the year.
Describes government service (and especially military
service) as to numbers (including relationship to the
total labor force), major categories, the civil service
system, training, pay and other incentives, and relative
competence and honesty. Notes, if the country has an
economic development program in operation, the major
relevant types of labor development.
3. Unemployment and underemployment
Provides data or estimates as to the extent of unemploy-
ment in the labor force. Discusses the unemployed as
to registration with an employment service; duration of
unemployment; occupational, sociological, age and sex
groupings; geographic area; and degree of skill and
experience. Explains causes of unemployment. Con-
siders problems of the unemployed groups (including
the "educated unemployed" where such exists) as well
as efforts of the government to relieve these problems and
reduce unemployment. Notes and explains the extent
and types of underemployment.
4. Occupations, skills, and training
Analyzes the labor force by type of occupation, shown
in tabular form, and by sex if data are available. Dis-
cusses the occupational groupings for managerial, tech-
84
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
nical, and skilled workers, and, where appropriate, dis-
cusses also the effects of mechanization on occupations.
Considers shortages of skilled and high level manpower
with respect to types of occupation, the impact of eco-
nomic development plans, and the presence or absence
of an adequate organized market mechanism, vocational
guidance, and the effect of prejudices and customs on
hiring practices. Discusses and evaluates occupational
training as to its quality and capacity to remedy short-
ages of skilled labor.
5. Productivity
Discusses output per man-hour or per man in agri-
culture, manufacturing, and other industries, using fig-
ures if available. Considers the various factors of pro-
ductivity such as technology, human factors, worker
incentives, labor turnover, absenteeism, conditions at the
worksite, labor union restrictions, management prac-
tices, and government activities.
6. Labor mobility and hiring practices
Considers the ability of labor to move from one area,
occupation, or enterprise to another, and restrictions on
such movement, including legal restrictions on job-
changing. In relation to the labor force, discusses im-
migration, emigration, and internal migration. Analyzes
labor turnover and, as appropriate, the relationship of
mechanization to loss of jobs. Discusses also the
methods and agencies for recruitment of labor, for locat-
ing employment opportunities and filling job vacancies,
and the effect of prejudices and customs on hiring
practices.
7. Manpower planning
Discusses, in relation to other economic planning, gov-
ernmental planning for provision and deployment of
manpower. Considers such factors as estimates of man-
power requirements and resources, plans to meet any
anticipated deficits, government controls over utiliza-
tion or transfer of the labor force, programs for train-
ing and finding jobs for young people, and planned im-
portation or replacement of foreign labor. As appro-
priate, discusses also wartime manpower controls and
the extent and manner of participation of management
and labor in the formulation of manpower plans.
C. Labor law and administration
1. Basic labor legislation
Evaluates current labor legislation. Notes legislation
in such fields as the organization of labor unions, strikes,
collective bargaining, wages, hours, working conditions,
and the employment of women, children, older workers,
and veterans. Comments briefly on the relation of such
laws to actual conditions and demands of labor.
2. Labor agencies of government
Outlines the agencies of government concerned with
labor matters, giving some description of their function
and personnel and an appropriate organization chart.
Discusses the relative emphasis of the government on
labor affairs and evaluates its effectiveness and honesty
in the handling of such affairs.
D. Income and working conditions
1. Wage structure and labor cost
Discusses earnings and supplementary benefits by
branch of economic activity, occupation, and region,
describing legal minimum wage rates and enforcement
in each case as appropriate. Notes both real and nomi-
nal money wages, supplementary benefits, and total
wages. Analyzes the wage structure and appraises it
broadly in relation to job mobility, levels of living, and
trends of earnings, prices, and labor cost productivity
ratio.
2. Hours of work and overtime
Treats the average and legal hours of work as they
apply to branches of economic activity, occupations, and
regions, and the customs and regulations relative to vaca-
tions, holidays, and overtime hours and pay.
3. Safety and hygiene
Describes working conditions that directly affect the
health and welfare of workers in terms of industrial
injuries, man-days lost, disabilities, and death. Dis-
cusses industrial safety programs as well as govern-
mental regulations applying to industrial safety and
hygiene and workmen's compensation.
E. Management
1. Characteristics
Discusses managerial personnel and the most influ-
ential management leaders as to type, social background,
basis of selection, education and training, attitudes, and
social, political, and military influences and ties, ap-
praising their progressiveness, capacity and desire to
increase productivity, interest in research and develop-
ment, personnel policies, and regard for national as op-
posed to personal interests. Comments on leading legal
forms of enterprise (government, corporate, sole pro-
prietorship, cooperative, etc.), size of enterprises, and
extent and importance of absentee and foreign (par-
ticularly U.S.) ownership.
2. Management organizations
Discusses the extent to which employers and managers
are organized into chambers of commerce, trade asso-
ciations, professional and technical associations, etc.
Lists such federations and their memberships and inter-
national ties, and discusses their influence, characteristics,
and outstanding personalities.
F. Labor organizations
Discusses, where necessary, the recent historical events
important in shaping the current forms and attitudes of
organized labor.
i.. ATTTAI. 85
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
1. National centers and principal unions
Lists the national confederations or centers of labor
and major unions, showing their basis of organization
(industry, craft, or combination), membership, structure,
and financial support, and explaining the nature and
extent of government controls over labor organizations.
2. Policies and political and international ties
Discusses union policies and activities, both with re-
spect to labor interests and political issues, and the ef-
fectiveness of union activities. Evaluates centers and
labor unions as to their fundamental agreement or dis-
agreement with the social and political system, their
political role, the extent of Communist control, and
attitudes toward neutralism and international confedera-
tions. Considers the part of organized labor in national
policymaking, along with labor union attitudes toward
the government's policies relative to labor interests, in-
cluding such fields as increased productivity, wages and
prices, hours of work, education and training, national
defense, and foreign workers, investors, and trade. Com-
ments on the information media of the centers and
unions.
3. Leadership
Evaluates the caliber of labor leadership. Considers
labor leaders as a group, and as appropriate those most
influential, with respect to social, educational, and work
background, union training, type of election, power posi-
tion, authority, and responsiveness to the views of rank-
and-file workers.
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
G. Labor-management relations
1. Characteristics
Discusses the salient features of employer-employee
relations (paternalistic, cooperative, antagonistic, or
other), noting recognized rights and obligations of em-
ployers and employees and the most frequent causes of
friction.
2. Collective bargaining
Includes legal provisions for collective bargaining and
collective agreements, the levels (industry or plant, na-
tional or local, or whole economy) and procedures of
such bargaining and agreements, and the extent to which
employees are covered. Notes the usual duration of
collective agreements and the subjects most frequently
covered.
3. Industrial disputes
Discusses industrial disputes and methods of handling
them and strikes and lockouts. Provides statistical data
on such disputes, including the number of workers in-
volved and man-hours lost, the number settled by arbitra-
tion and other procedures, and the number ending in
strikes and lockouts. Notes a few of the most important
and of the most typical recent industrial disputes.
H. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 45. Health and Sanitation
A. General
This subsection provides an introduction to the more
specific discussion which follows. In so doing, it touches
upon such elements as the following: standards of liv-
ing, social problems, and literacy level; the role of the
government, the armed forces, and private enterprise;
adequacy of medical personnel and treatment facilities;
birth and death rates, and average life expectancy; major
health hazards and problems, major epidemiological fac-
tors, and the availability and reliability of health data;
and recent progress (including levels of governmental ex-
penditures), current programs, and trends in improving
the health of the people. Mentions the extent of ex-
ternal aid, including that of the United Nations, in pub-
lic health work. In general, provides political, sociologi-
cal, and economic background for an evaluative overview
of public health.
B. Environmental health factors
1. Topography and climate
Describes the major effects of terrain on health and
sanitation and discusses any unusual conditions which
restrict medical operations, both civilian and military.
Describes the principal climatic features, particularly
those related to health and sanitation, epidemiology
and medical operations.
2. Socioeconomic features
a. DEMOGRAPHY - Considers such matters as total
population, growth rate, and distribution of population.
Discusses the status of birth control. Gives the number
and size of ethnic groups. Discusses large-scale move-
ments of people-nomadic, job-seeking, religious, etc.-
and the effect of such movements on public health.
86
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
b. LIVING CONDITIONS - Describes living conditions,
with a comparison of the urban and rural. Assesses the
impact on health of conditions such as overcrowded
housing, vermin-prone housing, living with animals, and
the common use of eating and drinking utensils. Com-
ments on socioeconomic features of sufficient magnitude
to affect the general health pattern.
c. NUTRITION - Discusses the overall capabilities of
the country to feed its people. Appraises the dietary
level (average daily per capita caloric intake). Indicates
the types of foods consumed and any serious deficiencies,
together with associated diseases. Discusses briefly the
availability and distribution of food, noting such aspects
as imbalances, rationing, food imports, and general or
regional malnutrition. Gives an appraisal of sanitation
in food markets, dairies, and slaughterhouses, noting also
the availability of refrigeration and typical methods of
transporting foods to market. Notes the presence or
absence of veterinary inspections and the adequacy of
such inspections. Evaluates the adequacy of food stor-
age facilities, and indicates the prevalence of tainted
foods.
d. CUSTOMS AND RELIGION - Comments on customs
and other factors bearing on the level of public health,
including information on caste and minority group dis-
criminations, superstitions, and unusual health practices.
Describes the religious pattern of the population and its
effect, if any, on health programs. Notes religious ob-
jections of postmortems, surgery, blood collection and
transfusion, destruction of animal vectors of disease, diet
restrictions, etc.
e. ADDICTIONS - Notes the more commonly found
addictions and describes briefly the legality, prevalence,
and seriousness of addiction to drugs or alcohol.
3. Sanitary engineering
a. WATER SUPPLY - Includes the types of sources,
treatment, and distribution systems. Discusses potability
and consumer supply. Notes the quality of raw water
supplies, excessive salinity, and seasonal or regional
shortages. Indicates present programs and realistic fu-
ture improvement programs for water supply, treatment,
and storage.
b. WASTE DISPOSAL - Describes both sanitary and
dry waste disposal practices in urban and rural areas
and the physical conditions of sewerage systems and
treatment plants. Discusses the effectiveness of the dis-
posal systems in terms of possible health hazards. Indi-
cates whether or not it is a practice to use night soil
as fertilizer.
C. POLLUTION PROBLEMS - Briefly discusses indus-
trial toxicities, air pollution, and water pollution prob-
lems, contributing factors, and their overall impact on
the health level of the country. Indicates any correc-
tive programs being undertaken.
4. Fauna of medical importance
Lists, with comment as necessary, vectors, hosts, and
reservoirs involved in disease transmission, the diseases
transmitted, the geographic area of the country involved,
seasonal occurrence, control programs, and acquired re-
sistance to insecticides, rodenticides, and other control
agents. Lists medically important poisonous centipedes,
scorpions, and spiders; invertebrates such as leeches, mol-
lusks, coelenterates, echinoderms, crustaceans, caterpil-
lars, and insects; and poisonous fish and reptiles.
5. Flora of medical importance
Provides a representative list of common plants that
are of medical or potential military importance, includ-
ing poisonous or allergenic plants and edible plants not
common to the United States.
C. Epidemiology
1. General
Discusses diseases of man or animals endemic in the
area or epidemic in predictable cycle; the morbidity and
mortality of each disease are expressed in numbers of
cases per given time period and with geographic distribu-
tion. Discusses the environmental factors principally re-
sponsible for or contributing to each disease.
2. Diseases of military importance
Discusses, from a medical intelligence viewpoint, the
communicable diseases of man and animals, particularly
those diseases which are most likely to impose nonbattle
casualties on U.S. forces. Considers those diseases which
by their incidence in the indigenous population might
engender a high patient load on medical facilities under
military or civil affairs supervision and which might be-
come epidemic or increase in incidence should local con-
trol measures break down.
D. Public health services
1. Organization and administration
Discusses the organization of the public health service
at its various levels and the functions of its components.
Indicates its subordination within the ministerial struc-
ture and its coordination and liaison with other govern-
mental agencies. Provides a brief description of the
manner in which the public health service operates and a
summary evaluation of its capabilities, strengths, and
weaknesses. Describes the administration in terms of its
delineation of authority and responsibility and evaluates
the effectiveness of its utilization of money, manpower,
and facilities. Considers the caliber of administrators in
terms of professional qualifications and the influence of
professional versus political considerations. Discusses the
cooperative relationships of public health administrators
with other agencies, both national and international.
Discusses the trends of budget allocations for various
functions.
87
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
2. Programs
Describes briefly the principal public health programs,
the extent and application of international assistance, and
the coordination of such programs. Mentions public
health programs in which neighboring countries jointly
participate.
3. Public health laws
Discusses the presence and application of laws related
to the inspection, standards, and quality control of-foods
and drugs; imported drugs and other medical materiel;
disease prevention, control, and quarantine procedures
(human and animal); standards for water, sewage, food
handlers, restaurants, food markets, and food producers;
narcotics and poisons; and industrial hygiene. By citing
significant examples, indicates whether or not public
health legislation is adequate to protect the health of the
citizens. Indicates how conscientiously the laws are
enforced.
4. Social services
Describes national programs for providing medical,
hospital, or surgical care and workmen's compensation.
Describes indigenous health and medical plans, such as
Blue Cross and Blue Shield, operated by religious groups,
labor unions, etc., indicating the extent of governmental
supervision or coordination. Describes government pro-
grams to provide home nursing, institutional medical
care, monetary aid, retraining, psychiatric care, or pros-
thetic appliances for the indigent, aged, infirm, or men-
tally incompetent.
5. Emergency medical services
Discusses the services available for the relief of such
disasters as earthquakes and floods, indicating the plan-
ning for such services and the relative frequency of such
phenomena. So far as recent examples are available,
discusses the effectiveness of emergency medical services.
Briefly describes the civil defense organization, with
emphasis on medical functions. Includes information
on doctrine and concept of operations during peace-
time and wartime. Assesses the capability of the or-
ganization to cope with emergency disasters in terms of
the organization itself, resources, manpower, funds, ma-
teriel and facilities, training, and plans. Describes
medical training programs for civil defense personnel.
Describes the plans and concepts for the evacuation
and treatment of mass casualties, including responsibili-
ties of other government or private agencies.
6. Capabilities
Evaluates capability of public health services to ac-
complish their missions in peace and war.
E. Military medical services
1. Organization and administration
Discusses the position of the military and paramilitary
medical services within the national armed forces struc-
ture, and relationship to area commands and field
(tactical) medical services. Identifies major staff see-
tions and elements, including headquarters and major
activities immediately subordinate to the headquarters.
Gives a brief description of the administration of the
army, navy, air force, and paramilitary medical services
at the national level. Comments on the responsibilities
and internal functions of the various medical activities,
units, and staffs; their external relationships with other
national level military, government, and private agencies;
and administrative strengths and weaknesses.
2. Policies and programs applied to military medicine
Briefly relates the overall policy and doctrine upon
which the medical services operate, including peacetime
and wartime concepts and attitudes toward emergency
medical treatment and hospital or dispensary inpatient
and outpatient care of military personnel, dependents,
and retired or disabled personnel; preventive medicine;
research and development; dental care; personal hygiene;
and camp, post, and field sanitation. Describes briefly
any specfic health programs conducted or supported by
military medical services that are sponsored by the public
health service, international organizations, or foreign or-
ganizations. Gives the scope and nature of military
medical support of these programs.
3. Standards of physical fitness
Covers briefly the physical and psychiatric standards
of fitness for induction, exemption, deferment, and dis-
charge from military service; classification systems and
their application; acceptance rates and statistical data on
causative factors of rejection and discharge; examination
and testing materials, including applicable regulations;
levels at which examinations are given; quality of exami-
nations; and physical disability retirement criteria.
4. Logistics
Discusses the medical logistics of the armed forces.
Describes the overall administration of medical logistics,
including establishment of requirements, procurement
procedures and responsibilities, accounting procedures,
requisitioning and distribution procedures, and trans-
portation. Provides information on stockpiling, and
supply levels maintained in depots and medical opera-
tional units, including peacetime and wartime pro-
gramed levels. If medical units have a combat or
emergency basic load of medical materiel, gives days of
supply, and general nature of supplies in this basic load.
Describes materiel maintenance capability. Briefly states
the casualty evacuation concept and doctrine for ground,
naval, and air forces. In terms of the evacuation re-
sources and concepts, assesses the capability of the medi-
cal service to accomplish its evacuation mission.
5. Capabilities
Evaluates the capability of the military medical service
to accomplish its mission in peace and war.
88 -
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
F. Medical facilities
1. Hospitals
Describes the adequacy of civilian and military medi-
cal facilities in terms of condition, number, and distribu-
tion. Lists all military hospitals, and selected govern-
ment and private hospitals, specifying location and name;
bed type and capacity; source and type of utility services;
and clinical and supporting services in terms of the
various departments representing medical specialties,
laboratories, clinics, blood banks, etc. So far as is possi-
ble, evaluates the adequacy of hospitals with respect to
treatment of U.S. official personnel, both military and
civilian.
2. Medical laboratories
Lists and briefly assesses the capabilities of those
medical research laboratories and of public health lab-
oratories whose primary function is to provide services
such as health surveys, disease and vector control pro-
grams, specific diagnostic support to organizations or
areas, industrial safety programs, food and drug analysis
and testing, and sanitation and hygiene control.
3. Blood banks
Discusses the capability of the country to provide for
its whole blood, plasma, plasma extender, and blood
products requirements. Lists major blood banks; gives
the average stock level maintained, as number and size
of units or days of supply, for the type of products
stored. Gives cubic feet of refrigerated storage area.
Discusses donor sources and criteria for acceptance of
donors, use of mobile collection units, organizations con-
trolling or administering the bank, and affiliation with
other national or international blood banks or organi-
zations.
G. Medical personnel and training
1. Personnel
Describes the quality and numbers of civilian medical
and paramedical personnel by specialty, i.e., physicians,
dentists, veterinarians, allied scientists, nurses, and medi-
cal technicians. Gives the ratio of physicians to the
general population. Comments upon any major short-
ages or excesses of particular medical specialities, and
includes information on their distribution (urban vs.
rural). Indicates the status of medical personnel in
comparison with other professions in the country. Lists
professional medical, dental and paramedical societies.
Describes the quality and numbers of military medical
and paramedical personnel. Includes information on
procurement; terms of service expressed as obligatory
active and reserve duty; and rank, pay, or promotion
incentives. If military physicians are authorized private
practice, states limiting factors and impact on military
duties.
2. Training
Describes the capability of the country to provide ap-
propriate medical and paramedical undergraduate train-
ing in terms of quality of instruction and curriculum,
and prerequisites and selection criteria such as competi-
tive examinations, undergraduate grades, and political
reliability. Assesses the capability of the medical schools
to provide sufficient numbers of qualified medical per-
sonnel. Gives general information on the quality of in-
struction and training facilities. If a sizable portion
of the medical community is foreign trained, gives the
countries where they were trained. Briefly describes
licensing procedures and requirements for the medical
and paramedical specialties. Describes the facilities and
training programs of the armed forces. Gives name,
location, type of training, length of course, training ob-
jectives, and average number of graduating students (by
medical specialty) per year for the various military
medical training facilities. Gives prerequisites for the
military training courses conducted for physicians, den-
tists, veterinarians, nurses, allied science personnel, and
medical technicians.
H. Medical materiel
1. Production capability
Describes to what degree the country's industry is
capable of fulfilling the domestic demand for specific
categories of medical materiel. Indicates whether the
country is basically an importer or exporter of medical
materiel. Identifies standards of quality in relation to
a pharmacopeia or other official standard. When the
quality of a product differs significantly from the quality
of a similar U.S. product or when there is known or
suspected danger associated with the use of a product,
comments briefly.
2. Stockpiles
Describes stockpiling of specific categories of medical
materiel in terms of days of supply or number of units.
Includes information on the name and location of major
depots or other storage areas, type of products stored in
these facilities, and the system of maintenance of in-
ventory turnover. Points out the earmarking of stock-
piles for specific consumers such as armed forces, civil
defense, public health service, or Red Cross.
1. Research and development
1. Civilian
Briefly summarizes the country's overall capability for
medical research in terms of quality and quantity of
medical researchers, adequacy of funds, condition and
number of facilities, types of research emphasized, and
outstanding contributions being made to medical science.
Indicates the source of research funds and participation
in international research conferences or programs.
When applicable, indicates research being conducted
under U.S. contracts (government and private), includ-
ing the name of the research facility and type of research.
Gives the name of the facility and identifies research
projects conducted in cooperation with foreign countries.
89
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
2. Military
Summarizes the status of applied military medical
research (army, naval, aerospace) by briefly describing
the emphasis in terms of major projects recently com-
pleted, underway, and planned; quality and quantity of
medical researchers and research facilities; number and
type of research projects conducted by civilian institu-
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
tions under military contract; outstanding accomplish-
ments or technological breakthroughs; field testing of
new developments; and the overall attitude of military
medical personnel toward in-service research.
J. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 46. Welfare
A. General
This subsection provides an approach to the material
contained in the remainder of the section. It contains
a brief statement of the level of well-being of the popu-
lation. Deals also with the attitudes of the people
toward governmental or private responsibility for im-
proving the general welfare and toward various needy
and dependent segments of the population, along with
the dominant ideals motivating welfare activities. Notes
the traditional concept of the government concerning its
responsibilities in the field of public welfare and indi-
cates trends.
B. Levels of living and social problems
1. Levels of living
Describes the general material welfare of the popula-
tion as reflected by adequacy of diet, clothing, housing
(including electrification, plumbing, and heating), health,
education, and recreation, and compares it with that of
the people of selected other countries, including the
United States. Discusses major class or regional varia-
tions in material welfare. Explores the questions: Are
standards of living and cultural opportunities well de-
fined for different social classes and are the differences
a source of resentment? Discusses important related
social tensions.
2. Social problems
Comments on the types and incidence of crime as
indicators of social problems. Notes the extent of slums,
alcoholism, juvenile delinquency, prostitution, traffic in
women and children, the use of narcotics, begging,
vagabondage, and other adverse conditions recognized
in Western societies as social problems. In relation to
these problems, examines such causal factors as war,
technological innovations, or cultural or social changes.
Discusses those social situations which the society itself
regards as threats to its values or as having significant
adverse effects upon the general welfare, or as making
the society vulnerable to subversive influences.
C. Welfare services
1. Public welfare
a. SOCIAL INSURANCE --Where pertinent, describes
the social security laws and the extent of their operation,
including unemployment and other social insurance, old-
age and invalidity pensions, and other forms of social
security. Describes the origin and development of these
laws and the effectiveness of their operation. Discusses
the financial support of the program.
b. PUBLIC ASSISTANCE -- For those countries having
a public assistance service, notes its origin, development,
and present scope, and describes the government agency
charged with administrative responsibility for it, its place
in the structure of government, and its financial support.
Includes the government program for provision of aid
which may not be included under social insurance, such
as maternity aid, child welfare services, aid to the aged
and physically and mentally handicapped, and provisions
for emergency relief.
2. Private welfare
Identifies and discusses important private groups en-
gaged in social welfare work. Gives information on each
group concerning its objectives, its source of support,
the type of personnel directing its activities, and the
public attitude towards its services. Indicates the nature
of the work carried on and the location of each organi-
zation's major endeavors.
Shows, for a society in which social welfare has not
been organized or is only partly provided through or-
ganized agencies, how those in need of help receive care.
D. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
POLITICAL
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex and highly developed country or
NIS Area. For smaller or developing nations, however, certain
modifications in balance or coverage may be desirable. The Out-
line Guide should be used flexibly and adapted to assure adequate
treatment of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Area. In
preparation and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial Instructions
should be followed in detail.
Section 54 --- Public Order and Safety
Section 56 - Intelligence and Security
Section 57 - Subversion and Insurgency
(or Subversion)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 56. Intelligence and Security
A. General
This subsection provides background information
which will serve as a framework for the details in the
remainder of the section. It describes, with the aid of
charts if appropriate, the national structure of civilian
and military organizations concerned with internal se-
curity and the procurement of intelligence on other
countries, and discusses their background and develop-
ment, demarcations of foreign and domestic responsibil-
ity, political aspects, and professional standards. By
way of background, presents enough of the past to con-
vey a clear understanding of the present services. As
part of the explanation of general intelligence and se-
curity structure, discusses the mandates, legal powers,
and/or de facto responsibilities of the services. Discus-
sion of political aspects above indicates how the services
of intelligence and security have been shaped or affected
by the international position and subvetsive situation of
the country (as set forth in SECTION 57) ; the discussion
also evaluates the relationship of the intelligence and
security services to the government and the attitude of
the populace toward them. Refers, if appropriate, to
responsibility for censorship of public communications
and publications. Discusses professional standards in
terms of integrity, efficiency, security, and morale and
disciplinary methods. The discussion of standards in-
cludes the extent to which they are met and the general
effectiveness of the services. Primary treatment of police
organizations mainly concerned with public order and
safety is reserved for SECTION 54.
B. Services of intelligence and security
This subsection provides information about the na-
tional services of intelligence and security, both civilian
and military, in appropriate detail. Discusses their mis-
sions, functions, organization, effectiveness, administra-
tive practices, methods of operation, and relationships
with other services. Explains the specific functions of
each service, and, so far as possible, indicates the relative
order of significance of these functions. Explains the
internal structure of each service, together with the re-
sponsibilities of its subordinate units. Descriptions of
complex organizations are supplemented by charts. Ex-
plains administrative practices in terms of the selection
and training of staff personnel, budgets and appropria-
tions, salaries, and records and files. Analyzes the security
practices of each service, both with respect to physi-
cal security (classification, guarding, and control of clas-
sified documents, etc.) and security of personnel (clear-
ances, indoctrination, security consciousness, etc.). As
elements of methods of operation, discusses practices re-
garding agents, as well as techniques, available technical
facilities, and devices for security control of the popula-
tion. Describes the relationships of each national service
with the other national services and with foreign (non-
U.S.) services.
C. Key officials
This subsection presents concisely the background of
key personalities of the agencies previously discussed.
The approach is selective, with emphasis upon those ele-
ments of personal history that have specific bearing upon
professional capabilities and characteristics.
D. Comments on principal sources
This subsection is designed to aid in the evaluation
of text material. Any portions of the text derived from
covert information not originally produced by the con-
tributing agency are so indicated. Within the text, ma-
terial originally acquired by the contributing agency
and less than generally reliable is appropriately labeled.
This subsection indicates, accordingly, that the material
not thus qualified in the text is considered generally
reliable. If overt materials have been used to any great
extent in the section, this fact is stated. A bibliography
of such sources may be included.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 57. Subversion and Insurgency
(This Outline Guide is planned for the treatment of subversive and insurgent
activities in non-Communist countries in underdeveloped areas. For describing
subversion in more developed non-Communist as well as Communist countries,
the Outline Guide for SECTION 57, Subversion, is more appropriate.)
A. General
In broad terms, assesses the subversive or insurgent
threat to the nation, mentioning the primary sources of
popular discontent and noting in particular those geo-
graphic, political, social, and economic factors that favor
the rise of dissidence or insurgency. Briefly identifies
principal subversive forces, Communist and other, in-
dicates their relative importance, and assesses their po-
tential for insurgency and their capability to undermine
the strength of the national government.
B. Basic vulnerabilities and strengths
Discusses and evaluates briefly the nation's vulner-
abilities and strengths; the discussion, dealing with the
topics shown below, confines itself to the factors that
bear on insurgency and subversion.
Discusses geographic factors in terms of location, ter-
rain, compartmentation, isolated areas, and proximity
to Communist and other powers.
Discusses social aspects in terms of degree of racial,
linguistic, religious, and cultural unity or cohesiveness;
stability of social system, including degree of social
mobility; adequacy of educational, legal, and civil service
systems; and problems of overpopulation and minorities.
Discusses the political system, including leaders, par-
ties, and degree of political maturity; extent of corrup-
tion in politics and government; and the strength and
effectiveness of governmental structure, central and local.
Describes briefly the degree of development and in-
dustrialization; distribution of wealth, land, and re-
sources; capabilities of transport and communications
systems; value and source of foreign trade and invest-
ment; and the type and condition of labor force, in-
cluding extent of unemployment and underemployment.
Gives strengths and characterizes the role and ca-
pabilities of the security forces, including military, para-
military, intelligence, and police, with special attention
to internal defense matters, relations with populace, and
morale.
Where relevant, describes foreign policy objectives,
alliances, enmities, or other significant foreign relation-
ships.
C. Primary active discontents
Delineates, in terms of degree, depth, and methods of
expression, any important and active antagonisms grow-
ing out of the general situations previously discussed.
Notes significant expression of these antagonisms and
discontents in terms of popular attitudes toward the
government, potential for exploitation by Communist or
other subversive movements, and attitudes toward the
United States as well as its allies. Briefly assesses, if
possible, the popular will to revolt and describes its
traditional pattern and existing manifestations.
D. Communist-inspired subversion
Discusses the status and activity of the country's Com-
munist Party, including history, relative strength and
influence, size and organization, extent of foreign control
and assistance, aims and objectives, character of member-
ship and leadership, finances, recruitment, training, and
communications. Lists significant subversive tactics and
methods, in particular in fields of propaganda, sabotage,
espionage, and infiltration. Assesses not only the mili-
tary, paramilitary, and resistance capabilities of the Com-
munist Party but also its effectiveness in carrying out
its programs to date. Notes significant Communist
fronts as well as foreign Communist activities within
the nation.
E. Non-Communist subversive groups
Similarly treats non-Communist subversive groups, do-
mestic and foreign-sponsored, giving background, ac-
tivities, and potential effectiveness.
F. Stabilizing factors
Outlines and evaluates the government's countersub-
versive and any counterinsurgency policies and activities,
including important laws (and enforcement thereof) as
well as positive programs to gain popular support for
government and to eliminate causes of discontent. Also
notes extent, background, and sources of nongovern-
mental countersubversive activities and organizations;
identifies important popular movements with potential
for countersubversive activity.
G. Key personalities
Lists key personalities, with background data when
available.
H. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 57. Subversion
(This Outline Guide is planned for the treatment of subversive activity in the
more developed non-Communist countries and (with suitable modifications) in
Communist countries. For treatment of subversive and insurgent activities in
non-Communist countries in underdeveloped areas, the Outline Guide for SEcruoN
57, Subversion and Insurgency, is more appropriate.)
A. General
This subsection provides a broad presentation of back-
ground material pertaining to current subversion. De-
scribes the principal subversive forces and trends, and
also sources of discontent and dissidence. Whenever
possible, this subsection concludes with an estimate of
the overall potential for insurgency and subversion.
B. Vulnerability and strengths respecting sub-
version
Discusses the underlying social, political, diplomatic,
religious, cultural, and economic factors affecting the
country's susceptibility or resistance to discontent, in-
surgency, and subversion. Relates bothi vulnerabilities
and strengths to the social structure, cultural values, so-
cial and political institutions, and economic conditions.
Gives particular attention to manifestation of social dis-
unity and the breakdown of traditional cultural patterns
and social values.
Describes counterinsurgency factors, such as basic tra-
ditions making for stability, governmental efforts toward
easing discontents, and the effectiveness of the govern-
ment's security forces for the suppression of uprisings.
Discusses government policy with respect to subversive
and insurgent activities, including constitutional, legisla-
tive, and administrative measures designed to contain
and control subversion and insurgency. Treats also the
policies and attitudes of the country's political leadership
toward the government controls.
C. Communist subversive groups and activities
This subsection discusses Communist and Communist-
front activities and includes, where appropriate, those of
Communist diplomatic, trade, cultural, or news media
representatives. Mentions each organization or group
of importance, with information as to any military or
paramilitary potential it may possess. Discusses. the size,
strength, character of membership, location, and tech-
niques of recruitment of these organizations; their af-
filiated national and international organizations, key
leaders, funds, aims; their methods of operation (both
overt and covert), propaganda policies and techniques,
and utilization for the purpose of espionage and sabotage
or as a cover for paramilitary activities. Discusses the
strength or weakness of Communist influence within the
groups, relations to non-Communist movements, internal
differences or rivalries among the leadership, influence
in national or local affairs, and ability to affect U.S.
interests. When feasible, such information is presented
in tabular form.
Provides information on significant antecedent develop-
ments, the covert apparatus, and the relationship of these
organizations and groups to Communist and Communist-
influenced organizations outside the country. Notes the
extent and manner in which subversive activities are
supported by economic, political, military, and other
action. Considers plans or potentialities for sabotage
under wartime conditions, including infiltration of civil
defense organizations. The discussion throughout in-
dicates the extent to which Communists have succeeded
in infiltrating the economic, social, political, military, and
cultural life of the country and have gained control over
key positions in government, the armed forces, commerce,
industry, transportation, and communications. When-
ever possible, the reasons for failure or success are ex-
plained.
D. Other discontent, insurgency, subversion
1. Non-Communist subversive groups and activities
This subsection provides details on all non-Communist
groups that threaten to overturn the existing order by
extralegal means, including any underground, guerrilla, or
resistance movements. For each group, it provides de-
tailed information on the origin and history, political
doctrine, aims and tactics, size, strength, and character
of membership, organization, key leaders, location, fi-
nancing, methods of operation, propaganda policies and
techniques, affiliations with other national and inter-
national organizations, and clandestine activities. Re-
lates the aims of these groups to U.S. interests in the
country. The subsection assesses the insurgency or sub-
versive potential of each group. Notes the relationship
of such movements to each other or to the Communists,
low
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
including Communist cooperation, support, or opposi-
tion. The subsection also includes the subversive ac-
tivities of representatives of non-Communist countries
directed against the country, if the country is not under
Communist control. Gives special attention to any or-
ganized resistance to military service, with statistics on
evasion cases, if available.
2. Potential subversive groups and activities
Identifies and discusses all groups with any potential
for discontent and for insurgency and subversion, as well
as those which lend themselves to insurgency or ex-
ploitation by subversive groups, including the rural sec-
tor, the labor front, student and youth organizations, the
intelligentsia, educational systems, internal communica-
tions and informational media, the military and police,
the bureaucracy, middle-class elites, and political group-
ings, whether legal or underground.
E. Personalities
This subsection points out and discusses as concisely
as possible the key leaders identified in Subsections C
and D, including those persons who influence or control
the insurgent or subversive forces within the country.
Emphasizes their attitude toward U.S. interests and
communism as well as their capability of being enlisted
for idealistic causes (peace movements, neutrality, social
welfare, etc.). States the extent of their popular back-
ing, and in the case of military leaders, indicates the
extent of their personal popularity, particularly with
respect to the forces under their command and the way
such forces might be used in the event of attempts to
overthrow the government. The personalities
grouped as follows: Communists, non-Communists,
potential Communists.
F. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
are
and
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
ECONOMIC
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex and highly developed country or
NIS Area. For smaller or developing nations, however, certain
modifications in.balance or coverage may be desirable. The Out-
line Guide should be used flexibly and adapted to assure adequate
treatment of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Area. In
preparation and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial Instructions
should be followed in detail.
Section 61 - Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
Section 62F - Fuels
Section 62P - Electric Power
Section 63 - Minerals and Metals
Section 64 - Manufacturing and Construction
Section 65 - Trade and Finance
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 61. Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
A. General
Gives a concise appraisal of the agricultural sector of
the economy. Defines the position of agriculture, in-
cluding primary processing, in terms of its contribution
to national income, as a field of capital investment, and
as a source of employment. Discusses briefly recent
developments or major trends in landownership and
land use with particular reference to production pat-
terns and techniques.
Indicates the degree of the country's self-sufficiency in
food, feed, and industrial crops, and discusses briefly the
country's position as a market for and an international
supplier of agricultural commodities, including processed
products.
Summarizes current governmental policies with re-
spect to ownership and utilization of land, agricultural
production, and prices, as well as in relation to interna-
tional controls and agreements that bear upon produc-
tion, international prices, and allocation of markets.
Indicates the relative importance of the fishing indus-
try in the national economy, and briefly describes the
organization of the industry and the manner in which
it is protected and regulated by the government.
Discusses in broad terms the position of the forest
industry in the national economy, with an indication of
the extent and distribution of forest resources. Sum-
marizes recent developments in the exploitation of re-
sources and in government policies relating to the con-
servation and national utilization of forest resources and
to primary processing activity, and discusses the coun-
try's dependence upon foreign markets and sources of
supply.
B. Agriculture
1. General aspects
Briefly indicates the general extent and nature of agri-
culture, including the relative importance of the different
types of farming such as self-sufficiency, commercial,
state or collective, cooperative, quasi-feudal, and pater-
nalistic. Mentions any social and cultural attitudes which
have a direct and significant effect on agricultural pro-
duction and practices or on consumption. Notes the
extent of regional and crop specialization versus mixed
farming.
2. Physical features
Indicates the suitability of the country for agriculture
in terms of terrain, soil fertility, and climate (tempera-
ture and precipitation). (Correlation with SECrzoNS 23
and 24, where weather, climate, and topography are
treated from the standpoint of military operations.)
Describes the principal agricultural regions.
3. Land use
Covers the approximate amount and percentage of the
land area that is in agricultural use; the relation of
physical features to the pattern and possibilities of land
use; the uses of arable land (crop, orchard, and rotation
pasture and meadowland) and its distribution among the
major agricultural pursuits.
4. Size of farm holdings, tenure, and labor
Gives an overall statement in regard to landownership
and size of operating units and farm properties. Dis-
cussers prevailing systems of tenure and the distribution
of the farm labor force between owner-operators, tenants,
and hired labor. Indicates types of labor contracts and
the extent of unemployment or underemployment of farm
labor.
5. Production practices, equipment, and supplies
Covers production practices and techniques with refer-
ence to intensity of farming, multiple cropping and inter-
cropping, crop rotation, control of plant diseases and
parasites, use of seed, farm machinery and equipment,
draft animals, and fertilizers. Indicates the nature and
need for clearing, irrigation, draining, and terracing. In-
cludes quantitative data on principal types of farm
machinery used. Indicates use and feasibility of tractors
and combines and other power equipment. As data per-
mit, the degree of self-sufficiency and foreign trade in
regard to farm machinery, chemical fertilizers, seed, in-
secticides, and fungicides is discussed. Cross-reference
is made to SECriON 64 subsections on industrial ma-
chinery and equipment, vehicles, and chemical fertil-
izers if these subsections contain additional information
on sources of agricultural supplies.
6. Production and trade
Summarizes briefly total crop and livestock production
and supply, indicating the relative importance of prod-
ucts or product groups to the economy and dependence
on external trade for supply. Accompanies this sum-
mary with a production and net trade summary for a
representative period or year, showing amount available
for domestic consumption.
a. MAJOR cI oPS - Discusses the following for each
of the major food, feed, and industrial crops: compara-
tive importance in the agricultural economy, area under
101
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
cultivation and geographical location, total output, yields,
imports and/or exports, domestic consumption, planting
and harvesting dates, diseases, and insect pests. Gives
broad indication of the manner in which crops move
within the country from land or storage facilities to
processing centers and consumption areas, or to export
ports. Rice milling on farms and other on-farm process-
ing for household use are discussed in detail here, cross-
reference being made to SECTION 64, Subsection L, for all
other agricultural processing industries, including com-
mercial wheat and rice milling. Farm and commercial
storage and drying facilities are discussed.
As much of the material as possible is presented in
tabular form or on maps.
b. LIVESTOCK AND LIVESTOCK PRODUCTS - Discusses
numbers, products, and, if feasible, breeds, animal dis-
eases, and parasites. If appropriate, the geographical
location and carrying capacity of grazing areas are in-
dicated; discusses the scale of individual enterprises and
production methods. The supply of livestock feed and
feeding practices in both meat and dairy products are
discussed briefly.
Notes production of and trade in livestock products,
including movements of livestock and products to proc-
essing plants or the consumption markets and export
ports. As appropriate, cross-reference is made to SEC-
TION 64, Subsections L and M, for the commercial proc-
essing of livestock products. Tables, charts, and maps
are used wherever possible.
C. MARKETING AND TRANSPORTATION -Evaluates the
adequacy of transportation and markets for agricultural
products and the effect on agriculture. Marketing and
transportation facilities needed for further development
of agricultural resources are indicated.
d. INTERNATIONAL TRADE IN AGRICULTURAL PROD-
UCTS - Covers briefly agriculture's contribution to total
export and import trade and the composition of agricul-
tural trade. The major foreign markets and sources of
imports and the nature of trade arrangements in agricul-
tural products are indicated.
7. Agricultural organizations, institutions, and policies
a. AGRICULTURAL ORGANIZATIONS --- Discusses farm
operators' and workers' associations, specialized pro-
ducers' organizations, cooperatives, and the organization
and functions of the Ministry of Agriculture and other
government agencies assisting agriculture.
b. GOVERNMENT POLICIES - Covers such elements
of trade and market policy as price and production
controls and guarantees, protection, and subsidies. Land
reform and/or development programs including foreign
aid programs, if any, are discussed, cross-reference being
made to preceding subheadings as appropriate.
c. FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND SERVICES - Deals
with sources and availability of agricultural credit, the
burden of taxation, and crop and property insurance.
The level and pattern, types, need, and sources of agri-
cultural investment are indicated.
d. EDUCATION, RESEARCH, AND EXTENSION - Indicates
the general level of literacy and education of the farm
population. The extent of agricultural education and of
agricultural extension and research activities is discussed
briefly (correlation with SECTION 43, Subsection B, Edu-
cation). :Briefly indicates the adequacy of professional
and technical services such as veterinary science, horti-
culture, agricultural engineering, and agronomy.
8. Prospects for expanding production
Discusses the outlook for agricultural production and
productivity in the light of existing and impending pro-
grams. The major factors limiting expansion and the
prospective relationship between agricultural production
and population growth are indicated.
C. Fisheries
Whaling is included throughout this subsection,
wherever it is of importance.
1. Catch of fish and other aquatic products
Covers total annual production, with tabulated data;
seasons of abundance; trends in production, and reasons
for changes.
2. Major fishing areas
Discusses significant aspects, such as accessibility, with
inclusion of appropriate map material.
3. Fishing operations
a. METHODS - Covers types of gear used; advances
in introduction of new techniques; brief reference to
availability of materials for manufacturing netting, rope,
and other equipment, and plant facilities for manufac-
turing gear and other fishing equipment.
b. FISHING vEssELS - Gives types and numbers of
motorized and nonmotorized fishing craft; condition of
fishing fleet; programs for modernization of fleet; pro-
ductive capacity of fleet.
0. PERSONNEL - Indicates number employed full
and part time.
4. Utilization of catch
a. DISTRIBUTION OF CATCH - Covers domestic con-
sumption; amounts marketed fresh, frozen, canned,
salted, dried, smoked, etc.; methods of distribution, with
brief mention of availability of refrigeration and ice-
making facilities.
b. PROCESSING - Discusses types of processed prod-
ucts; location and number of processing installations;
productive capacity of installations; employment; avail-
ability of processing material (cans, salt, etc.).
C. MANUFACTURE OF BYPRODUCTS - Gives types of
byproducts; location and number of plants; productive
capacity of plants; employment. Cross-reference is made
to SECTION 64, Subsection L, to avoid duplication.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
5. Foreign trade in fishery products
6. Ownership and control
Briefly describes concentration or spread of ownership,
including ownership of vessels as well as ownership or
control of related industries and services such as trans-
port, refrigeration, and canning.
7. Government and industry policies
Indicates current regulations for fisheries; international
agreements; programs for expansion; industry organiza-
tion, if any, with policies and programs.
D. Food balance sheet
The food consumption habits of the population are
discussed briefly. A food balance sheet for the area is
included. For all significant food products, summarizes
the data on production, trade, and quantities available
for consumption. Presents, insofar as possible, a concise
picture of the type of products consumed, the proportion
supplied from domestic sources, the dependence upon
outside sources, and the surplus supplies of food products
normally available for export.
E. Forests and forest products
1. The forest resources
Describes the general extent and nature of the forest
resources, indicating the relationship of total and pro-
ductive forest areas to total land area and other classes of
land use. A summary is given of the overall forest situa-
tion, with emphasis on productive potential as compared
with actual forest products output and requirements.
The geographic distribution of forests and their gen-
eral condition and accessibility are discussed. Describes
the major forest types and their principal commercial
timber species.
Analyzes the pattern of forest ownership and the in-
fluence of ownership on forest condition.
Indicates the volume and accessibility of standing
timber by broad categories and appraises the volume dis-
tribution in terms of economic exploitation.
Compares the annual growth and cut of timber and
evaluates any imbalance affecting present and future
self-sufficiency or deficiency in forest products.
2. Primary forest products industries
Treats the establishment, development, and potential
of these industries in relation to their raw material base
and their present position in the national economy.
Describes the individual industries, such as timber
extraction, lumber, plywood and veneer, railroad ties,
pulpwood and woodpulp, fuelwood, other roundwood
products, cork, naval stores, and other nonwood products
such as natural dyes and tannins. Overall industry struc-
ture and location, investment, output, productive ca-
pacity, employment, factors affecting production, power
sources, equipment, production techniques, and trade
associations are discussed.
Cross-reference is made to SECTION 64 for data on
synthetic dyes and for additional data on paper, pulp,
and other wood products, including cork products.
3. Supply position
An analysis is made of the general position of the area
with respect to self-sufficiency or dependency in forest
products and overall wood balances in terms of round-
wood equivalents. Indicates trends and patterns as
concerns consumption of, and requirements for, prin-
cipal wood and nonwood forest products.
Foreign trade in forest products, with emphasis on
products of strategic importance, is examined.
4. Forest policies and programs
Outlines the basic national policies and the principal
laws and regulations affecting forestry, forest industries,
and foreign trade in forest products.
The organization, administration, and efficiency of the
forestry agencies and the status of forestry education are
discussed.
Examines current public, private, and cooperative for-
estry programs, including research.
F. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 62F. Fuels
(For some NIS Areas this material may be combined with that of
SECTION 62P, Electric Power, and published as SECTION 62, Fuels
and Power.)
A. General
Discusses the position of primary energy sources in
the national economy.
Discusses the supply and use patterns of various forms
of energy, including the conversion of coal to coke and
related products, manufactured gas, and petroleum sub-
stitutes. Comments upon the interchangeability of fuels
in terms of the area's requirements and economic activi-
ties. Indicates the country's dependence upon foreign
sources of supply. Relates the country's domestic re-
sources and their development to future requirements.
Included are: 1) a table showing in calorie equivalents
consumption of primary fuels (coal, oil, natural gas,
hydroelectric power) ; 2) a table showing in calorie
equivalents consumption of all fuels by major consumer
classes.
B. Solid fuels
The following outline insofar as applicable is used
for each of the fuels to be discussed. The principal
categories of fuels are treated separately: coal and lig-
nite; peat; fuelwood and charcoal. Discussion of coal
includes the broad aspects of conversion of coal to coke
and related products, manufactured gas, and petroleum
substitutes; this discussion does not approach the depth
of detail and technical aspects contained in the subsec-
tions on petroleum, iron and steel, explosives, chemicals,
and rubber. Appropriate cross-reference is made to
these subsections.
Discusses:
1) Production and consumption trends, and domestic use
pattern.
2) The competitive position of the industry in the world
market and conditions affecting foreign trade and indi-
cates the country's dependence on foreign sources of
supply.
3) The nature, extent, and location of deposits, and factors
affecting exploitation, such as accessibility, capital re-
quirements, and manpower.
4) Government policies with respect to development of re-
serves, exploitation of available deposits, utilization of
foreign capital, and foreign competition.
5) Production in the more important individual mines, in-
dicating factors affecting operations, such as mechaniza-
tion, manpower, transportation, availability of fuel, by-
product operations, etc.
Presents in tabular form: 1) location of mines, grade
and extent of deposits, type of operation, production
capacity, manpower, ownership, remarks on extent of
mechanization; 2) annual production by regions and/or
mines; 3) annual consumption by consumer; 4) imports
and exports by countries; 5) stocks.
C. Petroleum
1. General
Includes a brief resume of the growth of the im-
portant components of the country's petroleum and/or
gas industry. Begins at the point at which petroleum
or gas first became a factor in the nation's economy and
ends with its present status.
2. Supply and requirements
a. SUPPLY AND REQUIREMENTS POSITION
b. FOREIGN TRADE
c. DOMESTIC CONSUMPTION
d. INTERNATIONAL BUNKERS
e. STOCKS
f. DOMESTIC MARKETING
3. Exploration
a. RESERVES
b. PETROLEUM PROSPECTS
C. CONCESSION DATA
d. EXPLORATORY ACTIVITY
4, Production
a. CRUDE OIL OUTPUT
b. FIELD CHARACTERISTICS
C. CRUDE OIL CHARACTERISTICS
d. DEVELOPMENT DRILLING
e. PRODUCING WELLS AND WELL PERFORMANCE
f. DRILLING AND PRODUCTION PRACTICES AND PROB-
LEMS
g. CONSERVATION AND SECONDARY RECOVERY
h. GATHERING, TREATMENT, FIELD STORAGE, AND
POWER FACILITIES
1. TECHNOLOGY, RESEARCH, AND MAINTENANCE
5. Refining and processing
a. CRUDE REFINING
b. NATURAL GAS PROCESSING
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
6. Transportation and storage
a. PIPELINES
b. TANKERS AND BARGES
c. HIGHWAYS
d. RAILROADS
e. TERMINAL FACILITIES
f. STORAGE
7. Equipment and materials
8. Labor, finance, and government policy
a. LABOR
b. FINANCE
c. GOVERNMENT POLICY
9. Natural gas
If not a significant fuel in the Area, natural gas may
be presented in combination with petroleum by adding
"and natural gas," where appropriate, to the petroleum
outline.
a. SUPPLY, CONSUMPTION, AND MARKETING
b. FOREIGN TRADE
c. EXPLORATION
d. PRODUCTION AND GASFIELD DATA
e, PROCESSING
f. TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE
D. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 62P. Electric Power
(For some NIS Areas this material may be combined with that of
SECTION 62F, Fuels, and published as SECTION 62, Fuels and Power.)
A. General
Discusses economic importance of electric power to
the country. Indicates the degree of industrial reliance
on electricity for motive power; the extent to which resi-
dential users are served; the significance of other users;
the areas of concentrated power development and con-
centrated consumption; and the adequacy of the trans-
mission system. Analyzes the position of electric power
among the industries of the country; includes the per-
centage of national income derived from the industry,
the share of national capital assets employed in the
industry, the number of employees and the percentage
share of total industrial employees, and the technological
status of both employees and equipment. Indicates
the significance of imports and exports of electric power
to the country, and describes the reliance of the industry
on foreign sources of fuels and equipment. Summarizes
briefly the vulnerable aspects of the electric power net.
B. Organization of the industry
Describes the organizational structure of the govern-
ment agency or agencies exercising control over the
electric power industry; discusses the nature and effect
of governmental controls. Discusses the extent of gov-
ernment and private ownership of electric powerplants
and transmission and distribution grids. Indicates the
extent and influence of foreign investment.
Discusses the governmental and private organizations
that are concerned with powerplant construction, includ-
ing the manpower and equipment available for such
construction.
C. Generating plant
Discusses overall plant characteristics, including share
of capacity represented by plants of large, medium, and
small capacity categories, and number of plants in each
category; efficiency of operation and maintenance, as
evidenced by equipment replacement, overloading, and
power stoppages; and design and operating character-
istics.
Discusses hydroelectric plant characteristics. De-
scribes common types of plants, by capacity and general
location, and prevalent types of dams, by purpose, de-
sign type, and construction material. Describes the
water resources, including the frequency of low water
periods, adequacy of reservoirs in offsetting seasonal
variations in streamflow, and effects of other water uses
on power generation. Gives prevailing age, condition,
and quality of maintenance of powerhouses; indicates
placement relative to dams. Describes the general types,
age, modernity, condition, and makes of hydroelectric
plant equipment. Includes noteworthy features of in-
dividual hydroelectric plants that are outstanding be-
cause of their design or size.
Discusses thermal-electric plant characteristics. In-
cludes the prevailing capacities of plants in which the
motive power is steam (both conventional and atomic)
and internal combustion (diesel engine, gas turbine,
etc.). Describes the fuel characteristics, including the
extent of use of high and low grade coal, natural gas,
petroleum, other conventional fuels, nuclear energy, geo-
thermal steam, other; indicates availability of fuels from
105
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
domestic sources. Includes the role of thermal plants in
electric power production; indicates the percentage of
capacity used for peak load, base load, and standby.
Describes factors that influenced the location of most
plants. Indicates prevailing age, condition, and quality
of maintenance of powerhouses. Describes general
types, age, condition, modernity, and makes of equipment
used in thermal plants. Includes noteworthy features of
individual thermal-electric plants that are outstanding
because of their design or size.
Tabulates significant generating station statistics, in-
cluding reservoir and dam statistics, where appropriate.
D. Transmission and distribution facilities
Discusses the degree of integration of power facilities,
the total transmission mileage by voltage, the pattern
of powerlines, characteristics of transmission, distribu-
tion, and utilization currents, and the ratio of overhead
wires to underground cables carrying transmission cur-
rent. Gives for individual grids the total connected
capacity, power generating centers, power consumption
centers, current characteristics, substation characteristics,
degree of interconnection within grid systems, and prin-
cipal connections with other grids. Describes inter-
national powerline connections, giving the foreign termi-
nal of each powerline, the amount of power transfer
annually and seasonally, direction of power flow for each
line, and current characteristics of each line. Indicates
the general age, condition, quality, and makes of trans-
mission equipment.
Tabulates significant characteristics of major substa-
tions and transmission lines.
E. Consumption of electric energy
Describes the consumption of electric energy accord-
ing to major classes of users: industrial use of electric
power by type of industry and by region; transportation
use, including the total annual consumption and the
miles of railroad electrified; household use, including
annual total and per capita consumption, and urban and
rural use; agricultural use, including total annual con-
sumption, proportion of farms electrified, and adequacy
of rural power supply. Relates all consumption data to
powerplant ownership (government and private) and
use (public utility, industrial, and combined).
F. Developments
Examines plans and programs for expansion of power
generation and transmission, and for the manufacture
of equipment. Describes plans for: construction, expan-
sion, and rehabilitation of generating plant; construction
of transmission powerlines and substations; modernizing
powerplants, powerlines, and substations; and expanding
electrical equipment manufacture. Assesses the ade-
quacy of plans and programs to meet current and fore-
seeable demand, and the technical and financial capabili-
ties for conducting and completing construction plans
and programs.
G. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 63. Minerals and Metals
A. General
Discusses briefly the position of the Area's mineral
and metal industries in the national and world econo-
mies. Analyzes the relative importance of the industry
in terms of its contribution to the national income, as
an employer of labor, and as an investment area.
Discusses the size of the industry in terms of the
country's requirement and in relation to foreign demand
for the industry's output.
Indicates the salient characteristics of the industry
such as: extent of reserves, locational and transportation
factors; dependence upon foreign sources for supplies
and equipment; productive potential; degree of integra-
tion of the industry; technological aspects of production;
ownership; international agreements; government policies.
In the following subsections, treatment of individual
mineral commodities may be shifted from one major
heading to another in accordance with the accepted use
or handling in the country.
B. Ferrous metals
1. General
2. Iron ore
Discusses production and consumption trends, and
domestic use pattern.
Analyzes the competitive position of the industry in
the world market and conditions affecting foreign trade,
and indicates the country's dependence upon foreign
sources of supply.
Describes in general terms the nature, extent, and
location of deposits, and indicates factors affecting ex-
ploitation, such as accessibility, capital requirements, and
manpower.
106 r,^
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Discusses government policies with respect to de-
velopment of reserves, exploitation of available deposits,
utilization of foreign capital, and foreign competition.
Discusses production in the more important individual
mines. Indicates factors affecting operation of the mines,
such as degree of mechanization, manpower, transporta-
tion, availability of fuel, byproducts, etc.
Tables, maps, and graphics: Gives in tables and, where
practicable, in graphic form, the following: 1) location
of mines, grade and extent of deposits, type of opera-
tion, production capacity, manpower, ownership, remarks
on extent of mechanization; 2) annual production by re-
gions, fields and/or mines; 3) imports and exports by
countries; 4) stocks.
3. Pig iron, steel, and mill products
This subsection includes primary processing.
Discusses briefly productive capacity of the industry
and indicates current output. Examines current produc-
tion patterns. Discusses the ability of the industry to
meet domestic requirements for particular steel products
and the extent of imports. Examines competitive posi-
tion of industry, government policies affecting operation
of industry, efficiency of operations, etc.
Discusses factors affecting production of the industry
as a whole and of major individual plants, such as degree
of mechanization and efficiency of operations with respect
to supply of raw materials, fluxes, fuel, transportation,
manpower, markets, etc.
Lists in tabular form individual plants, giving name,
location, productive capacity, number and type of fur-
naces, number and type of finishing installations, output
by products, operating and beneficial ownership.
Lists in tabular form annual production, consumption
including use pattern, imports and exports by countries
and principal types of products.
Lists in tabular form annual consumption and source
of major raw materials: iron ore, ferroalloys, scrap,
fluxes, and fuels.
4. Ferroalloys
C. Nonferrous metals
Textual analysis and discussion of the various com-
modities are by subsections similar to those indicated
for Subsection B, 2, of this section. Only those materials
of economic or strategic importance are treated. Cover-
age is through smelting, refining, and forming metal into
basic shapes. .
In treating the processing industries, data are given
on annual consumption and use pattern, including scrap.
D. Nonmetallic and industrial minerals
Textual analysis and discussion of the various com-
modities are by subsections similar to those indicated
for Subsection B, 2, of this section. Only those materials
of economic importance are treated. Coverage includes
processing, with the exception of fertilizer raw materials
and sulfur.
In treating the processing facilities, data are also given
on annual consumption, including use pattern.
E. Construction materials
Discusses the position of the country's basic products
which comprise the major materials used in construction,
exclusive of lumber, plywood, structural iron and steel,
and asphalt, which are treated in detail in other economic
sections. This subsection is devoted mainly to cement
and other construction materials such as sand, aggregate,
glass sand, building stone, brick, structural glass, lime,
gypsum, and roofing materials.
Examines the importance in the economy of the in-
dustry producing these materials and indicates its ca-
pacity to meet domestic requirements. Examines the
size of the industry in terms of production, capital in-
vestment, and in relation to markets. Discusses pro-
duction trends, including technological advances. In-
dicates problems confronting the industry with respect
to raw materials and needed fuels, transportation, do-
mestic and foreign competition, government policies,
efficiency of producing facilities, and the like. If a prob-
lem relates specifically to a segment of the industry or
to an individual major plant, this is brought out in the
discussion. (Tables: production and consumption, in-
cluding use patterns where possible, imports and exports
by country of origin or destination, stocks, etc.)
F. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
107
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 64. Manufacturing and Construction
A. General
Reviews the salient features of the country's manufac-
turing and construction industry, including ownership,
degree of integration, government policies, and inter-
national agreements. Discusses the position of the in-
dustry within the country as an employer of manpower,
a sector for investment, and a contributor to national
income. Indicates the degree of dependence of the
industry on foreign sources for raw materials and equip-
ment, components, and finished products. Discusses the
competitive position of the industry in domestic and
foreign markets. Describes the general level of tech-
nological progress, including the degree of dependence
on foreign technicians. Evaluates the capacity of the
manufacturing industry to meet normal requirements
and potential increased demands.
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
Under this heading the following manufactures are
included: agricultural machinery and equipment (in-
cluding tractors) ; machine tools; electrical machinery
and equipment; general purpose machinery (e.g., en-
gines, turbines, conveyors, pumps, cranes, etc.) ; spe-
cialized equipment (e.g., coal mining machinery, metal-
lurgical equipment, construction machinery, etc.) ; pre-
cision and machine building instruments; railroad motive
power and rolling stock production and repair facilities.
Examines the importance of the industry in the econ-
omy and indicates its capacity to meet domestic require-
ments. Examines the size of the industry in terms of
total production, capital investment, and in relation to
markets. Discusses production trends, including tech-
nological advances. Indicates problems confronting the
industry with respect to raw materials, location, domestic
and foreign competition, and government policies and
controls. (Tables: total production and consumption
including use pattern where possible, imports and ex-
ports by countries of origin and destination, stocks, etc.)
Lists in text or tabular form name, location, output,
capacity, equipment, number of employees, and owner-
ship of principal plants. Indicates factors affecting pro-
duction of individual plants such as efficiency of labor,
ability to meet foreign competition, plans for expansion,
etc.
C. Vehicles
Discusses all civilian and military vehicles (with the
exception of rail vehicles and agricultural tractors).
Nonmotorized vehicles are treated only in countries
where they play an important role. Manufacture and
distribution are discussed as a subsector of the economy,
with special consideration for past, present, and future
contributions to military potential. Whenever applicable,
production of military vehicles is separated from that of
purely commercial ones. For countries not producing
complete vehicles or engaging in extensive assembly, the
discussion is modified; special attention is given to the
volume and sources of imports of complete vehicles,
components, and spare parts. Civilian types discussed
include passenger cars; trucks; highway tractors, trailers,
and semitrailers; buses, including trolley buses; and
motorcycles, scooters, and other small motorized vehicles.
Military vehicles include tanks, armored cars, self-pro-
pelled artillery, armored personnel carriers, and other
transportation vehicles designed specially for cross-
country or combat use.
1. General
An evaluative summary of the production, assembly,
import, and export of civilian and military vehicles, in-
cluding domestic and international significance, use
patterns, sources of raw and finished materials, unusual
characteristics of products or industrial and marketing
practices, industrial organization, government policies,
and factors affecting past and potential wartime con-
version. Covers briefly the historical development of
the industry, and any current or long-range plans for
the industry.
2. Civilian-type vehicles
a. DOMESTIC IMPORTANCE OF THE INDUSTRY - De-
scribes the relative importance of the industry as 1) a
contributor to gross national product, 2) an employer
of labor, 3) an absorber of new investment, and 4) an
earner of, or drain on, foreign exchange.
b. ECONOMICS OF THE INDUSTRY - Discusses 1) the
sources of raw materials, components, and accessories,
2) significant production methods and capabilities, and
3) the internal and external competitive situation. In-
cludes an overall evaluation of equipment, the use of
specialized machine tools, degree of automation, research
activities, any significant geographic characteristics of
the industry, and an explanation of government controls
as they affect competition, costs and earning, and export
or import of automotive products.
C. PRODUCTION, SUPPLY, AND USE - Surveys, with
appropriate SECTION 32 coordination and cross-reference,
the role of civilian-type vehicles in the country's trans-
portation of passengers and goods, indicating the ade-
108
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
quacy of types and volume produced or imported in
meeting demands under usual-and significant abnor-
mal-conditions. Gives average age of vehicles and fluc-
tuations thereof, the means devised to mobilize the
vehicle fleet for military purposes, and past experience
and plans for conversion to military production. De-
tailed statistics on production, imports, exports, and the
total vehicle registration are given.
d. PRINCIPAL PRODUCERS - A survey, with extensive
tabulated data, of each of the principal producers in
terms of their plant facilities, categories and volume
produced, and significant past history of the organization.
Separate tables list 1) producers and assemblers of motor
vehicles, and 2) producers of important components
and accessories, giving location of head office and all
significant plants, number of employees, relative im-
portance in the industry, sources of materials and power,
and the volume by type of all vehicles produced. The
tables also include all available information on the
potential capacity of each producing unit and any im-
portant factors limiting actual or potential output.
3. Specialized military vehicles
Surveys, when appropriate for the country and with
pertinent Ground Forces section coordination and cross-
reference, the production of specialized military vehicles
in the terms of Subsection C, 2, of this section, as ap-
propriately modified for these specialized end products.
This includes, when available, statistics on any unissued
specialized military vehicles mothballed or stockpiled
(i.e., vehicles not included in Ground Forces section).
D. Aircraft production
See Subsection C of this section.
Discusses jet and conventional aircraft production
separately. The following classification of aircraft type
is used:
Fighter
Attack
Bomber
Helicopter
Transport
Trainer
Liaison and Light Civilian
Other Types
Analyzes current status of aircraft industry-final as-
sembly, airframe, engine, and propeller plants-and pro-
duction trends. Indicates dependence on foreign design
and patents. Shows military reserves and present
strength, or indicates by cross-reference that these data
may be found in the appropriate Air Forces section.
Describes the dependence of the aircraft industry on
foreign and domestic sources of raw materials, semi-
manufactured products, and component parts.
Lists the location and physical characteristics of major
plants producing aircraft and principal components, in-
dicating the quantity and nature of products.
The above outline is for those countries which produce
aircraft or do extensive assembly. For countries not in
either of these categories, discusses, if possible, the pros-
pects of existing repair facilities or other installations
developing into aircraft production or assembly. If
appropriate in this connection, mentions in general terms
the country's potential with respect to the quality of its
labor force and managerial class, the investment climate,
attitude or policy of government toward establishment of
an aircraft industry, conditions of auxiliary services
needed by such an industry (transportation, fuel, and
power), and availabilities of raw materials.
For all countries for which data are available, gives
imports and exports of aircraft and parts, by unit and
type (also, if possible, by value). Cross-reference to
SECTION 37 and the appropriate Air Forces section, for
number and types of civilian and military planes, re-
spectively, in the country.
E. Shipbuilding
1. General
Summarizes the development of the industry, its gen-
eral significance as an element of the economy, and the
type of shipbuilding traditionally emphasized. Includes
a somewhat brief discussion of a) background of in-
dustry, b) treaty or other restrictions imposed, c) rank
as a shipbuilding nation, total annual cost of ship repairs,
effects of foreign competition, and value and number of
units imported or exported, d) major yard locations and
material supply problems as affected by geographic fac-
tors, e) position in the economy, contribution to gross
national product, importance as an employer and sector
for investment, and total capital investment, f) pattern of
ownership, g) government policy and control, including
subsidies, and h) training and research.
2. Production and repair activity
Summarizes production of both naval and merchant
ships (oceangoing, coastal, inland waterway), including
current production, relation between planned and actual
production, average time between keel laying and launch-
ing and between launching and commissioning, amount
or value of repair work by major yards and type of ship,
and evaluated maximum production capacity. Construc-
tion by yard for each type of ship for the most recent
5-year period and a previous representative period is
tabulated.
3. Economic resources and requirements
A discussion, supported by statistics as appropriate, of
consumption of materials, raw materials or component
shortages and alleviation by import, and significant past
problems of procurement. Principal suppliers of major
components (steel, marine diesels and turbines, arma-
ment, and navigation equipment) are located by map,
with cross-reference to Subsections B and G of this sec-
tion and to ferrous metals in SECTION 63, as appropriate.
Discusses manpower employed in shipyards as a per-
cent of total labor force and in terms of requirements
for current operation, the effect of nationality or racial
problems and unionization on labor availability or pro-
ductivity, and wage structure, with table comparing
109
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
wages of shipbuilding industry with other heavy'
industries.
4. Shipyard facilities and production methods
Describes yards by categories, with comments on pro-
duction difficulties common to all yards, areal distribu-
tion of construction capacity with reference to location
map, and details of shipyard facilities of major yards
in tabulation or text as appropriate. If tabulated, prin-
cipal yard features are: name and location, types of ships
and other items produced, building ways or sites, dry-
docks, shops, number of employees, and other pertinent
data such as tie-in with component or materials manu-
facturing plants.
Covers production methods, success of leading pro-
ducers, seasonal changes in production, and adaptability
of industry and major yards to change to different types
of ship construction. Cross-reference to SECTION 35.
5. Future prospects of the industry
General observations on future of the industry, its
expansion potential, and probable production trends.
F. Explosives (industrial and military)
Discusses industrial and military explosives, conform-
ing as appropriate to the specifications for Subsection
64, C. The manufacture of explosives is treated from
the point where ordinarily available commercial chem-
icals begin to be differentiated into explosives or in-
termediates.
Industrial and military explosives normally are treated
separately, following, as appropriate for the country, an
introductory summary of the development, characteris-
tics, and economic or strategic significance of related
industry. The discussion of industrial explosives is
largely in terms of normal supply and demand. In the
more comprehensive discussion of military explosives,
the emphasis is on the adequacy of the country's supply
of its peacetime armed forces requirements, and on the
capabilities of the entire chemical industry for meeting
the country's own military explosives requirements and
probable obligations to others in time of war. Discusses
the sources of explosives constituents as received by the
explosives plants, and vulnerability of supply, including
reliance on foreign sources for constituents or more pri-
mary raw materials. Chemically related explosives are
discussed as a group as far as is consistent with the
overall objective of providing detailed information on
the wartime supply position of as many finished military
explosives as possible.
Principal producers are listed in tabular form generally
similar to that for Subsection C of this section, with
inclusion under Remarks of information on the sources
of each plant's principal materials and the destination
to which its explosives are shipped for loading or stor-
age. When the information will result in little or no
duplication, the table is separated into producers of
industrial and military explosives.
G. Arms and ammunition (including explosive
devices)
The emphasis is on the country's supply of its peace-
time armed forces requirements, and on the capabilities
of the country's entire industry for meeting the nation's
own munitions requirements and probable obligations to
others in time of war. The sources of principal com-
ponents, and vulnerability of supply, including reliance
on foreign sources for components or more primary raw
materials, are factors considered in the objective of pro-
viding detailed information on the wartime supply posi-
tion of munitions.
Manufacture and supply of civilian arms and ammuni-
tion are discussed only if they have special significance,
but the capabilities of such producers are considered
in assessing the country's overall munitions potential.
Principal munitions producers are listed in tabular
form generally similar to that for Subsection C of this
section.
Following a general introductory summary, the dis-
cussion is in terms of the following categories:
1. Weapons for armed forces-Small arms; recoilless rifles,
rocket launchers, and mortars; artillery (field, antitank,
AA, coastal, and naval).
2. Ammunition-Ammunition for the weapons listed above,
including complete rounds and major components,
3. Explosive devices-Hand grenades; rifle grenades; land
and sea mines; bombs; torpedoes; depth charges.
H. Missiles and space equipment
Summarizes the development of the industry which
produces missiles and space equipment. Briefly dis-
cusses the trends in the industry, organizational controls,
both government and private, and capability to produce
weapon systems and space systems. Particular emphasis
is placed on surveying and evaluating the production
plants, including a summary paragraph covering the
specific systems in preseries and series production.
Discusses missiles and space systems production and
the facilities involved in development and production
broken down by the following categories:
1. Guided missile and space system airframe production and
final assembly.
2. Guided missile and space system propulsion equipment
production, including liquid engines, solid motors, air
breathing engines, and advanced propulsion systems pro-
duction.
3. Guided missile and space systems guidance and control
equipment production.
4. Guided missile and space system ground environment
equipment production.
5. Guided missile and space system major subassembly pro-
duction.
6. Space system specific mission component equipment pro-
duction.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Discussion includes the location and physical descrip-
tion of the facilities comprising the missile and space
industry with tabular presentations of floorspace, type of
production, monthly production rates, and cumulative
total production, by system, for a selected period of time.
For all countries for which data are available, covers
imports and exports, joint international, bilateral or
NATO, SEATO, etc., sponsored production programs,
details of government and private management and con-
trol, the political factors affecting the establishment of
a missile and/or space program and industry, and the
,economic and industrial base supporting the industry.
1. Other military equipment and supplies
Discusses military items in terms of the five categories
below.
The emphasis is on the country's supply of its peace-
time armed forces requirements, and on the capabilities
of the country's entire industry for meeting the nation's
own munitions requirements and probable obligations to
others in time of war. The sources of principal com-
ponents, and vulnerability of supply, including reliance
on foreign sources for components or more primary raw
materials, are factors considered in the objective of pro-
viding detailed information on the wartime supply
position.
Principal producers are listed in tabular form generally
similar to that for Subsection C of this section.
Following a general introductory summary, if appro-
priate, the following are discussed:
1. Chemical-, biological-, and radiological-warfare materiel.
2. Military engineering equipment (bridges, camouflage, infra-
red, topographical).
3. Quartermaster-type supplies, including equipment neces-
sary for POL distribution, personal military equipment, etc.
4. Specialized military optical and photographic equipment,
including bombsights and fire-control devices other than
electronic types.
5. Medical supplies and equipment, excluding pharma-
ceuticals.
J. Telecommunications and electronic equip-
ment
Telecommunications equipment includes all types
utilizing electric or electronic, acoustic, or visual means
for the transmission of signals, signs, or images of any
kind. The telecommunications-equipment manufactur-
ing industry includes all, industrial facilities producing
equipment-such as wire, radio, electronic, and other
signal equipment or components-used for the trans-
mission of aural, visual, or control signals.
Following a general introductory statement, including
strategic significance and relative importance in the econ-
omy, discusses each of the following categories:
1. Wire equipment and related components (includes tele-
phone and telegraph).
2. Radio equipment and related components (includes com-
munications, broadcast, television, tubes, etc.).
3. Electronics equipment and related components (includes
fire-control and other radar, navigational aids, telemeter-
ing, guidance and control, and computers, etc.).
A discussion of each category includes a summary of
its development, government policies and controls, inter-
national relationships and competitive situation, amount
and quality of labor, present and potential military pro-
duction, and dependence on imported components or
materials.
Includes a tabulation of plants, showing location, own-
ership, size, and principal types and quantities of equip-
ment produced.
K. Chemical industries
This subsection covers heavy chemicals for industrial
use, chemical fertilizers, and chemical plastics (unfab-
ricated).
1. General
2. Industrial chemicals
The following list of chemicals, essentially raw mate-
rials and intermediates for the chemical industry, serves
as a guide for selecting those of importance in the area
to be treated in this subsection. Others not on the list
are treated if their importance warrants.
Sulfuric acid
Alkali group (caustic soda, chlorine, soda ash, salt cake,
bleaching powder, hydrochloric acid, fluorine, metallic
sodium)
Solvents, such as alcohols, acetone, etc.
Synthetic ammonia and nitric acid
Calcium carbide and industrial gases
Dyes and pigments (coal tar and other organic dyes, chro-
mates, red lead, lithopone, titanium dioxide)
Other coal tar products (do not treat ammonium sulfate)
Phosphorus and phosphates (except fertilizers)
Bromides and tetraethyl lead
Plastics raw materials (acetic acid, phenol, urea, formalde-
hyde, phthalic and maleic anhydrides, butadiene, styrene,
acrylonitrile, nylon salt, plasticizers and accelerators, puri-
fied cellulose, carbon black)
3. Chemicals used in agriculture
a. FERTILIZERS
(1) Nitrogenous (including ammonium sulfate
from coke ovens)
(2) Phosphatic
(3) Potassic
b. INSECTICIDES, FUNGICIDES, ETC.
4. Synthetic rubber and fibers, and plastics
a. SYNTHETIC RUBBER
b. PLASTICS (POWDERS AND PELLETS FOR MOLDING,
CASTING, AND LAMINATING; SHEETS, RODS, TUBES, AND FILM)
C. SYNTHETIC FIBERS (MANUFACTURE OF RAYON, NYLON,
ETC., FILAMENT AND STAPLE FIBER. No WEAVING.)
5. Pharmaceuticals
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
L. Agricultural processing industries
The following major types of agricultural processing
plants are considered: tobacco, meatpacking, beverages,
canneries, sugar mills and refineries, and oil processing
plants. In certain areas other categories of installations
are important and are given separate treatment.
Commercial rice milling (milling for sale) in either
rural or factory-type mills is treated here, where specific
information is given on location of individual plants,
capacity, output, employment, and ownership.
Among the dairy products, only dried and canned
milk are discussed. Detailed information is given on
output of the industrialized sector of the animal
slaughtering and meatpacking industry, including the
number, location, size, and capacity of the industrialized
plants.
Detailed data are given on oil mills, output of oils,
and trade by country of origin and/or destination. If
fish canning is an important manufacturing activity in
the area, this subsection includes a brief summary of
the value of output, employment, and capital investment,
with cross-reference to Subsection 61, C, Fisheries.
See also Subsection B of this section for additional
requirements.
With respect to industries having strategic significance
(normally fats and oils, meats, sugar, and flour), this
subsection lists in table form the information on the
principal plants called for in Subsection B of this section.
For principal plants of nonstrategic industries, normally
described in a separate tabulation, only name, location,
size (preferably in terms of production or capacity), and
age and/or degree of obsolescence are included; size
and age (or degree of obsolescence) are normally indi-
cated in a "Remarks" column.
M. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
The following items are treated: natural fibers and tex-
tiles (spinning and weaving stage) ; synthetic fibers
(weaving stage only); natural rubber (processing stage);
rubber products, both natural. and synthetic, such as
tires, shoes, etc.; paper and pulp; and leather.
Treatment includes only factory consumption of raw
cotton and wool (import data are briefly summarized,
with cross-reference to SECTION 61). Supplies of raw
fibers are also discussed in general terms here as a
problem in textile production. Tanneries and leather
products plants other than shoe factories are treated as
a separate subtopic; data on tannery consumption of
hides and skins are included. Shoes of all types are
treated as a separate subtopic. Production and con-
sumption data for paper pulp are also covered.
See also Subsection B of this section for additional
requirements.
Treatment includes data on principal plants, as called
for in Subsection 64, L. Mills making pulp usable for
manufacture of explosives or rayon are indicated.
N. Construction industries
This subsection treats major construction firms or in-
dustries interested and utilized in residential, commer-
cial, industrial, and public works construction. Some
construction materials are treated in SECTION 63, to
which appropriate reference is made.
Discusses briefly and in general: major categories of
construction, number of major firms involved, and ade-
quacy and availability of skilled and semiskilled labor
and equipment necessary for the industries concerned.
Discusses growth of these industries, adequacy to meet
present requirements, and their ability to expand,
Tabulates major construction firms, their location, types
of construction each firm is interested in, and amount
of skilled and semiskilled labor employed.
Lists outstanding and highly qualified personalities in
the construction industry and notes their special interests.
0. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 65. Trade and Finance
A. General
Indicates the principal features of the country's domes-
tic and foreign trade and the part it plays in the national
economy. Discusses the currency and banking systems,
and organization of public finances. Notes significant
changes in the balance of payments. Points out whether
the country normally has an import or export surplus,
and its debtor-creditor position (foreign assets and
liabilities). Discusses the country's position in inter-
national markets. Describes the government's policy in
the fields of domestic and foreign trade and finance.
B. Business organization
Discusses the juridical forms of business ownership.
Indicates degree of interlocking financial relationship
and dispersion of ownership.
C. Domestic trade and finance
1. Pattern of domestic trade
Describes the place of wholesale and retail trade in
the national economy, showing its contribution to GNP,
number of persons employed as percent of total labor
force, etc.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Describes briefly the structure of the trade channels
(wholesale and retail), with special emphasis upon trade
practices, ownership (private, state, cooperative), and
nature and degree of specialigation.
2. Domestic financial institutions and their structure
Under each of the following principal topics includes
relevant statistical data, as much as possible in tabular
form.
a. BANKING AND CURRENCY SYSTEM - Describes the
banking system, indicating the kinds of banks and their
role in financing private industry and trade, agriculture,
and government. Describes briefly the central bank in-
stitution and discusses its role in the economy and gov-
ernment operations. Discusses flexibility of currency
system and ability to meet changing economic require-
ments. Describes briefly the currency system, indicating
the kinds of currency used, the amounts outstanding, and
name of the issuing authority. Explains the degree to
which the currency is tied to gold or to some foreign
currency, such as sterling or dollar.
b. INSURANCE COMPANIES AND OTHER FINANCIAL IN-
STITUTIONS (CREDIT UNIONS, ETC.) - Describes briefly
major features and operations.
c. SECURITY MARKETS - Describes briefly major fea-
tures, emphasizing role in providing and channeling
investment funds.
d. COMMODITY MARKETS - Lists and briefly dis-
cusses the size, operations, and government regulations
relating to the major commodity markets.
3. Government finance and fiscal policy
Under each of the following principal topics includes
relevant statistical data, as much as possible in tabular
form. In all cases compares with some representative
base year and indicates trends. -
a. PUBLIC EXPENDITURES. (NATIONAL BUDGET) - Ana-
lyzes budgets to determine, where possible, the distribu-
tion of public expenditures on a functional as well as
organizational basis, with special emphasis on national
defense and scientific development and attention to wel-
fare and economic development. Indicates the size and
function of local budgets.
b. REVENUE - Describes briefly the tax systems and
other sources of revenue of both national and intermedi-
ate governments. Analyzes adequacy to meet revenue
requirements and social and political factors which con-
dition revenue patterns.
c. GOVERNMENT DEBT - Indicates the size of gov-
ernment debt, internal and foreign, and traces the trends
during recent years. Discusses any particular problems
that have arisen in connection with this debt, especially
those involving servicing the foreign debt.
d. GOVERNMENT MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICIES-
Describes briefly the government's fiscal and monetary
policies. Specifically, considers the effect on monetary
availabilities and purchasing power (and through them
on the levels of national income) of the following
policies:
Government surpluses and/or deficits
Public revenue system
Public expenditure pattern
Management of the public debt
Central bank policies, such as limitations on amount of is-
sue, regulation of interest rates, reserve requirements, open
market policies, etc.
e. GOVERNMENT POLICIES TOWARD RESTRICTIVE TRADE
PRACTICES - Examines government policies toward car-
tels, monopolies, other restrictive trade practices, and
toward cooperatives.
D. International trade and finance
Under each of the following principal topics includes
relevant statistical data, as much as possible in tabular
form.
1. Balance of payments position
a. OVERALL - Discusses in overall terms the bal-
ance of payments, indicating the net debit or credit
position, the principal debit and credit items or groups
of items, and the principal debit and credit countries
or monetary groupings. Indicates the extent to which
commodity trade, other current accounts, and capital
and monetary gold movements affect the balance of pay-
ments. Where significant, analyzes the triangular or
multilateral aspects of the balance of payments. Indi-
cates significant changes in the pattern of the balance of
payments. Gives balance of payments statements for
a representative period of normal conditions and one
or more recent years according to the presentation
adopted by the International Monetary Fund.
b. CURRENT ACCOUNT
(1) Commodity trade - Shows the relationship of
the country's total foreign commodity trade to world
trade and to its own national income. Describes the
extent to which the country is dependent upon either
imports or exports. Sets forth the pattern of foreign
trade by commodity, by origin or destination, by quan-
tity, value, and percentage distribution and variation.
Indicates the more significant changes that have taken
place in the preceding decade. Specifies the countries
and commodities upon which the foreign trade is particu-
larly dependent. Includes a. table of foreign trade show-
ing by commodity, where data permit, the following: 1)
volume, 2) value, 3) percentage distribution, and 4)
origin and destination. If possible, these are given for
different years in order to show fluctuation. These data
are also presented in graphic form when possible.
(2) Other current items - Discusses the pattern
of current accounts, analyzing the significance of the
major invisible items, shipping, insurance, interest,
tourism, noncompensated remittances, etc.
113
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
C. CAPITAL AND COLD MOVEMENTS - If the move-
ments of capital and monetary gold need analysis in
greater detail than in Subsection 65, D, 1, a, this is
presented here.
2. Foreign assets and liabilities
Discusses the country's position in recent years as an
international debtor or creditor. Taking into considera-
tion government and private investments, gold and for-
eign exchange holdings, etc., lists the principal debtor
or creditor countries, and indicates amounts outstand-
ing. Analyzes the nature and magnitude of any inter-
governmental loans or grants. Indicates the amount of
foreign investment within the country by industry group
and by investing country. Indicates the amount of in-
vestment abroad by industry group and country of in-
vestment. Evaluates the role of foreign assets or debts
as they would affect wartime and other extraordinary
foreign expenditures. Describes changes in holdings of
foreign exchange and gold during recent years and ex-
amines their effect upon foreign trade and international
payments.
Presents a table of estimates of the country's private
and government assets or investments in foreign coun-
tries and of foreign countries' assets or investments in
the subject country, showing gross values outstanding as
of the end of recent fiscal or calendar years. Data are
shown by classes of property, investment, or claim by
foreign countries or areas in which country's assets or
investments or its obligors are located, or which own or
hold assets or investments in the country, or obligations
of the country. The country's estimated total net
creditor or debtor position is given, as well as its net
position with regard to particular classes of assets or with
individual foreign countries or areas.
:3. Government policies, practices, and institutions
relative to international trade and finance
Discusses the nature, extent, and effectiveness of gov-
ernment controls on foreign exchange and foreign trade
and their relationship to each other. Indicates to what
extent these controls are permanent or of an emergency
character. Discusses the purpose of such controls and
the extent to which they modify the trade pattern.
Discusses, in general terms, governmental policy, prac-
tices, and institutions in respect to the following matters
(detailed discussion of foreign trade organizations is in
Subsection D, 4, of this section) :
a. COMMERCIAL POLICY AND STATE INTERVENTION IN
INTERNATIONAL TRADING
Tariffs, subsidies, and incentives.
Quantitative restrictions.
State trading, bulk buying, bilateral agreements, etc.
Relations with international trade organizations.
b. INTERNATIONAL FINANCE
Foreign exchange rates-Indicates changes that have oc-
curred in country's exchange rates during recent years; ac-
counts for such changes by reference to inflationary poli-
cies, occupation by foreign powers, deliberate economic
warfare, etc.
Participation in international payments and clearance ar-
rangements.
Relations with international financial institutions.
Controls and safeguards affecting international investment.
4. Foreign trade organizations
Discusses briefly the nature and structure of foreign
trade organizations, including cartels, which control the
movement of goods. Indicates the extent to which such
organizations influence the volume and character of the
foreign trade.
E. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
ARMED FORCES
(Formerly SECTIONS 80 through 83)
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex and highly developed country or NIS
Area. For smaller or developing nations, however, certain modifica-
tions in balance or coverage may be desirable. The Outline Guide
should be used flexibly and adapted to assure adequate treatment
of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Area. In preparation
and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial Instructions should be
followed in detail.
Section 1- General
Section 2 - Ground Forces
Section 3 - Naval Forces
Section 4 - Air Forces
Section 5 -Air Defense Forces
Section 6 - Missile Forces
Section 7 - Military Space Systems
r n 115
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 1. General
A. Introduction
Presents a general appraisal of the armed forces in
terms of mission(s), capability of accomplishing the mis-
sion(s), strengths, and weaknesses. Discusses the na-
tion's military strategy and the basic factors which have
influenced the development and adoption of strategic
concepts.
B. Structure of armed forces
1. Composition
Indicates the components of the armed forces with
their correct nomenclature, including pertinent subor-
dination, and any militarized security forces.
2. Top control
Explains the overall military and political control of
the armed forces, with appropriate chart(s), showing in
their proper relationships: 1) the Chief of State, with
his proper military title; 2) any top policy-making body,
such as a National Security Council, textually describing
its composition and purpose; 3) other political echelons
through which the chain of command or administrative
control passes; 4) coordinating bodies, such as joint
Chiefs of Staff; 5) the highest purely military echelon
for each component of the armed forces; and 6) the
services themselves. Broken lines may be used to show
administrative, as distinct from operational, control. Ex-
plains the methods of coordinating the services of the
armed forces and resolving differences among them. In-
dicates any important change in the top control structure
to be effected in time of war.
C. Size of armed forces
Indicates significant trends in total personnel strength
of the armed forces and in the proportions among the
separate components. Provides a tabulation showing the
total personnel strength and that of each separate com-
ponent, with appropriate footnotes to explain changes in
nomenclature or subordination, for selected dates, in-
cluding as a minimum the World War II peak (if ap-
propriate), 1 January of each postwar year, and the cut-
off date.
D. Manpower
1. Available manpower for the armed forces
Provides statistics on the total number of males by
5-year age groups from 15 to 49 as of 1 January of the
year of publication or as of a more recent date if im-
portant changes have occurred. Indicates how many of
the total in each group are regarded as fit for military
service. Gives the size of the annual class reaching mili-
tary age and the average number of men actually in-
ducted annually.
2. Conscription
a. ADMINISTRATIVE ORGANIZATION - States what
agency or agencies administer the conscription system
and how it is organized territorially. Indicates method
of designating age classes. Discusses preinduction
training.
b. STANDARDS OF FITNESS AND DEFERMENT - Indi-
cates standards of physical fitness applied and accept-
ance rates. Describes rules for deferment and exemption.
C. OPERATION - Describes procedures used in the
callup and allocation of recruits to the separate com-
ponents of the armed forces. Gives the total period of
military liability and the prescribed period of service for
each component of the armed forces.
E. Reserve and mobilization
1. Reserve system
a. RESERVE CATEGORIES - Notes the various cate-
gories and gives exact nomenclature of all reserve or-
ganizations and reserve groups with functions of each.
b. CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM - Outlines the system of
classification and recordkeeping for reserve personnel
(officer and enlisted).
C. RECALL PROCEDURE - Outlines the manner in
which reserves are recalled to service for refresher
training.
d. RESERVE PERSONNEL STRENGTH FIGURES - Gives the
total number of trained reserves by age groups and other
categories, and the effectiveness of reserve personnel.
2. Mobilization system
a. PERSONNEL - Discusses the mobilization pro-
cedures for callup of reserves, augmentation of existing
units, and activation of new units, noting whether re-
servists and others are called up as individuals or as
members of designated units.
b. MATERIEL, SHIPS, AIRCRAFT, FACILITIES - De-
scribes plans for augmenting military strength by re-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
moving materiel from storage, recommissioning ships
(inactive or reserve), commandeering civilian resources
(such as merchant marine, fishing fleets, miscellaneous
marine facilities, civil aircraft, and civil air facilities);
and discusses factors which will affect the rate of activa-
tion. Briefly describes the procedures followed in recent
conflicts, if appropriate.
3. Mobilization potential
In light of the foregoing discussions under Reserve and
Mobilization, estimates the actual mobilization potential
of components of the armed forces for M-day.
F. National awards, decorations, and titles
Illustrates and describes the principal awards and
decorations.
G. Permanent fortifications
Describes the overall plan of permanent fortifications
as it fits into the strategic concept of the nation.
1. Land fortifications
Describes, with subheadings if necessary, the location,
purpose, characteristics, and manning of each frontier
or internal fortified area.
2. Coastal defenses
Describes, with subheadings if necessary, the location,
purpose, characteristics, and manning of coastal fortified
areas, harbor defenses, warning systems, and static
coastal batteries.
H. International position of the armed forces
1. Military relationships with neighboring countries
Discusses power position in relation to neighboring
countries. Discusses potential or actual military support
from neighboring countries.
2. Military alliances
Discusses military alliances, pacts, or other treaty ar-
rangements to which the country is a party and the
extent to which they affect the deployment and commit-
ment to military action of the country's armed forces.
3. Foreign military assistance
Discusses the military assistance received from or
provided to foreign countries in terms of financial grants
and loans, gifts and sales of military hardware, construc-
tion of defense-related facilities, establishment of military
advisory missions, and training services.
1. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 2. Ground Forces
A. General
Provides a brief overall appraisal of the ground forces,
citing the most salient points of strength and weakness as
to organization, materiel, personnel, and efficiency, which
will be more fully developed in subsequent paragraphs.
B. Historical development
Discusses features of past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical perspec-
tive and an understanding of the ground forces con-
temporary position and role.
C. Mission and doctrine
States the mission of the ground forces as conceived
by the nation. Describes the official doctrine pertaining
to the employment of the ground forces in the accomplish-
ment of their mission.
13. Organization
1. Ground forces high command.
Describes, illustrating with organization charts, the
top-level organization of the ground forces, distinguish-
ing among commands, services, and staff organizations,
where possible. Under an appropriate subheading, de-
scribes in detail the functions and responsibilities of the
headquarters staff organization or its equivalent. In all
cases uses exact nomenclature; where English equiva-
lents are used, gives the foreign terms in parentheses the
first time reference is made. Refers to Section 1, Gen-
eral, for discussion of the armed forces high command.
2. Territorial organization
Describes the geographical zones, such as area com-
mands or army regions, into which the country is divided
for ground forces administrative and operational pur-
poses; lists their headquarters locations. Explains the
functions of these zones. Provides an outline map unless
the boundaries coincide with major political subdivisions.
3. Major operational commands/components
Describes briefly the overall organization of the ground
forces into tactical commands and basic tactical units,
indicating any contemplated differences between peace
and war. Gives the actual organization (peace and war)
of the higher tactical echelons above division. For each
such echelon, states the type of operational mission or
administrative function for which it is designed. Indi-
cates what units are usually subordinate to it. Gives
available data, with chart if appropriate, on the organi-
zation and functioning of field staffs.
118
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
4. Composition of operational commands
Describes, under appropriate subheadings and with
accompanying charts, the detailed organization, includ-
ing known or estimated authorized strengths and allot-
ments of weapons and vehicles, of the various types of
divisions and smaller independent combat units. De-
scribes the organization, equipment, and capabilities of
type units, such as psychological warfare units, that pro-
vide support to combat units. The description of each
unit should be carried down to the smallest elements
(rifle squad, tank platoon, etc.). Indicates the tactical
mission and roles of each unit described. Describes
briefly the organization of engineer, signal, supply, and
other service units, including charts if needed.
E. Strength and disposition
Provides a generalized appraisal of the strength and
disposition of the major ground forces units. Refers to
current publications of the Defense Intelligence Agency.
1. Strength
a. UNIT - Provides an evaluative discussion of cur-
rent number of armies, corps, divisions (by type), and
individual smaller combat units (by type).
b. PERSONNEL - Provides general appraisal of per-
sonnel strength by major components, officers and en-
listed men, and cadres.
2. Disposition
Describes in general terms the disposition of ground
forces at home and abroad, with strength figures by major
area and indicates any significant concentrations.
F. Tactics
1. Basic tactical doctrines
Discusses ground forces basic tactical doctrines such as
those for attack, defense, reconnaissance, withdrawal, ar-
tillery support, use of tanks, field fortifications and ob-
stacles, and close combat. Explains the tactics and
techniques down to an appropriate level.
2. Special operations
Discusses tactical doctrines for special operations such
as night fighting, street fighting, winter and arctic war-
fare, mountain warfare, jungle warfare, desert operations,
airborne and airmobile operations, amphibious operations,
and infiltration and partisan methods. Relates the dis-
cussion to the existing or contemplated special forms of
tactical organization.
G. Personnel
1. Grade and pay
Describes the grade and pay structure of the ground
forces, indicating any differences from U.S. practice in the
nomenclature, status, and functions of the various general
officer, officer, and enlisted grades. Distinguishes be-
tween any noncommissioned grades held by conscripts
and those held by career or long-service personnel. Ex-
plains any special categories such as warrant officers or
military "officials." Indicates the use, if any, of alternate
designations of grade for personnel in various branches
of service ("gunners" for artillery privates, etc.). Pro-
vides a table showing for each rank, starting with the
highest, the designation in the language of the country,
and the nearest U.S. equivalent.
2. Conditions of service
a. OFFICER - Describes the conditions of service of
officers, including promotion and retirement systems.
Generally indicates whether service conditions affect
morale and standards.
b. ENLISTED - Describes the conditions of service of
enlisted personnel, including advancement in grade, and
pension plans, and indicates whether the service condi-
tions are conducive to good morale.
3. Uniforms and insignia
Describes and illustrates by sketches the principal
types of officer and enlisted uniforms, noting color, gen-
eral styling, and kind of material used. Describes and
illustrates branch or category insignia.
H. Training
Characterizes the quality and effectiveness of the over-
all training system, emphasizing its strengths and weak-
nesses.
1. Individual
Describes the schedules and methods for basic, ad-
vanced, and specialized individual training of enlisted
personnel in the principal branches. Describes the or-
ganization and functioning of training units, training
centers, or similar installations. Explains briefly the re-
placement training system in time of war. In separate
paragraphs, describes the training schedules and methods
for noncommissioned officer and officer candidates and
the schooling given officers as their careers progress.
Indicates any practice of sending military students
abroad.
2. Unit, combined, and maneuvers
Describes the methods of unit training in the various
branches, the methods of combined training (infantry-
artillery or other combat teams), and the schedule, scope,
and character of maneuvers.
3. Schools and installations
a. SYSTEM - Describes the general plan, control,
and efficiency of the ground forces school system and of
any other training installations.
b. LOCATION LIST - Lists in order of precedence all
ground forces schools and other training installations,
showing the exact name, English translation, location,
character, and capacity of each.
4. Reserve
Indicates the schedule and character of refresher
training for reservists. Describes the training system for
reserve officers.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
5. Foreign programs
Describes the nature and scope of training given to,
or received from, other countries.
I. Logistics
1. Classes of materiel
Indicates the manner in which equipment and supplies
are grouped into classes for logistic purposes.
2. Procurement
Describes the machinery for the planning and control
of procurement of the various classes of materiel, in-
cluding design, placement of orders, acceptance, and
testing. Indicates to what extent equipment is pro-
duced domestically and to what extent it is imported.
3. Peacetime storage and issue
a. SYSTEM - Explains the system of storage and is-
sue for various classes of materiel in the zone of the
interior.
b. INSTALLATIONS - Lists all known depots and
other storage installations for materiel, giving pertinent
facts regarding each. Utilizes a map if warranted.
4. War supply and movement
Explains the machinery for requisition and supply of
various classes of materiel in time of war, using charts if
necessary. Characterizes the efficiency of the supply
system. Gives any available data on unit movement re-
quirements and unit resupply requirements under varying
conditions.
5. Maintenance
Describes the system for maintenance and repair of
equipment in the field in peace and in war. Character-
izes the efficiency of the system.
6. Evacuation
Explains briefly the system for evacuation of equipment
and of personnel., including the handling of captured
materiel and of prisoners of war.
7. Appraisal of the logistic system
Discusses the basic strengths and weaknesses of the
logistic and maintenance systems, assessing their general
effectiveness, and noting such factors as their flexibility,
expandability, and efficiency.
J. Materiel
1. Ordnance
For each category of ordnance equipment, arranged
under subheadings appropriate to the country, includes
a textual discussion and, if appropriate, a table of char-
acteristics (see 8, Tabular data, below). The discussion
covers in each case the general situation of the ground
forces with regard to the quality and quantity of the
category of materiel in question; reviews indications of
the presence, recent acquisition, or contemplated de-
velopment or purchase of various specific items; evalu-
ates each of the more important items believed to be
on hand; and indicates the probable future trend. The
table of characteristics should be designed to provide, in
compact form, the most pertinent comparative data for
judging the effectiveness of each item listed. (The
table of characteristics may be omitted and any pertinent
data may be incorporated in the text if the subject or the
amount of material available does not lend itself to tabu-
lar presentation.)
2. Signal
Characterizes the general situation of the ground forces
with regard to quality and quantity of signal equipment.
For each category of signal equipment, arranged under
subheadings appropriate to the country, gives a discus-
sion and, if appropriate, a table of characteristics as in-
dicated under 1, Ordnance, above.
3. Quartermaster
a. INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT - Describes briefly the
principal types of individual equipment other than uni-
forms and insignia.
b. ORGANIZATIONAL EQUIPMENT - Describes briefly
other types of quartermaster equipment, arranged under
appropriate subheadings.
4. Engineer
Characterizes the general situation of the ground forces
with regard to quality and quantity of engineer materiel.
For each major category of engineer equipment, arranged
under subheadings appropriate to the country, gives a
discussion and, if appropriate, a table of characteristics
as indicated under 1, Ordnance, above.
5. Chemical
Characterizes the general situation of the ground forces
with regard to quality and quantity of chemical materiel.
For each major category of chemical materiel, arranged
under subheadings appropriate to the country, gives a
discussion and, if appropriate, a table of characteristics
as indicated under 1, Ordnance, above.
6. Medical
Characterizes the general situation of the ground forces
with regard to quality and quantity of medical equip-
ment, facilities, and supplies. Using appropriate sub-
headings, describes the principal specific categories or
items. Emphasizes aspects having a bearing on combat
effectiveness of the ground forces under varying con-
ditions.
7. Army aviation
Discusses types of aircraft used in command and
liaison, observation, visual and photographic reconnais-
sance, fire adjustment, airlift of personnel and materiel
within the combat zone, and aeromedical evacuation.
Presents a table showing major characteristics of these
aircraft.
120
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
8. Tabular data
Provides tables of characteristics desired to supplement
the textual discussion of the various categories of equip-
ment included in J, Materiel.
K. Means of identification
1. Equipment markings
Describes and illustrates the markings used by the
ground forces to identify equipment nationality. An il-
lustrative sketch may show the markings only, provided
the text gives their location on the equipment. Describes
other markings on equipment and explains their sig-
nificance. Mentions, as appropriate, the painting of
equipment in certain colors and describes the use of
camouflage.
2. Unit identification
Describes the system used by the ground forces to
identify units and indicates where unit identifications
appear on equipment and on uniforms. Notes any dif-
ferences between peacetime and wartime practices. If
unit insignia other than number or letter combinations
are used, furnishes sketches of those of the principal
units.
L. Quasi-military forces
Describes under suitable subheadings all quasi-military
forces that could augment the ground forces and that
have a military or quasi-military mission connected with
national, local, internal, or frontier security. For each
such organization indicates its full name, character, mis-
sion, top control, high command, relationship with the
ground forces in peace and war, administrative or other
subdivisions, source and terms of service of personnel,
and general disposition. Also includes a brief discussion
or characterization of its armament, mobility, training,
tactics, and logistics.
M. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 3. Naval Forces
A. General
Provides a brief overall appraisal of the naval forces,
citing the most salient points of strength and weakness as
to organization, materiel, personnel, and efficiency, which
will be more fully developed in subsequent paragraphs.
B. Historical development
Discusses features of past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical per-
spective and an understanding of the naval forces con-
temporary position and role.
C. Mission and doctrine
States the mission of the naval forces as conceived
by the nation. Describes the official doctrine pertain-
ing to the employment of the naval forces in the accom-
plishment of their mission.
D. Organization
1. Naval forces high command
Describes, illustrating with organization charts, the
top-level organization of the naval forces, distinguishing
among commands, services, and staff organizations,
where possible. Under an appropriate subheading, de-
scribes in detail the functions and responsibilities of the
headquarters staff organization or its equivalent. In all
cases uses exact nomenclature; where English equiva-
lents are used, gives the foreign term in parentheses the
first time reference is made. Refers to SECTION 1, Gen-
eral, for discussion of the armed forces high command.
2. Naval districts
Describes the districts (or zones or activities) into
which the country is divided for naval forces adminis-
trative and operational purposes; lists their headquarters
locations. Explains the functions.of these districts. Pro-
vides an outline map unless the boundaries coincide
with major political subdivisions.
3. Naval communications network
Describes the naval communications organization.
4. Fleet organization
Describes the tactical and administrative organization
of the forces afloat, including shipboard organization.
Discusses relationship with naval headquarters, other
commands, and shore support activities.
5. Naval aviation
Describes the structure and composition of naval avia-
tion operational organizations and their relationship to
higher command ashore and afloat.
6. Other naval organizations
Describes under individual subheadings other naval
organizations not covered elsewhere, such as coastal
defense and naval infantry. Shows the relationship with
naval authorities or activities.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
E. Strength and disposition
Provides a generalized appraisal of the strength and
disposition of the naval forces units. Refers to current
publications of the Defense Intelligence Agency.
1. Strength
a. SHIPS - Provides a generalized appraisal of the
strength of the major naval forces afloat.
b. AIRCRAFT - Provides a generalized appraisal of
the strength of naval aviation units.
c. PERSONNEL- Provides a generalized appraisal of
naval forces personnel showing the proportion ashore,
afloat, and in aviation.
2. Disposition
Describes in general terms the disposition of naval
forces at home and abroad, with strength figures by major
area, and indicates any significant concentrations.
F. Operations
Discusses the basic doctrines for the naval forces
under appropriate subheadings, such as attack, defense,
reconnaissance, submarine warfare, mining, and amphib-
ious operations.
G. Personnel
1. Corps and services
Explains the concepts and nomenclature used in divid-
ing naval personnel into branches, with the responsibil-
ities, duties, and limitations of authority of each branch.
2. Grade and pay
Explains the grade and pay structure and shows the
nearest equivalent in the U.S. Navy, with appropriate
comments on differences. Discusses the command or
administrative authority of each grade, and describes
ariy limits of grade of various branches. Provides a
table showing for each grade, starting with the highest,
the designation in the language of the country, and
the nearest U.S. equivalent.
3. Conditions of service
a. OFFICER - Describes the conditions of service of
officers, including promotion and retirement systems.
Generally indicates whether service conditions affect
morale and standards.
b. ENLISTED - Describes the conditions of service
of enlisted personnel, including advancement in grade,
and pension plans, and indicates whether the service
conditions are conducive to good morale.
4. Uniforms and insignia
Describes and illustrates by sketches the principal types
of officer and enlisted uniforms, noting color, general
styling, and kind of material used. Describes and illus-
trates branch or category insignia.
H. Training
Discusses the quality and effectiveness of the overall
training system of officers and enlisted men, emphasiz-
ing the strength and weakness of training procedures in
theory and practice.
1. Officer
Describes under appropriate headings the basic, ad-
vanced, and specialist training of officers.
2. Enlisted
Describes under appropriate headings the basic and
specialist training of enlisted men.
3. Shipboard
Discusses practical and theoretical training on ship-
board (except when ship is a moored school ship utilized
for space accommodation).
4. Fleet and force
Gives the scope and schedule of fleet: and force train-
ing together with pertinent observations on effectiveness.
5. Naval aviation '
a. PREOPERATIONAL FLYING - Describes schools for
pilot and other aircrew training, including entrance re-
quirements, length of course, flying and aviation ground
curricula, facilities, and equipment. Points out areas of
major emphasis.
b. OPERATIONAL FLYING - Describes operational
training, the system and its control, indicating the pro-
visions for particular types of training as well as par-
ticipation in maneuvers and joint exercises.
c. ADVANCED TRAINING-Describes advanced train-
ing for naval aviation personnel.
d. TECHNICAL AND AVIATION GROUND PERSONNEL-
Describes schools for technical and aviation ground
personnel.
6. Reserve
Discusses the adequacy, extent, and methods em-
ployed in training reserve personnel.
7. Foreign programs
Describes the nature and scope of training given to,
or received from, other countries.
8. Location list
Lists in order of precedence all naval forces schools
and other training installations, showing the exact name,
English translation, location, character, and capacity of
each.
I. Logistics
1. Procurement
Describes the system of procurement and supply of
naval materiel.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
2. New construction, repair, and maintenance
Describes the policy in effect for the construction of
naval vessels, and for their repair and maintenance,
noting the dependence on foreign yards, if applicable.
Makes reference as applicable to appropriate sections
of the NIS on shipbuilding and naval facilities.
3. Centers of supply
Lists all known depots and other storage installations
for materiel, giving pertinent facts regarding each. Uti-
lizes chart if warranted.
4. Appraisal of the logistic system
Discusses the basic strengths and weaknesses of the
logistic and maintenance systems, assessing their gen-
eral effectiveness, and noting such factors as their flexi-
bility, expandability, and efficiency.
J. Ships, aircraft, and materiel
1. Ships and aircraft
Discusses naval ship design in relationship to strategic
and tactical requirements. Makes appropriate com-
ments regarding adequacy or inadequacy of design and
construction for operations or employment in certain
areas. Presents data on performance and characteristics
of aircraft if different from those aircraft described in
SECTION 4, Air Forces.
2. Weapons
Discusses materiel qualitatively, emphasizing the im-
portant characteristics of surface ordnance, underwater
ordnance, and missile systems. Data on aircraft equip-
ment, including ordnance, are presented in SECTION 4, Air
Forces.
3. Electronics
Discusses briefly various types of equipment and their
uses.
4. Statistical data on ships
Provides in tabular form the characteristics of com-
bat and auxiliary vessels.
K. Means of identification
1. Equipment markings
Describes and illustrates the markings used by the
naval forces to identify equipment nationality, including
markings such as roundels or fin flashes for aircraft.
An illustrative sketch may consist of the markings only,
provided the text gives their location on the equipment.
Describes other markings on equipment (excluding unit
insignia) and explains their significance. Discusses
painting of equipment in certain colors; use of camou-
flage.
2. Unit identification
Describes the system used by the naval forces to
identify units and indicates where unit identifications
appear on equipment and on uniforms. Notes any dif-
ferences between peacetime and wartime practices. If
unit insignia other than number or letter combinations
are used, provides sketches of those of the principal
units.
L. Quasi-military forces
Describes under suitable subheadings all quasi-military
forces that could augment the naval forces and that have
a military or quasi-military mission connected with na-
tional, local, internal, on frontier security. For each such
organization indicates its full name, character, mission,
top control, high command, relationship with the naval
forces in peace and war, administrative or other subdivi-
sions, sources and terms of service of personnel, and gen-
eral disposition. Also includes a brief discussion or char-
acterization of its armament, mobility, training, opera-
tions, and logistics.
M. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 4. Air Forces
A. General
Provides a brief overall appraisal of the air forces,
citing the most salient points of strength and weakness
as to organization, materiel, personnel, and efficiency,
which will be more fully developed in subsequent para-
graphs.
B. Historical development
Discusses features of past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical per-
spective and an understanding of the air forces con-
temporary position and role.
C. Mission and doctrine
States the mission of the air forces as conceived by
the nation. Describes the official doctrine pertaining
to the employment of the air forces in the accomplish-
ment of their mission.
D. Organization
1. Air forces high command
Describes, illustrating with organization charts, the
top-level organization of the air forces, distinguishing
among commands, services, and staff organizations,
where possible. Under an appropriate subheading, de-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
scribes in detail the functions and responsibilities of the
headquarters staff organization or its equivalent. In all
cases uses exact nomenclature; where English equivalents
are used, gives the foreign term in parentheses the first
time reference is made. Refers to SECTION 1, General,
for discussion of the armed forces high command.
2. Territorial organization
Describes the geographic zones, such as area com-
mands or air regions, into which the country is divided
for air force administrative and operational purposes;
lists their headquarters locations. Explains the functions
of these zones. Provides an outline map unless the
boundaries coincide with major political subdivisions.
3. Major operational commands/components
Describes the functions, responsibilities, and organiza-
tional structure of each of the principal commands and
services of the air forces. These should include such
organizations as the strategic air command, the tactical
air command, the air defense command, the air trans-
port command, the training command, and supply serv-
ices. Describes these commands and services under
separate subheadings and, where appropriate, supple-
ments the text with organization charts.
4. Composition of operational commands
Describes, under appropriate subheadings and with
accompanying charts, the detailed structure and. com-
position of all operational echelons, such as air force,
wing, group, and squadron. Includes summarized tables
of organization in narrative or chart forms as appropriate.
E. Strength and disposition
Provides a generalized appraisal of the strength and
disposition of the air forces units. Refers to current
publications of the Defense Intelligence Agency.
1. Strength
a. AIRCRAFT - Provides an evaluative discussion of
aircraft in the air organizations.
b. PERSONNEL - Provides a general appraisal of air
forces personnel showing the proportion of aircrew to
ground personnel.
2. Disposition
Describes in general terms the disposition of air forces
at home and abroad, with strength figures by major
area, and indicates any significant concentrations.
F. Operations
Describes, under appropriate subheadings, the opera-
tional procedures of the air forces, relating them to D,
Organization, above, insofar as possible. Describes the
normal sequence of events affecting operation of the
organizations, and the relation of the organizations to
other commend elements. Describes combat tactics, if
appropriate. Discusses basic doctrines of various air
organizations under separate subheadings.
G. Personnel
1. Grade and pay
Describes the grade and pay structure of the air forces,
indicating any differences from U.S. practice in the
nomenclature, status, and functions of the various gen-
eral officer, officer, and enlisted grades. Explains any
special categories. Provides a table showing for each
grade, starting with the highest, the designation in the
language of the country, and the nearest U.S. equivalent.
2. Conditions of service
a. OFFICER - Describes the conditions of service of
officers, including promotion and retirement systems.
Generally indicates whether service conditions affect
morale and standards.
b. ENLISTED-Describes the conditions of service
of enlisted personnel, including advancement in grade,
and pension plans, and indicates whether the service
conditions are conducive to good morale.
3. Uniforms and insignia
Describes and illustrates by sketches the principal
types of officer and enlisted uniforms, noting color, gen-
eral styling, and kind of material used. Describes and
illustrates branch or category insignia, including in par-
ticular aircrew insignia.
H. Training
Characterizes the quality and effectiveness of the
overall training system, emphasizing its strengths and
weaknesses.
1. Preoperational flying
a. PILOT-Describes the schools for pilot training,
including entrance requirements, length of course, flying
and aviation ground curricula, facilities, and equipment.
Points out areas of major emphasis. Notes whether the
schools have met operational requirements, giving output
data for significant periods.
b. OTHER AIRCREW - Follows guide under 1, a,
above, insofar as applicable.
2. Aviation ground personnel
Describes schools for aviation ground personnel, in-
cluding entrance requirements, length of course, cur-
ricula, facilities, and equipment. Describes any other
training programs such as apprenticing or on-the-job
training. Notes whether the ground training system has
met operational requirements, giving output data for
significant periods.
3. Schools for advanced military
Describes the entrance requirements, curricula, dura-
tion, facilities, and equipment, and the annual output of
the schools which provide advanced military education
for selected personnel.
4. Operational
Describes operational training and the training system
and its control, indicating the provisions for particular
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
types of training as well as participation in maneuvers
and joint exercises.
5. Reserve
Describes training system for reserve force.
6. Foreign programs
Describes the nature and scope of training given to,
or received from, other countries.
7. Location list
Lists in order of precedence all air forces schools and
other training installations, showing the exact name,
English translation, location, character, and capacity of
each.
1. Logistics
1. Procurement
Describes the system of procurement and supply of
aircraft and materiel.
2. Basic requirements
a. TABLES OF EQUIPMENT - Presents in tabular form,
if possible, in such detail as importance of the air forces
warrants, the nonexpendable items of supply required by
basic components; includes aircraft, motor vehicles,
starter carts, tractors, ordnance, and the like.
b. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES - Presents in tabular form,
if possible, in such detail as importance of the air forces
warrants, the requirements for expendable supply items
such as: aviation fuel, in tons or gallons per aircraft per
mission; motor fuel, in gallons per mile per vehicle; ra-
tions, in pounds per man per day; munitions, in pounds
of ammunition and bombs per aircraft per mission.
3. Maintenance
a. CONTROL AND PLANNING - Describes the methods
of control and planning for maintenance of aircraft and
associated equipment, including such means of control
as log books, technical orders, publications, control
inspections.
b. SYSTEM IN OPERATION - Describes the procedures
employed at all echelons, including inspection cycles
and types of maintenance performed at each organiza-
tional level. If appropriate, illustrates by flow chart.
C. EFFECT OF CLIMATE ON MAINTENANCE - Discusses
effects of extreme ranges of temperatures, humidity,
winds, and other natural phenomena, as appropriate,
on aircraft maintenance.
4. Relationship of requirements to production
Discusses the ability of the country to provide for its
aviation needs, particularly in the fields of aircraft and
engines, aviation fuel, and aviation electronics, from its
own resources. Identifies the principal foreign sources
of supply and notes the degree of dependence upon
such sources.
5. Appraisal of the logistic system
a. EFFECTIVENESS OF THE SUPPLY SYSTEM - Discusses
the basic strengths and weaknesses of the system, assess-
ing its general effectiveness, and noting such factors as
its flexibility, expandability, and efficiency.
b. EFFECTIVENESS OF THE MAINTENANCE SYSTEM -
Follows guide under 5, a, above.
J. Air facilities
1. General
Summarizes the air facility system for the NIS Area in
quantitative and qualitative terms. Gives an appraisal
of the system's capability to support air operations. In-
dicates the potential for expansion of the system. Dis-
cusses generally the characteristics, including: runways,
parking and dispersal areas, radio aids, lighting, repair
and maintenance facilities, fuel, refueling equipment,
storage facilities, housing accommodations, and transpor-
tation for logistical support. Refers to the pertinent
volume of Airfields and Seaplane Stations of the World,
published by the Defense Intelligence Agency, for cur-
rent status and evaluated data.
2. Distribution
Discusses the airfield distribution pattern of the NIS
Area, identifying major airfield complexes and their im-
portance in the overall airfield picture. Draws attention
to areas where for significant reasons air facilities are
inadequate or do not exist. Provides general discussion
of potential airfield development, including consideration
of former airfield sites, logistics, and requirements for
such additional facilities.
K. Aircraft and materiel
Discusses aircraft and equipment, including ordnance,
qualitatively, emphasizing their important characteristics.
L. Means of identification
1. Aircraft markings
Describes and illustrates the markings, such as roundels
and fin flashes, used by the air forces to identify aircraft
nationality. The illustrative sketch may consist of the
markings only, provided the text gives their location on
the aircraft. Describes other markings on aircraft (ex-
cluding unit insignia) and explains their significance (ex-
amples: use of an identifying color for trainer aircraft
and use of camouflage).
2. Unit identification
Describes the system used by the air forces to identify
units and indicates where unit identifications appear on
aircraft and on uniforms. Notes any differences between
peacetime and wartime practices. If unit insignia other
than number or letter combinations are used, furnishes
sketches of those of the principal units.
M. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 5 Air Defense Forces
A. General
Provides a brief overall appraisal of the air defense
forces, citing. the most salient points of strength and
weakness as to organization, materiel, personnel, and
efficiency, which will be discussed in more detail in sub-
sequent paragraphs.
B. Historical development
Discusses features of past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical per-
spective and an understanding of the air defense forces
contemporary position and role.
C. Mission and doctrine
States the mission of the air defense forces as con-
ceived by the nation. Describes the official doctrine
pertaining to the employment of the air defense forces in
the accomplishment of their mission.
D. Organization
1. Air defense forces high command
Describes, illustrating with organization charts, the
top-level organization of the air defense forces, distin-
guishing among commands, services, and staff organiza-
tions, where possible. Under an appropriate subhead-
ing, describes in detail the functions and responsibilities
of the headquarters staff organization or its equivalent.
In all cases uses exact nomenclature; where English
equivalents are used, gives the foreign term in paren-
theses the first time reference is made. Refers to SEC-
TION 1, General, for discussion of the armed forces high
command.
2. Territorial organization
Describes the geographical zones, such as area com-
mands or air regions, into which the country is divided
for administrative and operational purposes; lists their
headquarters locations. Explains the functions of these
zones. Provides, an outline map unless the boundaries
coincide with major political subdivisions.
3. Major operational commands/components
Describes the functions, responsibilities, and organiza-
tional structure of each of the principal commands and
services of the air defense forces. Describes these com-
mands and services under separate subheadings and,
where appropriate, supplements the text with organiza-
tional charts.
4. Composition of operational commands
Describes, under appropriate subheadings and with
accompanying charts, the detailed structure and com-
position of all operational echelons. Includes summar-
ized tables of organization in narrative or chart form,
as appropriate.
E. Strength and disposition
1. Strength
Provides a generalized appraisal of the strength (equip-
ment and personnel) of the air defense units. Refers to
current publications of the Defense Intelligence Agency.
2. Disposition
Provides an evaluative discussion of the disposition
(aircraft, missile, air control and warning radar, anti-
aircraft artillery, and personnel) in the air defense or-
ganization. Uses separate subheadings as appropriate.
F. Operations
Describes, under appropriate subheadings, the opera-
tional procedures of the air defense forces, relating them
to D, Organization, above, insofar as possible. Describes
the operational procedures under separate subheadings.
Tells how they actually function (does this by describing
the normal sequence of events affecting the operation
of the organizations and the relation of the organizations
to other command elements). Describes combat tactics,
if appropriate.
G. Personnel
Refers to SECTION 1, General, for general and common
factors, SECTION 2, Ground Forces, and SECTION 4, Air
Forces.
H. Training
Describes briefly the training system, naming the prin-
cipal schools or types of schools. Assesses the general
adequacy of the training system. Describes operational
training, the training system and its control; and indi-
cates provisions for particular types of training as well
as participation in maneuvers and joint exercises. If
appropriate, refers to SECTION 2, Ground Forces, and
SECTION 4, Air Forces, for lists of schools and training
installations. Describes the nature and scope of train-
ing given to, or received from, other countries.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
1. Logistics
1. Procurement
Describes the system of procurement and supply of
air defense forces materiel.
2. Maintenance
Describes the methods of control and planning for
maintenance of equipment.
3. Appraisal of the logistic system
Discusses the basic strengths and weaknesses of the
logistic and maintenance systems, assessing their gen-
eral effectiveness, and noting such factors as their flexi-
bility, expandability, and efficiency.
J. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 6. Missile Forces
(Strategic Rocket Troops of the U.S.S.R. or similar forces as they may be developed.)
A. General
Provides a brief overall appraisal of the missile forces,
citing the most salient points of strength and weakness
as to organization, materiel, personnel, and efficiency,
which will be discussed in more detail in subsequent
paragraphs.
B. Historical development
Discusses features of past development and perform-
ance, which will provide the necessary historical per-
spective and an understanding of the missile forces con-
temporary position and role.
C. Mission and doctrine
States the mission of the missile forces as conceived
by the nation. Describes the official doctrine pertaining
to the employment of the missile forces in the accom-
plishment of their mission.
D. Organization
1. Missile forces high command
Describes, illustrating with organization charts, the
top-level organization of the missile forces, distinguishing
among commands, services, and staff organizations,
where possible. Under an appropriate subheading, de-
scribes in detail the functions and responsibilities of the
headquarters staff organization or its equivalent. In all
cases uses exact nomenclature; where English equiva-
lents are used, gives the foreign term in parentheses the
first time reference is made. Refers to SECTION 1, Gen-
eral, for discussion of the armed forces high command.
2. Territorial organization
Describes the geographical zones, such as area com-
mands into which the country is divided for missile
forces administrative and operational purposes, and lists
their headquarters locations. Explains the functions of
these zones. Provides an outline map unless the bound-
aries coincide with major political subdivisions.
3. Major operational commands/components
Describes the functions, responsibilities, and organiza-
tional structure of each of the principal commands and
services of the missile forces. Describes these compo-
nents under separate subheadings and, where appro-
priate, supplements the text with organizational charts.
4. Composition of operational commands
Describes, under appropriate subheadings and with
accompanying charts, the detailed structure and com-
position of all operational echelons. Includes summar-
ized tables of organization in narrative or chart form,
as appropriate.
E. Strength and disposition
Provides a generalized appraisal of the strength and
disposition of the major missile units.
1. Strength
a. MISSILE - Provides an evaluative discussion of
current number of missile units by type.
b. PERSONNEL - Provides general appraisal of per-
sonnel strength by major components, including numbers
of officers and enlisted men.
2. Disposition
Describes in general terms the disposition of forces;
indicates any significant concentrations.
F. Tactics
Describes, under appropriate subheadings, the missile
forces basic doctrines. Explains the tactics and tech-
niques down to an appropriate level.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
G. Personnel
1. Grade and pay
Describes the grade and pay structure of the missile
forces, indicating any differences from U.S. practice in
the nomenclature, status, and functions of the various
general officer, officer, and enlisted grades. Explains
any special categories. Provides a table showing for
each grade, starting with the highest, the designation in
the language of the country, and the nearest U.S. equiva-
lent.
2. Conditions of service
a. OFFICER - Describes the conditions of service of
officers, including promotion and retirement systems.
Generally indicates whether service conditions affect
morale and standards.
b. ENLISTED - Describes the conditions of service of
enlisted personnel, including advancement in grade and
pension plans, and indicates whether the service condi-
tions are conducive to good morale.
H. Training
Describes, under appropriate subheadings, the training
system as a whole, naming the principal schools or types
of schools, and assessing the general adequacy of the
training system. Under an appropriate subheading, dis-
cusses in detail the following: preliminary training, pre-
operational officer training, enlisted specialist training,
schools for advanced military training, unit operational
training, reserve training, and foreign training program.
Lists in order of precedence all missile forces schools and
other training installations, showing the exact name,
English translation, location, character, and capacity of
each.
1. Logistics
1. Supply
a. CONTROL AND PLANNING - Describes the methods
by which the overall supply program is established and
controls are exercised. by higher headquarters of the
missile forces.
b. SYSTEM IN OPERATION - Describes procedures and
channels for procurement, requisition, distribution, and
storage of supplies.
2. Procurement
Describes the machinery for the planning and control
of procurement of the various classes of materiel, includ-
ing design, placement of orders, acceptance, and testing.
Discusses the ability of the country to satisfy its missile
requirements, including engines, fuel, and electronics,
from its own resources.
3. Maintenance
a. CONTROL AND PLANNING - Describes the methods
of control and planning for maintenance of missiles and
associated equipment, including means of control such as
logbooks, technical orders, publications, and control
inspections.
b. SYSTEM IN OPERATION -. Describes the procedures
employed at all echelons, including inspection cycles and
types of maintenance performed at each organization
level.
C. SERVICING MISSILE EQUIPMENT -- Describes any
special indoctrination given to units in maintaining equip-
ment.
4. Appraisal of logistic system
Discusses the basic strengths and weaknesses of the
supply and maintenance programs, assessing their general
effectiveness, and noting factors such as flexibility, ex-
pandability, and efficiency.
J. Missile facilities
Summarizes the missile launch facilities system in quan-
titative and qualitative terms. Discusses development,
characteristics, and distribution.
K. Means of identification
1. Missile forces markings
Describes and illustrates the markings used by the
missile forces to identify equipment nationality. The il=
lustrative sketch may consist of the markings only, pro-
vided the text gives their location on equipment. De-
scribes any other markings and explains their significance.
Discusses painting of equipment in certain colors; use
of camouflage.
2. Unit identification
Describes the system used by the missile forces to
identify units and indicates where unit identifications
appear on missile equipment and uniforms.
L. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 7. Military Space Systems
A. General
Provides a brief overall appraisal of space program
activities which have military applications.
B. Historical development
Discusses features of past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical perspec-
tive and an understanding of space program activities
which have military applications.
C. Organization
Describes the agency or organization having respon-
sibility for the space program and explains its relation-
ship to the military services.
D. Training
Describes the facilities associated with the training of
space personnel. Lists in order of precedence all schools
and other training installations, showing the exact name,
English translation, location, character, and capacity of
each.
E. Space support facilities
Discusses the facilities utilized to launch space ve-
hicles. Assesses the capabilities and limitations of these
facilities.
F. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
129
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
The Outline Guides for the following sections present the normal
content, preferred treatment, and general arrangement of each
topical section for a complex or relatively well studied NIS Ocean
Area. For many Areas, however, no Section 4, Climate and Ocean-
ography of Selected Straits, will be needed, and in any of the sec-
tions, certain modifications in balance or coverage may be desirable.
The Outline Guide should be used flexibly and adapted to assure
adequate treatment of topics meaningful to the particular NIS Ocean
Area. In preparation and typing of manuscripts, NIS Editorial
Instructions should be followed in detail.
Section 1 Marine Climate
Section 2 -Oceanography
Section 3 -Effects of Marine Climate and Oceanography
on Military Operations
Section 4 - Climate and Oceanography of Selected Straits
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 1. Marine Climate
A. General
Discusses the major climatic controls of the ocean
basin and/or the hemisphere and their interrelationships
with the climate of the specific Area. Presents a brief
synopsis of the most important aspects of the climatic
conditions of the NIS Area.
B. Climatic controls
The discussion* of climatic controls of the NIS Area
includes:
1. General circulation and pressure distribution
Presents a general comparison of the pressure distribu-
tion both areally and with time at the surface and in
the lower troposphere (roughly the 700-millibar level
and below). Illustrates these pressure relationships
by schematic charts for standard levels of mean pressure-
height contours or of mean resultant wind streamlines
and isotachs. General climatic zones may be delineated
according to wind, pressure, and air-mass regimes.
2. Air masses and zones of interaction
Discusses air-mass characteristics in detail, emphasiz-
ing their climatic influence and seasonal areal extent.
Zones of interaction include, when pertinent, both textual
and graphical treatment of the areal extent and frequency
of extratropical and tropical cyclonic systems, fronts, and
the intertropical convergence zone.
C. Climatic elements
Discusses the following elements by months or seasons,
as appropriate:
1. Winds
a. SURFACE- Presents wind speed frequencies for
specified wind speed groups and directions, as well as
frequencies of light winds and gales. Includes a treat-
ment of winds peculiar to specified regions and winds
of local significance. Discusses persistence when ap-
plicable.
b. UPPER AIR-Includes persistence of wind speed
and wind direction for standard levels in the lower
Liberal use is made of pertinent charts, graphs, and other
illustrative material,
troposphere. Discusses the relation of upper winds to
pressure patterns.
2. Air temperature
a. SURFACE - Discusses surface air temperatures
and air-sea temperature differences according to seasons
or by climatic regimes, whichever is more appropriate.
Emphasizes variations and upper and lower limits.
b. UPPER AIR - Presents information on tempera-
ture ranges, means, and variations therefrom for stand-
ard levels in the lower troposphere. Includes informa-
tion on atmospheric stability.
3. Relative humidity
Discusses relative humidity in the lower troposphere
by seasons or climatic regimes. Presents information on
the effects of pressure systems, fronts, and inversions on
relative humidity.
4. Precipitation
Discusses types and characteristics of precipitation
according to seasons or by climatic regimes. Gives fre-
quency of precipitation and precipitation amounts, when
available.
5. Cloudiness
Discusses cloud amount, types of clouds, and ceiling
heights, if available, according to seasons or by climatic
regimes. Includes total cloud and low cloud cover.
6. Visibility
Considers visibility conditions according to seasons or
by climatic regimes. Includes frequency of specified
visibility restrictions where pertinent.
7. Special weather phenomena
Discusses phenomena peculiar to the NIS Area, e.g.,
optical phenomena, squalls, waterspouts, and thunder-
storms.
D. Map and chart appraisal
Evaluates the principal marine climatic charts of the
Area, in addition to those presented in the section.
E. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
133
wMiD Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 2. Oceanography
A. General
Discusses the major oceanographic controls of the
ocean basin and/or the hemisphere and their :interrela-
tionships with the oceanography of the specific Area.
Presents a brief synopsis of oceanographic conditions.
B. Marine geology and geophysics
1. General
Outlines briefly the significance of marine geology and
geophysics in the Area.
2. Submarine physiography
Discusses the physiographic provinces and provides a
description of bathymetric features in the Area.
3. Submarine geology
Discusses the rocks and sediments and the formation
and significance of islands as related to submarine
geology. Provides information on the broad marine
structural features and their causes; includes structural
trends and their interpretation. Presents qualitative and
quantitative information on the crust of the earth above
the Mohorovicic discontinuity.
4. Bottom sediments
Discusses qualitatively and quantitatively bottom sedi-
ments and rocks. In addition, sediment source, trans-
portation, methods and rates of deposition, and areas of
nondeposition are discussed.
5. Seismicity
Discusses the areal and temporal distribution of earth-
quakes and their relation to the marine environment.
Also includes a historical account of tsunamis.
6. Volcanism
Discusses the location and history of past volcanic
activity and changes in bottom sediments resulting from
such activity.
7. Gravity
Discusses gravity anomalies of the Area, including
observed, free-air, and isostatic gravity anomalies.
8. Geomagnetism
Describes in general terms the geomagnetic character-
istics of the NIS Area; includes the spatial and temporal
variations of the magnetic field and its relation to other
environmental elements. Discusses auroras if pertinent.
C. Currents
1. Surface currents
Discusses the general surface circulation of water in
the Area, with emphasis on the variations from the mean
circulation and the effects of winds and of tidal currents.
2. Subsurface currents
Supplies information available from direct current
observations or from physical properties. Currents are
presented as water mass movement, i.e., surface, inter-
mediate, deep, bottom or whatever similar breakdown
is feasible, (If information of this nature is not avail-
able, the discussion is limited to those depths which
are of significance in SECTION 3, Effects of Marine Climate
and Oceanography on Military Operations.)
3. Other
Discusses special current features or peculiarities.
Discussion will not appear in every NIS.
D. Ice
1. General
Discusses in general the controls affecting sea ice con-
ditions and sources of icebergs in the Area.
2. Sea ice
Discusses means and variations therefrom of coverage,
concentration, dates of appearance and disappearance,
drifts, and physical characteristics of sea ice within the
NIS Area.
3. Glacier ice
Supplies information on the distribution, drifts, and
limits of glacier ice, with emphasis on icebergs.
4. Local conditions
Discusses ice conditions at ports and other selected
coastal locations; includes ice thickness, length of navi-
gation season, and dates of ice appearance, freezeup,
breakup, and disappearance.
E. Sea and swell
1. General
Defines terminology and provides general information
on sea and swell.
2. Climatic controls and seasonal variations
Discusses on a seasonal basis the frequency of occur-
rence of sea and swell heights and directions throughout
134
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
the NIS Area and the climatic factors which control sea
and swell.
3. Seasonal distribution of wave period-height and
period-direction
Provides wave information based on simultaneous
observations of wave height, period, and direction.
Discusses on a seasonal basis the frequency distribution
of each of these variables.
4. Persistence of waves
Supplies information on the occurrence and per-
sistence of certain wave threshold values.
F. Sea water characteristics
1. General
Provides background information on the physical
properties of sea water, defines terminology, and ex-
plains factors controlling temperature, salinity, density,
color, and transparency.
2. Description of the NIS Area
a. TEMPERATURE - Discusses surface temperature
by sectors. Discussion includes distribution, variability,
ranges, anomalies, and special features of thermal struc-
ture. Vertical and subsurface temperature distributions
are discussed by sectors, including depth and strength
of the thermocline and seasonal variation, general verti-
cal thermal structure, and general horizontal subsurface
distribution of temperature.
b. SALINITY - Discusses surface, vertical, and sub-
surface salinity distributions by sectors.
c. DENSITY - Discusses surface, vertical, and sub-
surface density by sectors.
d. COLOR - Describes water color in the NIS Area.
e. TRANSPARENCY - Discusses visual transparency of
the water.
f. SOUND VELOCITY - Discusses surface and subsur-
face sound velocity.
G. Water level fluctuations
1. Astronomical
Provides information on the types of tides, tide ranges,
and manner of progression of the tide throughout the
Area. Illustrations are included, depending upon data
available.
2. Meteorological
Discusses any changes in water level owing to mete-
orological conditions. Illustrations are included, depend-
ing upon data available.
H. Marine biology
1. Fouling
Discusses the basic aspects and characteristics of foul-
ing in the Area, with emphasis on geographic variation
of environmental factors, temporal and seasonal se-
quences, and qualitative and quantitative aspects of the
fouling complex.
2. Boring
Discusses marine boring organisms of the Area, includ-
ing their geographic distribution and the severity, meth-
ods, and seasonal variations of attack.
3. Vegetation
Describes species of algae and seagrasses in the Area,
with a discussion of pertinent environmental factors,
growth and seasonal characteristics, and vertical and
geographic distribution.
4. Bioluminescence
Discusses the causative organisms, their seasonal and
geographic distribution, and the types and distribution
of recorded displays.
5. Dangerous animals
Enumerates and describes important dangerous marine
animals, including injurious, venomous, and poisonous
(inedible) forms, with information on their, distribution,
habitats, abundance, method of attack, and effects on
victims.
6. Sound-producing and sound-scattering organisms
Describes the various animal sound producers, re-
flectors, and scatterers, with information on their distribu-
tion and migration. Describes deep and shallow scat-
tering layers, including information on the causative
organisms, experimental results, and variations in con-
centrations of the organisms.
I. Map and chart appraisal
Presents an itemized discussion of the principal ocean-
ographic charts of the Area.
J. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Section 3. Effects of Marine Climate and Oceanography on
Military Operations
A. General
Presents brief synopses of the most significant aspects
of location, size, shape, strategic implications, and gen-
eral climatic and oceanographic conditions as they affect
military operations in the Area.
B. Air
Discusses the environmental effects of the NIS Area
on the following types of air operations:
1. Aircraft operations
Presents information on the expectancy of opera-
tionally important weather elements and environmental
phenomena such as contrails, clear air turbulence, upper
level winds, cloudiness, visibility, and icing as they affect
flight planning, air navigation, aerial reconnaissance, and
other air operations. Describes weather forecasting
facilities.
2. Missiles
Discusses environmental effects on operation, guid-
ance, and detection of missiles.
3. Atomic defense
Discusses the effect of environment on the dispersal
of radioactive fallout particles and other results of atomic
bomb bursts.
4. Electromagnetic propagation
a. RADAR - Discusses the probability of extended
radar ranges, with particular emphasis on early defense
warning systems and anomalous propagation such as
radar holes and ducting conditions.
b. RADIO - Discusses radio reception in terms of
space and time with respect to the auroral zone. Dis-
cusses the 11-year periodicity of sunspots and position in
the cycle.
C. Surface
Discusses the environmental effects of the NIS Area
on the following:
1. Ship operations
Discusses superstructure icing, effects of winds and
currents, sea and glacier ice, sea surface roughness
(slamming, water intake, excessive accelerations, and
minimum-time sea routes), ship degaussing, magnetic
compass variation and reliability, and biological factors
(fouling, boring, clogging, bioluminescence, and biologi-
cal sound).
2. Amphibious and logistics operations
Discusses in a general manner bottom conditions, local
problems in navigation, longshore currents, surf, tides,
beach trafficability and stability, and biological factors,
which are important in amphibious, offloading, and port
operations. (More detailed data on amphibious opera-
tions are contained in SECHON 22, Coasts and Landing
Beaches.)
3. Mining operations
Discusses the role of the sea floor on the behavior of
mines subsequent to laying, the effects of currents and
waves on mines, water transparency, biological factors,
and spurious firing caused by seismic, magnetic, and
bottom pressure variations. (Effect of the environment
on minehunting with underwater ordnance locator gear
is discussed under D, 3, Other subsurface operations.)
4. Air-sea rescue and survival at sea
Discusses sea and swell conditions (in respect to
takeoff, landing, refueling, and boarding of seaplanes.,
and ditching of aircraft), currents (in respect to drift of
survivors), sea ice (in respect to the safety of landing on
or in it), human survival of immersion hypothermia, and
dangerous marine animals.
5. Personnel, clothing, and equipment
Discusses factors affecting personnel (windchill and
dangerous marine animals) and equipment (corrosion,
fouling, boring, and seismic and volcanic activity).
D. Subsurface
Discusses the environmental effects of the NIS Area
on the following types of subsurface operations:
1. Submarine and antisubmarine operations
Discusses vertical changes in density and seasonal
variations therein, depth and strength of the balancing
layer and seasonal variations, navigation under ice, water
transparency, electrical conductivity, surface and subsur-
face currents, wave conditions (depth of wave action),
snorkel problems (icing), bioluminescence, and bottom
characteristics.
a. GENERAL - Defines terminology and provides
general information on sound propagation.
UUITYTBP~
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release -1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
b. SONAR - Discusses effects of physical proper-
ties of the water, sea state, sea bottom, and ambient
noise on sonar performance. Describes by seasons sonar
conditions throughout the NIS Area. This presentation
describes probable performance of sonars (surface ship,
airborne, and submarine) of all frequencies as well as
variable depth sonar and explosive echo ranging; in-
formation is presented on the best depth to escape
detection, and assured ranges and likely-ranges with
listening gear: Convergence zone transmission is
described.
C. SOFAR AND RAFOS - Explains the principles and
factors controlling long-range sound transmission.
Depths and variations of sound channels in the Area are
discussed. Horizontal variations in axial sound speeds
are portrayed.
d. AMBIENT NOISE - Discusses all types of noise in
the sea exclusive of self noise inherent in sonar equip-
ment and platform.
3. Other subsurface operations
Discusses those environmental factors which affect
such operations as underwater construction and demoli-
tion, salvage, disposal of atomic and other wastes, and
cable laying, e.g., bottom topography and type, wave
conditions, subsurface currents and temperatures, bio-
logical factors and water transparency.
E. Map and chart appraisal
Discusses the principal marine climatic and oceano-
graphic charts of the Area.
F. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
Section 4. Climate and Oceanography of Selected Straits
A. Selected strait (Repeat for each. Emphasis is
on graphic presentation.)
Presents a brief discussion of the strait, covering size,
strategic importance, and major geographic and oceano-
graphic features.
1. Climate
a. SUMMARY - Briefly summarizes the major cli-
matic features of the strait.
b. DEPRESSIONS - Describes the seasonal distribu-
tion, tracks, and typical weather associated with low-
pressure systems and/or tropical depressions affecting
the strait.
c. SURFACE WINDS - Describes speed and direction
distribution of winds over the strait, frequency of gales,
and land and sea breezes.
d. VISIBILITY - Describes frequency and duration
of fog and other restrictions to visibility.
e. PRECIPITATION - Describes types, amount, fre-
quency, and persistence of precipitation in the strait.
f. CLOUDINESS - Describes cloud coverage, ceilings,
frequency, and diurnal and seasonal variations. Presents
frequency distribution of low clouds.
g. AIR TEMPERATURE - Describes air temperature
means, extremes, ranges, and variations on an annual,
monthly, and diurnal basis.
h. RELATIVE HUMIDITY - Describes the variation of
relative humidity and its controls.
1. SPECIAL WEATHER PHENOMENA - Presents infor-
mation on frequency of thunderstorms, waterspouts, and
other severe weather phenomena on a seasonal or ap-
propriate time basis.
2. Marine geology and geophysics
a. BATHYMETRY - Illustrates and describes the gen-
eral bathymetric characteristics of the strait.
b. BorroM SEDIMENTS - Illustrates and describes
the type and distribution of bottom sediments of the
strait and its approaches.
c. SEISMICITY - Illustrates and describes the type
of seismic activity in the strait and its approaches.
d. VOLCANISM - Illustrates and describes the type
of volcanic activity in the strait and its approaches.
e. GRAVITY - Observed, free-air, and isostatic
anomalies of gravity.
f. GEOMAGNETISM - Geomagnetic variations, in-
clination or dip, horizontal intensity, vertical intensity,
and anomalies.
3. Water level fluctuations
Describes the characteristic features of the vertical rise
and fall of the water level from all forces including
astronomical and meteorological. Illustrations include
cotidal and corange charts, and tide curves, depending
upon data available.
4. Currents
Describes surface and subsurface currents within the
strait; includes effects of currents on mines. Illustrations
included, depending upon data available.
C`,nATfli j.@- 137
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release 1999/09/21
5. Ice
Information is provided on dates of ice formation and
clearing, ice coverage and concentration, movement, and
physical characteristics.
6. Sea and swell
a. GENERAL - Summarizes the major features of
sea and swell conditions in the strait and their controls.
b. DISTRIBUTION - Describes sea and swell condi-
tions by seasons or other appropriate time scale through-
out the strait. Illustrations include sea and swell roses
showing the distribution of heights and directions, fre-
quency of waves exceeding 5 feet, and persistence of
specified wave conditions.
c. DEPTH OF WAVE ACTION - Discusses significant
subsurface wave action. Illustrates the occurrence of
bottom pressure fluctuations (for various depths) re-
sulting from surface waves.
7. Sea water characteristics
a. GENERAL - Discusses major features of the
physical properties of the water of the strait and their
controls,
b. TEMPERATURE - Describes and illustrates mean
sea surface and subsurface temperatures and variations
therefrom on an appropriate time scale. Presents in-
formation on the depth and strength of the thermocline.
Variations with depth are shown by means of typical
bathythermograms, vertical profiles, and subsurface plan
views.
c. SALINITY - Similar treatment to that of 7, b,
Temperature.
d. DENSITY - Similar treatment to that of 7, b,
Temperature.
e. ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY - Presents information
on seasonal changes of electrical conductivity with depth.
f. WATER COLOR AND TRANSPARENCY - Describes
prevailing water color and transparency of water in the
strait and variations therefrom.
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
8. Underwater sound
a. SOUND STRUCTURE - Describes and illustrates
mean surface and subsurface sound speeds in the strait
and variations therefrom.
b. SONAR - Presents probable ranges by seasons
or other appropriate time scale for sonars (surface
ship, airborne, and submarine) of all frequencies, in-
cluding minehunting types. Discusses the effects of
transducer tilt and varying the depth of the transducer.
Describes ambient noise and bottom effects, including
reverberation.
C, PASSIVE LISTENING - Presents probable ranges ob-
tained by Heralds and submarine listening. Describes
background noise.
d. BIOLOGICAL SOUND -- Discusses sound reflection,
production, and scattering by animals which may inter-
fere with acoustic operations in the strait.
e. SCATTERING LAYERS - Discusses depths and diur-
nal and seasonal migrations of scattering layers.
9. Marine biology
a. BIOLUMINESCENCE -? Describes types of organ-
isms, distribution, intensity, and seasonality of biolu-
minescence.
b. VEGETATION - Describes types and distribution
of marine algae and seagrasses in the strait.
c. FOULING - Describes types, intensity, and sea-
sons of attachment of biological fouling.
10. Other physical characteristics
Discusses auroras, when appropriate, and any other
factors of significance in the strait. Illustrations are
included, depending upon data available.
11. Map and chart appraisal
Presents an itemized discussion of the principal marine
climatic and oceanographic charts of the strait.
12. Comments on principal sources
(See explanation under Editorial Instructions.)
B, C, etc. (other selected straits)
138
Approved For Release 1999/09/21.: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 25X6A
L Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
Next 8 Page(s) In Document Exempt
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2
 Approved For Release "1999109/211.: CIArRDP79.01055A000300050001-2
Approved'For.Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300050001-2